English Printed in Taiwan XG

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "English Printed in Taiwan XG"

Transcription

1 COVER 1-4 C M Y K English Printed in Tiwn XG

2 Congrtultions on choosing our product! Thnk you very much for purchsing our product. To otin the est performnce from this device nd to ensure sfe nd correct opertion, plese red this Instruction Mnul crefully, nd then keep it in sfe plce together with your wrrnty. Plese red efore using this product For designing eutiful emroidery designs This system llows you to crete wide vriety of emroidery designs nd supports wider rnge of sewing ttriute settings (thred density, sewing pitch, etc.). However, the finl result will depend on your prticulr sewing mchine model. We recommend tht you mke tril sewing smple with your sewing dt efore sewing on the finl mteril. For sfe opertion Do not sve ny files on the "Plette Softwre Key" for trnsferring or storge. Do not plug the "Plette Softwre Key" into your sewing mchine. For longer service life When storing the "Plette Softwre Key", void direct sunlight nd high humidity loctions. Do not store the "Plette Softwre Key" close to heter, iron or other hot ojects. Do not spill wter or other liquids on the "Plette Softwre Key". Do not drop or hit the "Plette Softwre Key". For repirs or djustments In the event tht mlfunction occurs or djustment is required, plese consult your nerest service center. Notice Since this "Plette Softwre Key" device is required to run the softwre, its replcement vlue is the retil price of the softwre. Plese keep in sfe plce when not in use. Neither this Instruction Mnul nor the Reference Guide explins how to use your computer under Windows. Plese refer to the Windows mnuls. Copyright cknowledgment Windows is registered trdemrk of Microsoft Corportion. Other product nmes mentioned in the Instruction Mnul nd Reference Guide my e trdemrks of registered trdemrks of their respective compnies nd re herey cknowledged. Cution The softwre included with this product is protected y copyright lws. This softwre cn e used or copied only in ccordnce with the copyright lws. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS This product is intended for household use. For dditionl product informtion nd updtes, visit our wesite t: 1

3 Tle of Contents Tle of Contents...2 How To Use Mnuls...4 Support/Service...5 Technicl Support...5 Online Registrtion...5 Checking for the Ltest Version of the Progrm...6 Plette Softwre Key...7 Comprison of Types of Dt Creted With Plette Ver Strting Up/Exiting Applictions...9 Strting Up the Appliction...9 Exiting the Appliction...9 Aout the Strtup Wizrd...10 Understnding Windows...11 Lyout & Editing Window...11 Exmple of Importing Emroidery Dt...13 Bsic Softwre Settings...14 Specifying the Design Pge Settings...14 Using Fric Selector...17 Specifying Bsic Disply Settings...18 Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions...22 Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design...23 Editing Emroidery Designs...31 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions...46 Drwing Shpes...60 Reshping Emroidery Ptterns...66 Editing Stitch Pttern...71 Checking Emroidery Ptterns...77 Opening/Importing Emroidery Designs...90 Sving nd Printing...95 Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text Tutoril 2: Using Templtes Templte Feture Tutoril 3: Entering text Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Tutoril 4: Monogrms Advnced Opertions for Entering Monogrms Tutoril 5: Creting Nme Drop Nme Drop Feture (Replcing Text) Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges Stitch Wizrd: Automticlly Converting n Imge to n Emroidery Design Tutoril 6-1: Auto Punch Auto Punch Fetures Tutoril 6-2: Cross Stitch Cross Stitch Fetures Tutoril 6-3: Photo Stitch Photo Stitch 1 Fetures Tutoril 6-4: Photo Stitch Photo Stitch 2 Fetures Advnced Stitch Wizrd Opertions Importing Imge Dt Chnging the Imge Settings Tutoril 7: Print nd Stitch Opertions for Specific Applictions Tutoril 8-1: Creting Appliqués Tutoril 8-2: Creting Emroidered Ptches Tutoril 8-3: Creting Cutwork Pttern Filled with Net Stitching On Using the Cutwork Functions Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs Tutoril 9-2: Creting Design for Multi-Position Hoops Tutoril 9-3: Emroidering With the Jumo Frme Specifying/Sving Custom Sewing Attriutes Using Mnul Punch Tool

4 Tle of Contents Trnsferring Dt Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer Design Center Bsic Design Center Opertions Design Center Window Originl Imge Stge Line Imge Stge Figure Hndle Stge Sew Setting Stge Design Dtse Design Dtse Window Strting Up Design Dtse Orgnizing Emroidery Designs Opening Emroidery Designs Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines Serching for n Emroidery Design Converting Emroidery Design Files to Different Formts Checking Emroidery Designs Outputting Ctlog of Emroidery Designs Editing the Points of Font Chrcter Pttern Checking the Creted Font Ptterns Sving Font Chrcter Ptterns Chnging the Settings Supplement For Bsic Opertions On Settings Chnging Vrious Settings For Mking n Effective Use of This Appliction Menus/Tools nd Reference Lyout & Editing Design Center Design Dtse Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Font Cretor Sewing Attriutes Font List Trouleshooting New Fetures of Plette Ver Index Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Bsic Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Opertions Creting Fill/Stmp Stitch Pttern Editing Pttern in Fill/Stmp Mode Creting Motif Stitch Pttern Editing Pttern in Motif Mode Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Window Opening Templte Preview Window Sving Ptterns Chnging the Settings Font Cretor Bsic Font Cretor Opertions Font Cretor Window Opening File Selecting Chrcter nd Prepring the Templte Creting Font Chrcter Pttern...287

5 How To Use Mnuls The following mnuls re included with this softwre. Reference Guide Red this guide efore using the softwre. This guide contins instructions nd precutions necessry to egin using the softwre. The second hlf is filled with tutorils tht use key fetures to crete emroidery ptterns s well s project exmples. Instruction Mnul This mnul contins instruction on how to use the Plette softwre. First, red "Plette Softwre Key", "Strting Up/Exiting Appliction", "Comprison of Types of Dt Creted With Plette Ver.10", "Exmple of Importing Emroidery Dt" nd "Understnding Windows" to gin generl understnding of the sic softwre pplictions. Next, red "Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions". This chpter provides procedures for creting emroidery ptterns s exmples for performing sic Lyout & Editing opertions nd trnsferring ptterns to the emroidery mchine. Follow the procedures to crete ctul emroidery ptterns. The chpters dedicted to ech ppliction provide descriptions of the useful functions nd the vrious settings. Ech descriptive title llows you to esily find the informtion tht you need. In the chpters contining tutorils, follow the procedures to prctice the vrious opertions. Afterwrd, red the detiled descriptions. Additionl informtion is provided in the following chpters. Red the pproprite chpter when necessry. Support/Service: Provides wrrnty informtion for this product in ddition to the procedure for updting the softwre. Supplement: Provides function introductions, detils on the settings ville in the [Options] dilog ox nd trouleshooting procedures in ddition to tips nd precutions to mximize the use of this softwre. Menus/Tools nd Reference: Provides lists of sew types, sewing ttriutes nd fonts in ddition to the vrious commnds. The procedures in this mnul re written for use in Windows 8.1. If this softwre is used on n operting system other thn Windows 8.1, the procedures nd ppernce of the windows my differ slightly. Opening the Instruction Mnul (PDF formt) This mnul is provided in PDF formt on the included "Plette Softwre Key". The Instruction Mnul is lso instlled during softwre instlltion. Click the down rrow in the ottom-left corner of the [Strt] screen to show the [All Apps] view, nd then Click [Instruction Mnul] under the title [Plette Ver.10] in the screen. (For Windows 7 or Windows Vist users: Click [All Progrms], then [Plette Ver.10], then [Instruction Mnul].) Otherwise, with ny ppliction other thn Design Dtse, click, then [Instruction Mnul]. With Design Dtse, click [Help], then [Instruction Mnul]. Adoe Reder is required for viewing nd printing the PDF version of the Instruction Mnul. If Adoe Reder is not on your computer, it must e instlled. It cn e downloded from the Adoe Systems Incorported We site ( 4

6 Support/Service Technicl Support Contct Technicl Support if you hve prolem. Go to then click on Customer Support. Hve the informtion redy efore contcting Technicl Support. Mke sure your computer's operting system is current with ll updtes. Hve the mke nd model of your computer nd Windows Operting System. (Refer to the Reference Guide for system requirements.) Informtion on error messges tht pper. This informtion will help expedite your questions more quickly. Mke sure Plette Ver.10 is current with ny updtes. Online Registrtion If you wish to e contcted out upgrdes nd provided with importnt informtion such s future product developments nd improvements, you cn register your product online y following simple registrtion procedure. Click in Lyout & Editing, then [Online Registrtion] to strt up the instlled We rowser nd open the online registrtion pge on our We site. The online registrtion pge on the We site ppers when the following ddress is entered in the ddress r of the We rowser. Online registrtion my not e ville in some res. 5

7 Support/Service Checking for the Ltest Version of the Progrm Click in Lyout & Editing, then [Check for Updtes]. The softwre is checked to determine whether or not it is the ltest version. If the messge shown elow ppers, the ltest version of the softwre is eing used. If the messge shown elow ppers, the ltest version of the softwre is not eing used. Click [Yes], nd then downlod the ltest version of the softwre from the We site. If the [Alwys check for most recent version t strtup] check ox is selected, the softwre is checked t strtup to determine whether or not it is the ltest version. 6

8 Plette Softwre Key In order to use Plette Ver.10, the included "Plette Softwre Key" must e plugged into USB port of the computer. The "Plette Softwre Key" prevents unuthorized use of this softwre. The softwre cnnot e strted if the "Plette Softwre Key" is not plugged in. The "Plette Softwre Key" cnnot e used s USB medi. Do not sve emroidery files on the "Plette Softwre Key" for trnsferring or storge. When the "Plette Softwre Key" is plugged into USB port of the computer, the [AutoPly] dilog ox ppers. Do not use this dilog ox. Click to close the dilog ox, nd then strt up Plette Ver.10. When the messge "Do you wnt to scn nd fix Removle Disk (E:)?" ppers, select [Continue without scnning] nd then strt up Plette Ver.10. The drive nme for the Removle Disk differs depending on computers. To unplug the "Plette Softwre Key" from the computer, click [Strt] - [Computer], right-click the "Plette Softwre Key", nd then click [Eject]. Do not formt the "Plette Softwre Key". We recommend tht you ck up this softwre in order to prepre for unexpected prolems. 7

9 Comprison of Types of Dt Creted With Plette Ver.10 Three types of dt re used in Plette Ver.10. Stitch pttern: Built-in emroidery dt (creted through conversion in Plette Ver.10) Text pttern: Dt creted with the [Text] tools Shpe pttern (Outline pttern): Dt creted with the [Shpes] tools. A uniform/multiple sewing direction(s) re pplied to the entire region. Ech dt cn e converted to nother type s shown elow. The rrows indicte the directions in which dt cn e converted. The methods of editing the dt differ depending on the dt type. Chnge the shpe y editing needle drop points. Stitch pttern Chnge the shpe y editing pths. Shpe pttern You cn specify region nd line sew types s well s sewing ttriutes, edit pths (y moving/deleting points, reshping through hndle movements or y splitting/connecting lines t points), chnge the sewing direction, input/edit stmps, pply emossing/engrving effects, remove/merge overlpping regions, set hole sewing, split outlines nd crete offset lines nd florl ptterns. For exmple, when stitch pttern is converted to shpes, the sew types nd sewing ttriutes cn e chnged, nd the shpes cn esily e edited nd resized. When text pttern is converted to shpes, the sewing direction nd chrcter shpes cn e edited nd offset lines cn e creted. Text pttern Shpe pttern Edit the text or chnge the font. Stitch pttern You cn edit (reshping y moving/deleting points or splitting/connecting lines t points) points (needle drop points) nd split stitches; however, you cnnot specify region nd line sew types or sewing ttriutes. Text pttern You cn edit text y entering/deleting chrcters, specify text ttriutes (such s the font or the trnsformtion shpe) nd specify sewing ttriutes. Functions tht re not ville with one dt type my e performed if the dt is converted to different type. Convert dt to the type tht llows you to perform the opertions necessry for creting the desired emroidery dt. 8

10 Strting Up/Exiting Applictions Strting Up the Appliction Click the down rrow in the ottom-left corner of the [Strt] screen to show the [All Apps] view, nd then Click [Plette Ver.10 (Lyout & Editing)] under the title [Plette Ver.10] in the screen. When the ppliction strts up, the Strtup Wizrd ppers. cc "Aout the Strtup Wizrd" on pge 10 For Windows 7 or Windows Vist users: Click click [Plette Ver.10 (Lyout & Editing)]., then [All Progrms], then [Plette Ver.10], nd then Exiting the Appliction Click, then [Exit]. 9

11 Strting Up/Exiting Applictions Aout the Strtup Wizrd When [Lyout & Editing] strts up, the following wizrd ppers. c g j h cc Open Emroidery Design Click this utton to open emroidery dt (.pes). "Opening Lyout & Editing file" on pge 90 i Strt Design Dtse to Mnge Emroidery Files Click this utton to strt up Design Dtse. cc "Design Dtse" on pge 240 d e f l k i h j Click this utton to open the Instruction Mnul (in PDF formt). cc cc c cc Use Templte Designs Click this utton to strt the [Templte Wizrd]. "Tutoril 2: Using Templtes" on pge 101 Crete Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges Click this utton to strt the wizrd for creting n emroidery pttern from n imge. "Stitch Wizrd: Automticlly Converting n Imge to n Emroidery Design" on pge 131 nd "Importing Imge Dt" on pge 150 Set Hoop Size nd Fric Click this utton to specify the size of the Design Pge (emroidery hoop size). The fric to e emroidered cn e selected, nd the sewing ttriutes pproprite for tht fric cn e specified. "Specifying the Design Pge Settings" on pge 14 nd "Reclling group of settings from the list" on pge 192 k l Alwys show Wizrd t Strtup Select this check ox to strt up the wizrd ech time Lyout & Editing is strted up. Close this Wizrd Click this utton to close the Strtup Wizrd without performing n opertion. To open the wizrd while you re using the [Lyout & Editing], click t the top of the window (in the [Quick Access Toolr]), or click nd then select [Wizrd] from the commnd menu. d, e, f Click these uttons to import the pttern shown on the utton from the [Import] pne. g Most Recently Used Files Select thumnil of the most recently used file from the list, nd then click [Open] to recll the file. 10

12 Understnding Windows Lyout & Editing Window Appliction utton Click to disply menu contining commnds for file opertions, such s [New], [Sve], [Print] nd [Design Settings]. 2 Rion Click t t the top to disply the corresponding commnds. Refer to the nme elow ech group when selecting the desired commnd. Clicking commnd with the mrk displys menu contining choice of commnds. Some other ts my pper depending on the tool or emroidery pttern tht is selected. These ts contin vrious commnds for performing opertions with the selected tool or emroidery pttern. Exmple: When the Shpes (Rectngle) tool is selected 3 Quick Access Toolr This contins the most frequently used commnds. Since this toolr is lwys displyed, regrdless of the Rion t tht is selected, dding your most often used commnds mkes them esily ccessile. cc "Customizing Quick Access Toolr" on pge Option utton Click this utton to strt up other pplictions nd specify ppliction settings, such s user thred chrts. 11

13 Understnding Windows 5 Help utton Click this utton to disply the Instruction Mnul nd view informtion out the softwre. 6 Sewing Order pne This pne shows the sewing order. Click the uttons t the top of the pne to chnge the sewing order or thred color. 7 Import/Color/Sewing Attriutes/Text Attriutes pnes This pne comines ts for importing emroidery ptterns s well s for specifying thred colors, sewing ttriutes nd text ttriutes. Click t to disply the ville prmeters. 8 Stitch Simultor pne The Stitch Simultor shows how the pttern will e sewn y the mchine nd how the stitching will pper. 9 Design Pge The ctul prt of the work re tht cn e sved nd sewn. 10 Work re 11 Sttus Br This displys the size of the emroidery dt, the numer of stitches or description of the selected commnd. 12 View mode uttons Click utton to chnge the View mode. 13 Show grid utton Click to switch etween displying nd hiding the grid. 14 Design Property utton Click to disply dilog ox contining sewing informtion for the emroidery dt. 15 Zoom slider This displys the current mgnifiction rtio. Click to specify vlue for the mgnifiction rtio. Drg the slider to chnge the mgnifiction rtio. Pnes 6, 7 nd 8 cn e displyed or hidden from the [Show/Hide] group in the [View] t. In ddition, these pnes cn e displyed s seprte dilog oxes (Floting) or ttched to the min window (Docking). Position the pointer over commnd to disply ScreenTip, which provides description of the commnd nd indictes its shortcut key. 12

14 Understnding Windows Exmple of Importing Emroidery Dt Using the Import pne Emroidery dt cn e imported y using the [Import] pne. Using Import commnds 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Import Ptterns] in the [Import] group, nd then click [from Design Lirry], [from File], [from Crd] or [Decortive Pttern] from the [Import] menu. c d c d From Select pttern loction. Ctegory Select pttern ctegory. The ctegories in the pttern loction selected in the [From] selector re listed. The ptterns in the ctegory selected in the [Ctegory] selector pper in the list. Pointing to pttern nd holding down the left mouse utton displys dotted ox in the Design Pge. This llows you to check the size of the pttern. Import Click this utton to import the selected pttern. The [Import] pne ppers on the right side of the screen. The [Import] pne cn lso e displyed y selecting the [Import Pne] check ox in the [View] t. When the [Color] pne, [Sewing Attriutes] pne or [Text Attriutes] pne is displyed, click the [Import] t to disply the [Import] pne. The pttern cn lso e imported y douleclicking it in the list or y drgging it to the Design Pge. Multiple files cnnot e selected to e imported t the sme time. cc "From folder" on pge 91 nd "From n originl crd" on pge 92 13

15 Bsic Softwre Settings Specifying the Design Pge Settings The color nd size of the Design Pge cn e chnged. You cn select Design Pge size ccording to the size of hoop tht you will e using with your emroidery mchine. You cn lso specify custom size for the Design Pge for emroidery ptterns tht will e split nd emroidered in multiple sections. 1 Click, then [Design Settings]. d cc Custom Size Specify custom size for split emroidery ptterns. Select this option, nd then type or select the desired width nd height for the Design Pge. "Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs" on pge Specify the settings for the Design Pge, nd then click [OK]. c h e f g h Pge Select the desired color for the Design Pge. Bckground Select the desired color for the work re. Defult To return to the defult settings, click this utton. Edit User Hoop Click this utton to disply the [User Hoop Settings] dilog ox, where user hoop size cn e dded. The dded user hoop size ppers t the ottom of the list. cc "Specifying user hoop size" on pge 15 g d f e c Mchine Type Select your mchine type. The settings ville in the [Pge Size] selector differ depending on the selected mchine type. Hoop Size Select the desired hoop size from the selector. Rotte 90 Degrees Select this check ox to rrnge the pttern in Design Pge rotted

16 Bsic Softwre Settings The Design Pge sizes mm, mm indicted y the "*", re used to emroider multi-position designs using specil emroidery hoop ttched to the emroidery mchine t three instlltion positions. Specifying user hoop size d e f c cc "Tutoril 9-2: Creting Design for Multi- Position Hoops" on pge 183 Do not select hoop size lrger thn the emroidery hoop tht cn e used with your mchine. When Cp Frme, Cylinder Frme or Round Frme hs een selected, the Design Pge cnnot e rotted 90. c d e f Width, Height Type in the size of the hoop to e dded. Comment If text ws entered in this ox, tht text ppers eside the size. Add Hoop Click this utton to dd the hoop size. User Hoop List The dded hoop size ppers in the list. Select hoop size in this list to chnge the disply order or to delete it. Up, Down Click these uttons to move the selected hoop size up or down in the disply order. Delete Hoop Click this utton to delete the selected hoop size. A User Hoop cnnot rotte 90. A User Hoop cnnot e dded to the Section Size (for Hoop Size) selector under Custom Size. Do not crete Custom Hoop lrger thn the emroidery hoop tht cn e used with your mchine. Emroidery dt creted in user hoop size cnnot e sved in formt for previous version. 15

17 Bsic Softwre Settings Specifying the sewing re The pttern drwn in the Design Pge is sewn differently depending on the sewing re setting. 1 Click [Output] t. Optimize hoop chnge This setting cn e selected if multi-position hoop ( mm or mm) hs een selected s the Design Pge size. 2 Select the desired sewing re ([Design Pge re] or [Use existing design re]). Design Pge re The ptterns will e sewn so tht the needle position when you strt sewing is ligned with the center of your Design Pge. The dimension of the pttern mtches the size of the Design Pge, therefore reducing the ility to move pttern round the lyout screen of your emroidering mchine. Select the check ox to optimize the sewing order/ order of hoop position chnges so tht the numer of times tht the hoop position is chnged is reduced to the minimum. This reduces the risk of mislignment in the emroidery pttern or uneven stitching from chnging the hoop position too often. Jump Stitch Trimming These settings re pplied only when emroidering with our multi-needle emroidery mchines. Before these settings cn e specified, select under [Mchine Type] in the [Design Settings] dilog ox. Design Pge (on your screen) Sewing re = Design Pge re Use existing design re The ptterns will e sewn so tht the needle position when you strt sewing is ligned with the center of the ctul ptterns. The ctul pttern size is mintined, therefore llowing greter moility when using the lyout functions of your emroidering mchine. Specify the minimum jump stitch length for thred trimming. These settings re not pplied with ny other emroidery mchine. For detils, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your mchine. Design Pge (on your screen) Sewing re = Use existing design re cc "Jump Stitch Trimming" on pge 87, "Specifying trimming settings in Lyout & Editing" on pge 297 nd "Adding jump stitch trimming to new ptterns" on pge

18 Bsic Softwre Settings Using Fric Selector A group of sewing ttriute settings pproprite for the mjor types of fric cn e reclled from the [Fric Selector] dilog ox. Select the fric to e emroidered to view description of the fric nd dvice on emroidering. 1 Click, then [Fric Selector]. The sewing ttriutes of imported shpes nd text re not chnged. Perform tril sewing efore emroidering your project. cc "For Bsic Opertions" on pge Select the group of settings to e reclled. Originl settings cn e sved to e lter used in the [Fric Selector]. Click in the [Sewing Attriutes] t, click [Sve As], nd then click [OK] without chnging the nme for the settings. The group of settings tht you hve sved will pper with * eside its nme. cc "Sving the settings in list" on pge Click [OK]. Select the type of fric to e emroidered to specify the recommended settings for tht fric. When fric type is selected, description ppers. When shpes nd text re entered, the sewing ttriutes will e set to those recommended for the selected fric. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 17

19 Bsic Softwre Settings Specifying Bsic Disply Settings Chnging the grid settings A grid of dotted lines or solid lines cn e displyed or hidden, nd the spcing for the grid cn e djusted. 1 Click [View] t. 2 Specify the grid settings. Chnging the ruler settings The ruler cn e displyed or hidden. 1 Click the [View] t. 2 To disply the ruler, select the [Ruler] check ox in the [Ruler] group. To hide the ruler, cler the [Ruler] check ox. c d Show Grid Select this check ox to disply the grid. c d with Axes Select this check ox to disply the grid s solid lines. Intervl Specify the grid spcing. Snp to Grid Select this check ox to lign ptterns with the grid. The snp feture works whether or not the grid is displyed. Click to switch the mesurement units etween millimeters nd inches. The utton cn lso e used to switch the grid etween eing displyed or hidden. 18

20 Bsic Softwre Settings Chnging the guideline settings Guidelines cn lso e used when the ruler is displyed. 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Select the [Ruler] check ox, nd then select the [Guideline] check ox in the [Ruler] group. When pttern is sved, the guidelines re sved with it. However, the guidelines re deleted if the pttern is sved in formt for version erlier thn version 10. Adjusting on-screen mesurements (Screen Clirtion) Mesurements cn e djusted so tht ojects will e displyed t the sme size s the ctul emroidery t zoom rtio of 100%. Once this djustment is mde, it will not need to e done gin lter. 3 Click ruler in the Design Pge. ppers, nd guideline is drwn. 1 Click, then [Options]. 1 1 Guideline To move guideline, drg. To delete guideline, click. A guideline is dded ech time the ruler is clicked. In ddition, up to 100 guidelines ech cn e dded to the horizontl nd verticl rulers. While guideline is eing drgged, its position is shown in the sttus r. When the [Ruler] check ox or the [Guideline] check ox is clered, the guidelines re hidden. If oth the [Show Grid] nd [Snp to Grid] check oxes re selected, the guidelines will e dded/moved long the lines of the grid. cc "Chnging the grid settings" on pge 18 2 Click [Screen Clirtion]. Hold ruler ginst the screen to mesure the length of. Next, enter the vlue t, nd then click [OK]. Be sure to enter the length in millimeters. A vlue in inches is invlid. 19

21 Bsic Softwre Settings System unit 1 Click, then [Options]. 2 Click [System Unit], nd then select the desired mesurement units ([mm] or [inch]). 20

22 21 Bsic Softwre Settings

23 Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions This section descries the sic opertions performed in Lyout & Editing, such s drwing shpes, editing the emroidery design, specifying sewing ttriutes, sving the file nd printing it.

24 Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design This section will descrie how to comine vrious shpes to crete n emroidery design. We will use n Outline tool to drw the stem. Then, we will crete the leves, flower nd flower pot y importing shpe ptterns. The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_1. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Drwing, importing nd moving shpes Duplicting, flipping nd moving shpes Specifying hole sewing Applying pttern to stitching Editing points nd modifying shpes Step 1 Drwing, importing nd moving shpes Shpes cn e creted either y drwing them with the Shpes tools or y importing smple shpe ptterns. 2 To import shpe, select [Outline Shpes] from the [From] selector of the [Import] pne, then [Bsic Shpes] from the [Ctegory] selector. Select the shpe, nd then click [Import]. 1 To drw shpe, select Shpes tool, nd then drg the pointer in the Design Pge to drw the shpe. 1 Specify the sew types for the shpe on the [Shpes] t, nd the thred colors on the [Shpes] t or the [Color] pne. 1 Shpes tools 23

25 Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design 1 2 (D) Click [LIME GREEN]. If the desired color is not displyed, move the scroll r until it ppers Line color utton 2 Line sew type selector 3 Region color utton 4 Region sew type selector 5 Selected thred color nd color nme 6 Thred color plette 1 Drw the stem. (A) Click the [Home] t. (B) Click [Shpes] in the [Tools] group, nd then click. To view the thred colors in list so tht the desired color cn more esily e found, click [To list mode]. cc "Setting the sew type" on pge 49 (E) Click the [Line sew type] selector, nd then select [Zigzg Stitch]. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions (F) Click the strt point 1, nd then douleclick the end point 2. 1 (C) Click the [Color] t to disply the color plette. 2 The color, sewing ttriutes nd size cn lso e chnged fter the shpe is drwn. 24

26 Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design 2 Crete the lef on the right. This time, we will import shpe pttern. We will lso specify the color nd sew type for the region. (A) Click the [Import] t. (B) Select [Outline Shpes] from the [From] selector nd [Bsic Shpes] from the [Ctegory] selector. The thred colors eing used re listed under [Colors Used]. (H) Drg the hndle to djust the lef to the desired size. (C) Select [BS_shpes27.pes], nd then click [Import]. (I) Plce the pointer over the lef so tht the shpe of the pointer chnges to, nd then drg the lef to the desired position. (D) Click the [Shpes] t. (E) Click for line sewing, nd then click under [Colors Used] to select [LIME GREEN]. (F) Click the [Line sew type] selector, nd then select [Zigzg Stitch]. Step 2 Duplicting, flipping nd moving shpes Now, we will duplicte the lef on the right side, flip it horizontlly, nd then move it to the left side of the stem. 1 To duplicte the lef on the right. (A) Select the lef. (G) As with the line color, click for region sewing, nd then click under [Colors Used] to select [LIME GREEN]. (B) While holding down the <Ctrl> key, drg the lef to move it. (C) Relese the mouse utton. 25

27 Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design 2 To flip the duplicted lef horizontlly. (A) Right-click on the duplicted lef. A drop down menu will pper. Multiple emroidery ptterns cn e selected in ny of the following wys. Click the first pttern, nd then, while holding down the <Ctrl> key, click the next pttern. Drg the pointer to drw selection frme round the ptterns to e selected. Flipped copies cn lso e creted y clicking [Arrnge Copy] in the [Clipord] group of the [Home] t, then clicking [Verticl Mirror Copy]. cc "Using the Mirror Copy tool" on pge 35. (B) Click [Flip], then [Horizontl]. 3 Drg the duplicted lef to the left side of the stem. To move n oject horizontlly, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging the oject. 4 Align the leves on the left nd right sides. Step 3 Specifying hole sewing Now, we will crete the flower nd circle t the center. Then, we will pply setting so tht the overlpping res re not sewn twice. 1 Crete the flower petls. (A) Click the [Import] t. (B) Select [BS_shpes26.pes], nd then click [Import]. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions (C) Click the [Shpes] t. (A) While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click the lef on the right side, then the lef on the left side to select the two leves. Then, right-click the selected leves. (B) Right-click the leves, nd then click [Align], then [Top]. 26

28 Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design (D) Select [RED] in the color plette s the line color nd [Zigzg Stitch] s the sew type. (D) Select [YELLOW] in the color plette s the line color nd [Zigzg Stitch] s the sew type. c c (E) Select [Rdil Stitch] s the sew type. (F) Drg the hndle (c) to djust the flower petls to the desired size. (G) Drg the flower petls to djust their position. 2 Crete the circle t the center. (A) Click the [Import] t. (B) Select [BS_shpes01.pes], nd then click [Import]. (E) Select [YELLOW] in the color plette s the region color nd [Concentric Circle Stitch] s the sew type. (F) Drg the circle to the center of the flower petls. (G) While holding down the <Shift> key, drg the hndle (c) to djust the circle to the desired size. If the <Shift> key is held down while hndle is drgged, the pttern is enlrged or reduced from the center of the pttern. 3 Select the ptterns where hole sewing is to e pplied. (A) While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click the yellow circle nd the flower petls. (C) Click the [Shpes] t. 27

29 Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design 4 Specify hole sewing. (A) Click the [Home] t. (B) Select [BS_shpes13.pes], nd then click [Import]. (B) Click [Modify Overlp] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Set hole sewing]. Hole sewing cnnot e pplied if one of the ptterns is not completely enclosed within the other pttern. cc "Hole sewing" on pge 39. Step 4 Applying pttern to stitching Detiled line nd region ttriute settings cn e specified from the [Sewing Attriutes] pne. Now, we will specify settings for region sewing for the flowerpot. 1 Specify the color nd sew type for the line nd region of the flowerpot. (C) Click the [Shpes] t. (D) Select [CLAY BROWN] in the color plette s the line color nd [Zigzg Stitch] s the sew type. (E) Select [DEEP GOLD] in the color plette s the region color nd [Prog. Fill Stitch] s the sew type. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions (A) Click the [Import] t. 28

30 Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design 2 Specify the sewing ttriutes. (F) Select [net4], nd then click [OK]. (A) (A) Click the [Sewing Attriutes] t. If the [Sewing Attriutes] pne is not displyed, click the [View] t, then [Attriutes], then [Sewing Attriutes]. (C) (D) (G) Type "7.6" to specify the pttern size. (E) (B) 1 1 The selected pttern is displyed. The effects of the specified settings cn e previewed. This preview cn e displyed/hidden y clicking the Show Hint/Hide Hint utton. Click this utton to return the ttriute to its defult setting. If the dilog ox is displyed in Expert mode, click [To Beginner mode] to disply the dilog ox in Beginner mode. More detiled settings cn e specified in Expert mode. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 (B) There re two disply modes for the [Sewing Attriutes] pne. For this exmple, we will specify settings in Beginner mode. (C) In the [Density] ox, type "5.0". (D) In the [Direction] section, drg the red rrow to 90. Otherwise, type "90". (E) Click section. in the [Progrmmle fill] 29

31 Tutoril 1: Drwing shpes to crete n emroidery design Step 5 Editing points nd modifying shpes Now, we will delete one corner from the pentgon to crete flowerpot. 1 Drg the hndle to djust the flowerpot to the desired size. Drg the flowerpot to djust its position. (D) Right-click the top point to e deleted, nd then click [Delete]. (C) (D) The point is deleted to form trpezoid. 2 Delete point. (A) Click the [Home] t. (B) Click [Select] in the [Select] group, nd then click. (A) (B) (C) Click the shpe for the flowerpot. The points in the shpe pper. If you wnt sve or export cc For detils on sving emroidery ptterns, refer to "Sving" on pge 95. For detils on trnsferring designs to n emroidery mchine, refer to "Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines" on pge 201. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 30

32 Editing Emroidery Designs Editing Emroidery Designs Selecting ptterns 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click in the [Select] group. Selecting ll emroidery ptterns 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, nd then click [Select All]. 3 Click the pttern. 1 Rottion hndle 2 Hndles If is not displyed in the [Select] group, click the rrow t the ottom of the utton, nd then click. The sttus r shows the dimensions (width nd height) of the pttern. 4 To select n dditionl pttern, hold down the <Ctrl> key nd click the other pttern. 1 You cn lso select ptterns y drgging the pointer cross the pttern. Press the <T> key to select the next pttern in the order tht they were creted. If multiple ptterns re selected, pttern cn e deselected y holding down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the pttern. 2 All ptterns cn lso e selected y pressing the shortcut keys <Ctrl> + <A>. Locked emroidery ptterns cnnot e selected. cc "Locking emroidery ptterns" on pge 86 Moving ptterns Moving mnully Drg the selected pttern(s) to the desired loction. To move the pttern horizontlly or verticlly, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging it. Pressing the rrow keys moves the selected pttern. Holding down the <Ctrl> key nd drgging the pttern cretes duplicte of the pttern t the destintion. 31

33 Editing Emroidery Designs Moving emroidery ptterns to the center 1 Select the pttern(s), nd then click the [Home] t. 1 2 Click [Arrnge] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Lyout], then [Move to Center] Aligning emroidery ptterns 1 Select the ptterns, nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Arrnge] in the [Edit] group, click [Lyout], nd then click the desired commnd under [Horizontl] or [Verticl]. 1 Top 2 Middle 3 Bottom 4 Left 5 Center 6 Right Scling ptterns Scling mnully 1 Select the pttern(s). 1 Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 1 Hndles The selected ptterns re ligned s shown elow. 2 Drg the hndle to djust the selected pttern(s) to the desired size. We recommend not scling ptterns imported from originl crds. 32

34 Editing Emroidery Designs If the <Shift> key is held down while hndle is drgged, the pttern is enlrged or reduced from the center of the pttern. As you drg the hndle, the current size is displyed on the sttus r. When scling stitch ptterns, the numer of stitches remins the sme, resulting in loss of qulity. To mintin the density nd fill pttern of the emroidery pttern, hold down the <Ctrl> key while scling. Even stitch ptterns with non-uniform stitch density nd needle drop point pttern cn e scled while mintining the density nd fill pttern. cc "Enlrging/Reducing Stitch Ptterns" on pge 295. c To chnge the width nd height proportionlly, select the [Mintin spect rtio] check ox. To resize the selected pttern while mintining the originl density nd fill pttern, select the [Keep density nd fill pttern] check ox. The [Keep density nd fill pttern] check ox is ville only if stitch pttern is selected. cc "Enlrging/Reducing Stitch Ptterns" on pge 295 Rotting ptterns Rotting mnully Scling numericlly 1 Select the pttern(s), nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Arrnge] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Size]. 1 Select the pttern(s). 2 Drg the rottion hndle. 1 The shpe of pointer chnges to 3 Specify the size, nd then click [OK]. Rotte 1 Rottion hndle To rotte the pttern in 15 increments, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging the hndle. c Select the whether the width nd height will e set s percentge (%) or dimension (millimeters or inches). Set the width nd height. 33

35 Editing Emroidery Designs Rotting numericlly 1 Select the pttern(s), nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Arrnge] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Rotte], then [Rotte]. Flipping ptterns horizontlly or verticlly 1 Select the pttern(s), nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Arrnge] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Flip], then [Flip Verticlly] or [Flip Horizontlly]. Click [Rotte Right] or [Rotte Left] to rotte the pttern 90 clockwise or counterclockwise. 3 Type or select the rottion ngle. Click [OK]. An ngle cn lso e selected y drgging the [Rotte] dilog ox. in Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions Some ptterns imported from originl crds cnnot e flipped. 34

36 Editing Emroidery Designs Arrnge Copies 3 Move the pointer, nd then click when the ptterns re rrnged s desired. It my not e possile to crete mirror copies of some emroidery dt red from originl crds. Using the Mirror Copy tool Using the Circle Copy tool 1 Select the pttern(s), nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Arrnge Copy] in the [Clipord] group, nd then click [Verticl Mirror Copy], [Horizontl Mirror Copy] or [Four-Wy Mirror Copy]. 1 Select the pttern(s), nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Arrnge Copy] in the [Clipord] group, nd then click [Circle Copy]. 35

37 Editing Emroidery Designs 3 Specify the pttern rrngement nd spcing. 5 Move the pointer to select the desired ngle. Select the desired rrngement. Specify the spcing etween ptterns. The higher the vlue, the wider the ptterns re spced from ech other. 4 Drg the pointer to drw circle or n ovl. To drw circle, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging the pointer. To redrw the ellipse, right-click the Design Pge to return to efore the ellipse ws drwn. Rotting the line chnges the orienttion of the ptterns. To rotte the line in 15 increments, hold down the <Shift> key while moving the pointer. The ngle of the line ppers in the sttus r. While chnging the orienttion y moving the pointer, the pttern rrngement nd spcing cn still e chnged in the [Circle Copy] dilog ox. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 6 Click to finish the copies. 36

38 Editing Emroidery Designs Using the Mtrix Copy tool 4 Click in the Design Pge, nd then move the pointer. A rectngle nd the ptterns tht cn e rrnged within it pper s dotted lines. 1 Select the pttern(s), nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Arrnge Copy] in the [Clipord] group, nd then click [Mtrix Copy]. To redrw the rectngle, right-click the Design Pge to return to efore the rectngle ws drwn. While resizing the rectngle y moving the pointer, the pttern spcing cn still e chnged in the [Mtrix Copy] dilog ox. 5 Click to finish the copies. 3 Specify the spcing etween ptterns. The higher the vlue, the wider the ptterns re spced from ech other. 37

39 Editing Emroidery Designs Optimizing the sewing order Before using n [Arrnge Copy] tool, optimizing the sewing order djusts the sewing order of the ptterns creted with the [Arrnge Copy] tool in order to reduce the numer of thred color chnges. [Optimize Sewing Order] not selected [Optimize Sewing Order] selected Adding decortive pttern A decortive pttern cn e dded to selected emroidery pttern. 1 Select the pttern(s). 2 Disply the [Import] pne, nd select [Decortive Pttern] from the [From] selector. 3 Select ctegory from the [Ctegory] selector, select the desired decortive pttern from the list, nd then click [Decortive Import]. The sewing order is the order in which ptterns re creted. Ptterns will e sewn so tht those with the sme thred colors will e connected. 1 Select the pttern(s), nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Arrnge Copy] in the [Clipord] group, nd then click [Optimize Sewing Order] so tht the check mrk ppers. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 3 Perform the Arrnge Copy opertion. Mintin spect rtio When the check ox is selected The originl height-to-width proportion of the dded decortive pttern is mintined. 38

40 Editing Emroidery Designs When the check ox is clered The height-to-width proportion of the decortive pttern chnges with the height-to-width proportion of the selected emroidery pttern. Ungrouping ptterns 1 Select grouped ptterns, nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Group] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Ungroup]. If no pttern is selected, the utton will pper s the [Import] utton. Clicking this utton will import the decortive pttern t its stndrd size. Grouping/Ungrouping emroidery ptterns Grouping ptterns 1 Select severl ptterns, nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Group] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Group]. Editing grouped ptterns individully Even fter ptterns re grouped, they cn e edited individully. 1 To select single pttern within group, hold down the <Alt> key while clicking the pttern. 2 Edit the pttern. Hole sewing By specifying hole sewing, the stitching in overlpping regions will not e sewn twice. Hole sewing cn e set only when one region completely encloses nother. Emroidery ptterns creted with the Shpes tools cn e selected to set hole sewing. 1 2 Hole sewing not set Hole sewing set 1 Sewn twice 2 Sewn once 39

41 Editing Emroidery Designs 1 Select pir of ptterns, for exmple, str included in pentgon. While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click the str, then the pentgon. Cnceling hole sewing 1 Select pttern tht hs een set for hole sewing. 2 Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Modify Overlp] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Cncel hole sewing]. 1 1 Vlid 2 2 Invlid Hole sewing cnnot e specified with the following shpe ptterns. Ptterns with n intersecting outline. Ptterns with multiple sewing direction lines. 2 Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Modify Overlp] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Set hole sewing]. Chnging shpes of overlpped ptterns Emroidery ptterns creted with the Shpes tools cn e selected to remove overlpping regions or to e merged. Removing overlpping Overlpped ptterns cn e set so tht the overlpping region is removed. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions To see etter wht the hole sewing setting does, preview the ptterns efore nd fter setting hole sewing. cc "Stitch View" on pge 78 1 While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click two or more overlpped ptterns to select them. 2 Click the [Home] t. 40

42 Editing Emroidery Designs 3 Click [Modify Overlp] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Remove Overlp]. Merging Overlpped pttern cn e merged together. When prtilly overlpped The color nd sew type of the lst pttern drwn (topmost pttern) is pplied to the merged pttern. 1 While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click two or more overlpped ptterns to select them. 2 Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Modify Overlp] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Merge]. When enclosed If this cnnot e pplied to the selected ptterns, n error messge ppers. When prtilly overlpped First pttern in the sewing order Second pttern in the sewing order Third pttern in the sewing order After removing or merging n overlpping region of ptterns with sewing directions specified, the sewing direction returns to the uniform defult direction. cc "Specifying the sewing direction" on pge 51 41

43 Editing Emroidery Designs Splitting Shpe pttern To remove the lst point tht ws entered, rightclick the mouse utton. 5 Doule-click in the Design Pge to specify the section to e split off. 1 Select shpe pttern, nd then click the [Shpes] t. cc For detil on the shpe pttern, refer to pge 8 2 Click [Split Outline] in the [Tools] group to select the [Split Outline] tool. If the design contins overlpping ptterns, the selected pttern will pper in front of the others. All ptterns other thn the selected pttern will pper in gry. Only closed ptterns with no intersecting lines cn e split. The pttern shown t the right cnnot e split. The inside pttern with hole sewing pplied cnnot e split. If the enclosing line tht ws drwn intersects itself, the section cnnot e split off, nd messge ppers. After splitting pttern with fit text to outline pplied, fit text to outline will e cnceled. If the entered ptterns re not in the desired sewing order, chnge it in the [Sewing Order] pne. cc "Sewing order optimiztion" on pge 83, nd "Chnging colors" on pge 85 cc "Checking nd Editing the Sewing Order" on pge 82 Creting florl pttern Line stitching in florl pttern cn e creted sed on the selected shpe. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 3 Click in the Design Pge t the point where you wnt to strt drwing the enclosing lines. 4 Continue clicking in the Design Pge to specify ech corner of the enclosure round the re to e cut off. 1 Drw shpe, nd then select it. Be sure to select closed line. cc "Chnging the ttriutes of line ends" on pge 64 2 Click the [Shpes] t. 42

44 Editing Emroidery Designs 3 Click [Crete Florl Pttern] in the [Edit] group. 2 Click the desired pttern, nd then click [OK]. Bsic mode 1 Drg the [Density] slider to djust the pttern. Detiled mode More detiled settings cn e specified in Detil mode. 1 Click [To detiled mode] in the [Florl Pttern] dilog ox. 2 Drg the [Density] slider nd the [Pttern] slider to djust the pttern. Density 3, Pttern 251 Density 10, Pttern 251 Density 6, Pttern 251 Density 6, Pttern 0 43

45 Editing Emroidery Designs 3 After the pttern hs een djusted s desired, click [OK]. 3 Click [Crete Offset Lines] in the [Edit] group. The running stitch is specified for the florl line pttern. Creting n offset line pttern Line stitching in concentric pttern cn e creted sed on the selected shpe. 4 Specify the desired settings for the offset line pttern, nd then click [OK]. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 1 Drw shpe, nd then select it. Be sure to select one closed line. cc "Chnging the ttriutes of line ends" on pge 64 2 Click the [Shpes] t. 44

46 Editing Emroidery Designs Offset Direction Outwrd Inwrd Spcing 1 mm 5 mm Offset Line Count 1 line 5 lines Rounded Corners Check ox selected. Check ox clered. 45

47 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Setting the thred color The [Sew] group in the [Shpes] t llows you to set the thred color of shpes. 1 Color pne Plette mode c 2 1 Line color 2 Region color Color Click the [Color] utton, nd then select the desired color from the list of thred colors. d e f List mode Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions c c c Thred rnd nme or nme of user thred chrt nd its thred color list: Displys the rnd nme nd its thred color chrt for the currently selected pttern. Colors Used Displys ll thred colors eing used in the emroidery design. Show Color Plette Click to disply the [Color] pne. d e f 46

48 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Select the type of stitching ([Line] or [Region]) to disply the corresponding colors eing used. Line Line color Region Region color 2 Click the [Color] t, select the [Grdtion] check ox, nd then click [Pttern]. Select the check ox to pply grdtion/ lending. Click the [Pttern] utton to specify grdtion/lending pttern. (Only ville when shpe pttern is selected) cc "Creting grdtion/lending" on pge 47 c d e f From the [Thred Chrt] selector, select thred rnd or your user thred chrt. From the list of thred colors, select the desired color. Click to switch the mode. Displys ll thred colors eing used in the emroidery design. When n emroidery pttern is selected, frme ppers round the colors used in tht pttern. The sme thred colors cn e specified y selecting them here. Creting grdtion/lending The density of one or two colors cn e djusted t vrious loctions to crete custom grdtion pttern. 1 Select n emroidery pttern with region sewing specified. 3 Specify the desired settings in the [Grdtion Pttern Setting] dilog ox, nd then click [OK]. e d f c g To chnge the thred color, click. Select color in the [Thred Color] dilog ox tht ppered, nd then click [OK]. To select preset grdtion pttern, click the desired pttern under [Select pttern]. c Move the sliders to djust the density of the grdtion pttern. The overll density of the grdtion cn e djusted with the [Mx] nd [Min] sliders. Drg the [Mx] slider to djust the mximum vlue nd the [Min] slider for the minimum vlue. The vlues etween the mximum nd minimum re utomticlly djusted. d To lend two colors, select the [Blend] check ox, nd then click. Select color in the [Thred Color] dilog ox tht ppered, nd then click [OK]. e The preview re shows the setting chnges tht you mke. f Specify the density. 47

49 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions g Specify direction, or drg the red rrow to djust it. Specil colors Grdtion/lending cn e specified if stin stitches, fill stitches or progrmmle fill stitches hve een selected for the region sewing nd [Mnul] hs een selected s the sewing direction. If the [Blend] check ox is clered, the grdtion settings re pplied to the remining color. Grdtion/lending cn lso e specified under [Density] when the [Sewing Attriutes] pne is displyed in Expert mode. c d NOT DEFINED If you wnt to e le to mnully select the color for monochrome pttern, you cn select [NOT DEFINED]. Colors for creting ppliqués: You cn crete ppliqués using the following three specil colors. APPLIQUE MATERIAL mrks the outline of the region to cut from the ppliqué mteril. APPLIQUE POSITION mrks the position on the cking mteril where the ppliqué must e sewn. APPLIQUE sews the ppliqué on the cking mteril. By using the Applique Wizrd, ppliqués cn esily e creted. cc "Tutoril 8-1: Creting Appliqués" on pge 161 d c Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 48

50 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Setting the sew type The [Sew] group in the [Shpes] t llows you to set the sew type. 1 1 Line sew type selector 2 Region sew type selector Line sew types 2 Region sew types Pge cc 331 cc 333 cc 333 cc 336 cc 337 cc 338 cc 338 cc 338 cc 338 cc 338 cc 339 cc 339 The sew type for lines in shpes nd text cn e selected in the [Line sew type] selector. Click the [Line sew type] selector, nd then select the desired sew type. Not Sewn (Line) Select this setting to turn off line sewing (line will not e sewn). Cutting Select this setting to specify the line s cutting line in cutwork pttern. cc Pge cc 325 cc 325 cc 325 cc 326 cc 327 cc 327 cc 328 cc 329 cc 329 "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54, "Prcticl use of Stin Stitch nd Cutting Line" on pge 168 nd "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 325 The sew type for regions in shpes, nd text cn e selected in the [Region sew type] selector. Click the [Region sew type] selector, nd then select the desired sew type. The ville region sew types differ depending on whether shpe pttern or text pttern is selected. Not Sewn (Region) Select this setting to turn off region sewing (region will not e sewn). cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 nd "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge

51 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Moving entry/exit points, the center point nd stitch pttern reference point Moving the entry/exit points 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, nd then click tool. to select the Select Entry/Exit Point The codes tht pper indicte the following. L: Line sewing R: Region sewing 1: Entry point 2: Exit point This is the entry (or exit) point for the next (or previous) pttern tht is connected to the exit (or entry) point of the currently selected pttern. This point is connected to the entry/exit point with the sme code in the currently selected pttern. In this exmple, R1 in the currently selected pttern nd R1 in the previous pttern re connected. 4 Drg the rrow for the point to the desired loction on the outline. 3 Click the oject. This is the entry point for the outline stitching. The previous pttern is connected to this point. This is the exit point for the outline stitching. Stitching continues from this point to the next pttern. This is the entry point for the inside region stitching. The previous pttern is connected to this point. This is the exit point for the inside region stitching. Stitching continues from this point to the next pttern. A dotted line ppers etween the entry (or exit) point eing moved nd the cross indicting the exit (or entry) point of the previous (or next) pttern. If the outline or the inside region re set to not e sewn, the corresponding point does not pper. The entry nd exit points cn e checked in the [Sewing Order] pne. Select the Select Entry/ Exit Point tool, nd then click frme in the [Sewing Order] pne. The entry nd exit points of the selected pttern pper. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions In this cse, finish the opertion y clicking lnk re in the [Sewing Order] pne. 50

52 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Only entry nd exit points for ptterns creted with the Shpes tool cn e edited. Stitch ptterns or ptterns creted with the Text tools cnnot e edited. 4 Drg the hndle to the desired loction. Center Point (Rdil Stitch) Stitch pttern reference point (Motif Fill Stitch) Moving the center point nd stitch pttern reference point The center point nd reference point for rrnging the stitch pttern cn e repositioned for more decortive effect. Regions with the concentric circle stitch or rdil stitch specified hve center point. Regions with the prog. fill stitch, motif stitch, cross stitch, net fill stitch or zigzg net fill stitch specified hve stitch pttern reference point. 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, nd then 1 Hndle 1 Specifying the sewing direction When the Outline tools, Rectngle/Circle/Arc tools or Shpes tools re used, shpes with single sewing direction will e creted. When the Mnul Punch tools re used, shpes with multiple sewing directions re creted. The sewing direction is indicted y sewing direction line (red rrow). These lines cn e edited y moving the end points, or new sewing direction lines cn e dded. click. 3 Click region with the concentric circle stitch, rdil stitch, prog. fill stitch, motif stitch, cross stitch, net fill stitch or zigzg net fill stitch specified. Center Point (Rdil Stitch) Stitch pttern reference point (Motif Fill Stitch) These settings cn e djusted for regions with the stin stitch, fill stitch, prog. fill stitch, piping stitch or motif stitch specified. This feture cn e used when [Direction] in the [Sewing Attriutes] pne is set to [Mnul] (defult setting). 1 1 Hndle 51

53 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Specifying multiple sewing directions 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, nd then click to select the Select Point tool. Specify the sewing direction lines s descried elow. Position oth end points outside of the pttern. Only the lines cn e positioned over the pttern. When specifying multiple sewing direction lines, they must not intersect within the pttern. Sewing direction lines specified in ny wy other thn descried ove will not e dded. 3 Click shpe pttern. The sewing direction lines pper. If hole sewing hs een pplied, sewing direction lines cnnot e dded. 4 Click the [Shpes] t. 5 Click [Add Direction Line] in the [Sewing Direction Line] group. 6 Click the point for one end of the sewing direction line eing dded, nd then click the point for the other end. 2 Chnging the sewing ngle 1 Select the Select Point tool. 2 Click shpe pttern, nd then click n empty squre or empty tringle on the sewing direction line to select the point. 3 Drg the point to the new loction. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions Selected point 1 52

54 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions The sewing ngle cn lso e set to specific direction (one sewing direction line) with the settings under [Direction] in the [Sewing Attriutes] pne. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 Reversing the sewing direction 1 Select the Select Point tool. Deleting sewing direction lines 1 Select the Select Point tool. 2 Click shpe pttern, nd then click n empty squre or empty tringle on the sewing direction line to select the point. 3 Click the [Shpes] t. 4 Click [Delete Direction Line] in the [Sewing Direction Line] group, nd then click [Delete Selected Line] or [Delete Lines Not Selected]. 2 Click shpe pttern. 3 Click the [Shpes] t. 4 Click [Reverse Direction Line] in the [Sewing Direction Line] group. Delete Selected Line Click this commnd to delete the selected sewing direction line. Otherwise, press the <Delete> key to delete the sewing direction. Delete Lines Not Selected Click this commnd to delete ll sewing direction lines except the currently selected one. The sewing direction will ecome uniform. If there re multiple sewing direction lines, ll lines will e reversed. 53

55 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Smple ptterns with sewing directions chnged When the sewing direction is chnged, the pttern stitching chnges s shown elow. Sewing direction (defult) Stin Stitch Specifying sewing ttriutes 1 Select n emroidery pttern, Shpes tool or Text tool. 2 Click the [Sewing Attriutes] t. Beginner mode Expert mode Fill Stitch Piping Stitch Progrmmle Fill Stitch (Prog. Fill Stitch) Motif Stitch The sewing direction is lso chnged when the pttern size nd shpe re chnged. c d e e d c d c Click to return to the defult setting. Click to switch the ttriutes etween those for Beginner mode nd those for Expert mode. Click to lod/sve the sewing settings. Click to switch etween displying nd hiding the hint view. Hint view With ech chnge in the settings, preview of the stitching cn e checked here. By moving the pointer over ech setting, preview of the setting cn e displyed. The sewing ttriutes displyed in the dilog ox depend on the selected sew type. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 54

56 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions 3 Chnge the sewing ttriutes displyed under [Line sew] or [Region sew]. The settings re pplied to the emroidery pttern ech time the settings re chnged. cc For detils on the different sewing ttriutes nd settings, refer to "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 325 nd "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge 331. Frequently used sewing ttriutes cn e sved. cc For detils, refer to "Sving the settings in list" on pge 192 Copying sewing ttriutes The thred colors, sew types nd sewing ttriutes cn e copied from one pttern nd psted onto nother to pply the sme settings to the pttern. 1 1 When copying ttriutes from shpe, text, monogrm or smll text pttern nd psting them to pttern of different type, only the colors will e psted. The sew types nd sewing ttriutes cnnot e psted. Originl Trget 1 Originl 1 Select the shpe pttern or text pttern whose settings re to e copied, nd then press the shortcut keys <Ctrl> + <C> to copy. 2 Select the shpe pttern or text pttern where the settings re to e psted, nd then click the [Home] t. Originl Trget cc For detils on the shpe pttern nd text pttern, refer to pge 8. 3 Click [Pste] in the [Clipord] group, nd then click [Pste Attriutes]. When copying text pttern with different sewing ttriutes pplied to ech chrcter, the sewing ttriutes of the first chrcter will e copied. This function cnnot e used with stitch ptterns. 55

57 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Copying only specific ttriutes Specific ttriutes, such s the line thred color, cn e copied nd psted onto nother pttern. 4 Select the check oxes of the ttriutes to e psted, nd then click [Pste]. 1 Select the shpe pttern or text pttern whose settings re to e copied, nd then press the shortcut keys <Ctrl> + <C> to copy. 2 Select the shpe pttern or text pttern where the settings re to e psted, nd then click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Pste] in the [Clipord] group, nd then click [Pste Selected Attriutes]. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 56

58 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Emossing/Engrving Multiple shpe ptterns cn e selected to crete n engrved/emossed effect. 4 Click [Emoss/Engrve] in the [Edit] group, nd then click the desired commnd under [Convert from Outline] Top 2 Bottom 1 Drw shpe. Exmple: When the [Engrved Line] commnd is selected In this exmple, the fill stitch is selected for region sewing. 2 Drw shpe overlpping the shpe drwn in step 1. Engrved Line The ottom shpe is engrved with the outline of the shpe on top. Engrved Region An engrving is mde in the ottom shpe from the shpe on top. For est result, select [Stin Stitch] for region sewing of the ottom shpe. Emossed Region An emossing is mde in the ottom shpe from the shpe on top. For est result, select [Fill Stitch] for region sewing of the ottom shpe. 3 Select the two shpes, nd then click the [Home] t. This effect cn e edited with the Edit Stmp tool. 57

59 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions These commnds cn only e used with shpe pttern. The ottom shpe pttern must hve one of the following sew types specified for region sewing. Stin stitch Fill stitch Progrmmle fill stitch In order to use the [Engrved Line] commnd, [Line sew type] for the shpe pttern must e set to ny setting other thn [Not Sewn (Line)]. In order to use the [Engrved Region] or [Emossed Region] commnds, [Region sew type] for the shpe pttern must e set to ny setting other thn [Not Sewn (Region)]. 3 Click [Emoss/Engrve] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Input Stmp Tool]. 4 Select stmp pttern (.ps file with stmp settings pplied). d c Applying nd editing stmps You cn crete engrved/emossed effects y stmping stmp ptterns into shpe. This ppers s stitching sewn in different directions. Applying stmp 1 Drw shpe. Select stmp pttern. Specify the size of the stmp pttern. c Specify the direction of the stmp pttern. d To select different folder, click. Engrving nd emossing stmp settings pper s red- nd lue-filled res. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 5 Click the shpe pttern drwn in step 1 to select it. "Mrching lines" pper round the selected shpe pttern. 6 Click the desired loctions within the shpe pttern. 2 Click the [Home] t. You cn preview the effect of the creted stmp in Relistic View. 58

60 Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions Stmps cn e pplied to regions of shpe pttern tht hve the stin stitch, fill stitch nd progrmmle fill stitch specified. Using Progrmmle Stitch Cretor, you cn edit stmp pttern tht hve een provided or you cn crete your own. cc "Progrmmle Stitch Cretor" on pge 258 Editing stmp 1 Click the [Home] t. 5 Edit the stmp. To chnge the stmp pttern, select different pttern, nd then click [Apply]. 2 Click [Emoss/Engrve] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Edit Stmp Tool]. 3 Click the shpe pttern with the stmp. "Mrching lines" pper round the selected shpe pttern. If the size of shpe pttern is chnged, the size of the stmp does not chnge. Be sure to check the stmp fter editing shpe pttern. If shpe pttern contining stmp is edited, e sure to check the stmp fter editing is finished. 4 Click the stmp Rottion hndle 2 Scle hndles Only one stmp cn e selected t time. To enlrge the stmp, drg scle hndle. To rotte the stmp, drg the rottion hndle. To delete the stmp, press the <Delete> key. 59

61 Drwing Shpes Drwing Shpes Drwing rectngle, circle or rc shpe / / Drg the pointer in the Design Pge. Rectngle Circle Ovl Arc Fn shpe 1 Click the [Home] t. Arc & string 2 Click [Shpes] in the [Tools] group, nd then click tool icon under [Rectngle]/[Circle]/ [Arc] to select the desired [Rectngle]/ [Circle]/[Arc] tool. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions To drw circle or squre, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging the pointer. : Rectngle : Circle or Ovl : Rectngle with rounded corners 60

62 Drwing Shpes Rectngles with rounded corners To chnge the rdius of the corners, click the [Edge rdius] selector in the [Outline] t. Then, type the desired rdius, or select the desired vlue. Specify the rdius of the corners efore drwing the rectngle. The setting cnnot e chnged fter the rectngle hs een drwn. 2 Move the pointer to the strt point of the rc, nd then click. The rdil line disppers. 3 Move the pointer until the rc/rc & string/fn hs the desired shpe, nd then click. Drgging the pointer while holding down the <Shift> key moves it in 15 increments. The current ngle is shown in the sttus r. Arc Click t strt point. Exmple 1 Edge rdius: 0.0 mm Exmple 2 Edge rdius: 20.0 mm Move to end point. / / Click t end point. : Arc & String : Arc : Fn Arc & String 1 Proceed s you would to drw circle or n ovl. Click t strt point. Move to end point. Click t end point. A rdil line ppers on the ovl when the mouse utton is relesed. 61

63 Drwing Shpes Fn Drwing vrious shpe 1 Click the [Home] t. Click t strt point. 2 Click [Shpes] in the [Tools] group, nd then click tool icon under [Shpes] to select the desired Shpes tool. Move to end point. Click t end point. You cn chnge the color nd sew type either efore or fter drwing the shpe. cc "Setting the sew type" on pge 49 You cn lso use the settings in the [Sewing Attriutes] pne to define other ttriutes of the shpe efore or fter drwing the shpe. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 3 Drg the pointer in the Design Pge. To drw the shpe while mintining the originl height-to-width proportion, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging the pointer. Vrious smple shpe ptterns re ville in the [Import] pne when [Outline Shpes] is selected in the [From] selector nd [Bsic Shpes] is selected in the [Ctegory] selector. cc "Using the Import pne" on pge 13 Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 62

64 Drwing Shpes Drwing outlines (stright lines nd curves) End point 3 Click in the Design Pge or drg the pointer to drw the line. The shortcut keys re ville only fter n Outline tool hs een selected. Strt point Open line Closed line Stright lines/curves End point 1 Click in the Design Pge to specify the strt point. Strt point Open curve Closed curve 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Shpes] in the [Tools] group, nd then click tool icon under [Outline] to select the desired Outline tool. 2 Click in the Design Pge to specify the next point. The dotted lines chnge to solid lines. : Click points to drw closed line constructed of stright lines. (Shortcut key: <Z>) : Click points to drw closed curve. (Shortcut key: <X>) To remove the lst point tht ws entered, rightclick the mouse utton, or press the <BckSpce> key. The Curve tool is used in the sme wy. 3 Continue clicking to specify every point, nd then doule-click the lst point, or press the <Enter> key. : Drg the pointer to drw closed freehnd curve. : Click points to drw n open line constructed of stright lines. (Shortcut key: <Z>) : Click points to drw n open curve. (Shortcut key: <X>) : Drg the pointer to drw n open freehnd curve. 63

65 Drwing Shpes You cn freely switch etween the different line types either y clicking different utton or y pressing the shortcut key. When drwing stright line, hold down the <Shift> key while moving the pointer to drw verticlly or horizontlly. Even fter the pttern is drwn, you cn chnge the ttriutes of line ends. cc "Chnging the ttriutes of line ends" on pge 64. Even fter the pttern is drwn, you cn trnsform stright lines into curves nd vice vers. cc "Trnsforming stright lines into curves or curves into stright lines" on pge 70. Chnging the ttriutes of line ends After selecting shpe pttern, right-click it, nd then click [Open] or [Close] to chnge the line ending. Freehnd lines 1 Drg the pointer to drw the line. 2 Relese the mouse utton to finish drwing. In ddition, closed shpe ptterns cn e split t points to crete open lines, or the end points of open shpe ptterns cn e connected to crete closed lines. cc "Connecting points/splitting outlines (shpe ptterns)" on pge 67 Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 64

66 Drwing Shpes Emroidery ttriutes of shpes The [Shpes] t llows you to set the emroidery ttriutes (thred color nd sew type). Exmple: When rectngle is selected. c Line color/region color Click this utton to set the thred color for lines nd regions. For specil colors: cc "Specil colors" on pge 48 Line sew type selector All lines in shpe cn e set to the sme sew type. Use these selectors to set the sew type for lines. cc "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 325 c Region sew type selector All regions in shpe cn e set to the sme sew type. Use these selectors to set the sew type for regions. cc "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge 331 cc "Specifying Thred Colors nd Sew Types for Lines nd Regions" on pge 46 To turn off line sewing, select [Not Sewn (Line)] from the [Line sew type] selector. To turn off region sewing, select [Not Sewn (Region)] from the [Region sew type] selector. 65

67 Reshping Emroidery Ptterns Reshping Emroidery Ptterns Ptterns cn e reshped y moving, dding or deleting points. While creting shpe ptterns, clicked loction ecomes point. Selecting points 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, nd then Moving points 1 Select the point. 2 Drg the point to the new loction. click to select the [Select Point] tool. Selected point 3 Click the pttern. 4 To select single point, click n empty squre. Multiple points cn e selected in ny of the following wys. Drg the pointer. All points within the ox re selected. Hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the points. To deselect point, click the selected point. Hold down the <Shift> key while pressing n rrow key to select multiple points. Hold down the <Ctrl> key while pressing n rrow key to chnge the point tht is selected. Drg To move the point of roken line, curve, or stitch dt horizontlly or verticlly, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging it. A selected point cn lso e moved with the rrow keys. Points in ptterns set for hole sewing cn lso e moved. However, the point cnnot e moved to cross n outline. In order to move the point in this wy, cncel hole sewing first. If you strt drgging y clicking elsewhere on the outline of the pttern, new point will e inserted or the selected point(s) will e deselected. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 66

68 Reshping Emroidery Ptterns Inserting points 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, nd then click to select the Select Point tool. Connecting points/ splitting outlines (shpe ptterns) Splitting outlines of open shpe ptterns The outline of n open shpe pttern cn e split t point. 1 Select point in n open shpe pttern. 2 Click the [Shpes] t. 3 Click the pttern. 3 Click [Split t Point] in the [Edit Point] group to split the line. 4 Click the outline to dd point. Click Deleting points 1 Select the point. 2 Click the [Shpes] t. 3 Click [Delete Point] in the [Edit Point] group. Otherwise, press the <Delete> key to remove the point. Delete Selected point 67

69 Reshping Emroidery Ptterns Splitting outlines of closed shpe ptterns The closed pth of shpe pttern cn e split. The closed pth consists of the points tht re connected to crete the shpe pttern. When the outline of closed shpe pttern is split to crete n open shpe pttern, region sewing ttriutes cn no longer e specified. 1 Select point in closed shpe pttern. 2 Click the [Shpes] t. The [Open] commnd is lso ville to chnge closed shpe pttern to n open shpe pttern. 3 Click [Split t Point] in the [Edit Point] group to split the line. If shpe pttern is split in shpe with hole sewing pplied, hole sewing will e cnceled. If shpe pttern is split in shpe with fit text to outline pplied, fit text to outline will e cnceled. cc "Chnging the ttriutes of line ends" on pge 64 Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 68

70 Reshping Emroidery Ptterns Connecting two open shpe ptterns The end points of two shpe ptterns cn e connected to crete single shpe pttern. 1 Select n end point (entry point or exit point). 2 Press the <Alt> key. The points tht cn e connected pper s. Connecting the two end points of shpe pttern The two end points of n open shpe pttern cn e connected to crete closed shpe pttern. 1 Select n end point (entry point or exit point). 2 Press the <Alt> key. The other end point ppers s. The other end point of the shpe pttern whose point is selected s well s the end points (entry points nd exit points) of other shpe ptterns pper s. 3 While holding down the <Alt> key, drg the selected point to the other end point. 3 While holding down the <Alt> key, drg the selected point to the other point tht you wnt to connect to it. The shpe of the pointer chnges to, nd red squre ppers when the two points re overlpping. 4 When the two points re overlpping nd the red squre ppers, relese the mouse utton. 4 Relese the mouse utton to connect the two points. When shpe pttern is closed, its region sewing ttriutes my pper. The [Close] commnd is lso ville to chnge n open shpe pttern to closed shpe pttern. cc "Chnging the ttriutes of line ends" on pge 64 69

71 Reshping Emroidery Ptterns Trnsforming stright lines into curves or curves into stright lines 1 Select the point. 2 Click the [Shpes] t. 3 Click [Edit Point] in the [Edit Point] group, nd then click [To Stright] or [To Curve]. Chnging the curve type 1 Select point on curve. 2 Click the [Shpes] t. 3 Click [Edit Point] in the [Edit Point] group, nd then click [To Smooth], [To Symmetry] or [To Cusp]. To Curve To Stright To Smooth To Symmetry To Cusp Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 4 Drg the solid lck hndle to djust the shpe of the line. The shpe cn e chnged y drgging the solid lck hndle on either side of the point. 70

72 Editing Stitch Pttern Editing Stitch Pttern Converting shpe pttern or text pttern to stitch pttern Shpe pttern or text pttern cn e converted into stitch pttern, llowing you to mke detiled chnges y modifying the position of individul stitches. 1 Select the shpe pttern, nd then click the [Shpes] t. 2 Click [Convert to Stitches] in the [Edit] group. [Convert to Stitches] cn lso e used with text pttern to convert it to stitch ptterns. In stitch ptterns, stitches ppers s solid lines ( ), nd jump stitches pper s dotted lines ( ). If ny prt of grouped ptterns, ptterns set for hole sewing, nd text rrnged on shpes is selected, ll ptterns in the entire group re converted to stitch ptterns. Ptterns tht do not hve stitches re deleted when the pttern is converted to stitch pttern. Selecting stitch ptterns y thred color Hold down the <Alt> key nd click the thred color for the stitch ptterns tht you wish to select. The thred color cn e chnged when ptterns re selected using this method. cc "Setting the thred color" on pge 46 If stitch ptterns re grouped, ptterns cnnot e selected y color using this method. 71

73 Editing Stitch Pttern Selecting stitch points of stitch pttern 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, nd then click to select the Select Point tool. When selecting stitch points, e sure to click the stitch point (do not click lnk re of the Design Pge), otherwise ll of the selected points will e deselected. If you click on jump stitch, the points t oth ends re selected. Multiple stitch points cn e selected in the sme wy tht emroidery pttern points re selected. cc "Selecting points" on pge 66 3 Click the stitch pttern. Stitch points cnnot e edited if the pttern is not stitch pttern. The pttern cn e viewed in Solid View. 4 To select single stitch point, click n empty squre Selected point 2 Unselected point Press the <T> key. All stitch points in the next color re selected. Press the <Shift> nd <T> keys. All stitch points in the previous color re selected. Press the <Ctrl> nd <Home> keys. The entry point of the first thred color is selected. Press the <Ctrl> nd <End> keys. The exit point of the lst thred color is selected. Select t lest one point in given color, nd then press the <Home> key. The entry point of the color is selected. Select t lest one point in given color, nd then press the <End> key. The exit point of the color is selected. Moving stitch points Drg the selected stitch points to the new loction. Stitch points re moved in the sme wy tht emroidery pttern points re moved. cc "Moving points" on pge 66 Inserting stitch points Click line etween two stitch points to dd new point t tht position. Deleting stitch points Press the <Delete> key to delete the selected stitch point. If the end point of jump stitch is deleted, tht jump stitch segment is deleted nd the stitches efore nd fter the jump stitch re connected. To insert stitch point nd chnge the previous line into jump stitch, hold down the <Ctrl> nd <Shift> keys while clicking on the line. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 72

74 Editing Stitch Pttern Connecting points/ splitting stitches (stitch ptterns) A single color pttern cn e divided into two y splitting stitches t point, nd two color ptterns cn e comined into one y connecting points. If stitch pttern is divided into multiple prts, ech prt cn e edited seprtely, such s chnged to different colors. If n entry point or n exit point is selected, the [Split t Point] is not ville. Connecting two stitch ptterns to crete single one 1 Select n end point (entry point or exit point) of stitch pttern. Splitting one stitch pttern into two t the selected point 1 Select point in stitch pttern. 2 Click the [Stitches] t. 3 Click [Split t Point] in the [Edit] group to split the stitch pttern. Select the entry point of the stitch pttern y pressing keys <Ctrl> + <Home>. Select the exit point y pressing keys <Ctrl> + <End>. For detils, refer to "Selecting stitch points of stitch pttern" on pge Press the <Alt> key. The points tht cn e connected pper s. The stitch pttern is split t the point. If the entry point of stitch pttern is selected, the exit points of the other stitch ptterns pper s. If the exit point of stitch pttern is selected, the entry points of the other stitch ptterns pper s. 73

75 Editing Stitch Pttern 3 While holding down the <Alt> key, drg the selected point to the other point tht you wnt to connect to it. 2 Click [Split Stitches] in the [Tools] group to select the [Split Stitches] tool. The shpe of the pointer chnges to, nd red squre ppers when the two points re overlpping. All other ptterns will pper in gry. Selected pttern will pper in front of other ptterns. 4 Relese the mouse utton to connect the two points. After the points re connected, the pttern will hve the thred color of the pttern tht ws first in the sewing order efore the points were connected. Splitting off prts of stitch pttern 3 Click in the Design Pge t the point where you wnt to strt drwing the enclosing lines. 4 Continue clicking in the Design Pge to specify ech corner of the enclosure round the re to e cut off. To remove the lst point tht ws entered, rightclick the mouse utton. 5 Doule-click in the Design Pge to specify the section to e split off. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 1 Select stitch pttern, nd then click the [Stitches] t. The cutoff piece moves to the end of the sewing order. cc "Checking nd Editing the Sewing Order" on pge 82 74

76 Editing Stitch Pttern Dividing stitch pttern y color Before dividing After dividing 1 Select the stitch pttern(s), nd then click the [Stitches] t. 2 Click [Divide y Color] in the [Edit] group. Convert to Blocks The pttern is converted while mintining the multiple sewing direction lines. Use this when you wnt to enlrge or reduce n emroidery pttern tht uses stin or fill stitches. Convert to Outline The pttern is converted following the shpe of the outline. After eing converted, the outline ptterns cn e edited. cc "Setting the sew type" on pge 49 "Specifying the sewing direction" on pge 51 "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 "Reshping Emroidery Ptterns" on pge 66 For detils on the shpe pttern nd stitch pttern refer to pge 8. Dotted lines pper round ech prt of the stitch pttern. Converting stitch ptterns Stitch ptterns cn e converted into two types of shpe ptterns. Converting stitch pttern to locks Stitch ptterns cn e converted into locks (group of shpe ptterns with multiple sewing direction lines). In locks (shpes) pttern, the sew types nd sewing ttriutes cn e chnged, nd the pttern cn esily e edited. Stitch 1 Select the stitch pttern(s), nd then click the [Stitches] t. 2 Click [Convert to Blocks] in the [Edit] group. Blocks Shpes *Blocks: A group of shpe ptterns with multiple sewing direction lines After eing converted, vrious editing opertions cn e performed. 75

77 Editing Stitch Pttern 3 Move the slider to select the desired sensitivity. Click [OK]. 1 Select the stitch pttern(s). 2 Click the [Stitches] t. 3 Click [Convert to Outline] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Convert Whole to Outline] or [Convert Prts to Outlines]. The [Norml] setting should provide stisfctory results in most cses, ut depending on the complexity of the pttern, you my need to select setting more towrds [Corse] or [Fine]. The stitch pttern is converted to grouped shpe ptterns. Being converted to shpe ptterns, the outlines of the stitch pttern cn e edited. cc For detils see the following instructions; "Setting the sew type" on pge 49 "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 "Reshping Emroidery Ptterns" on pge 66 "Specifying the sewing direction" on pge 51 The [Convert to Blocks] commnd cnnot e used with some stitch pttern imported from originl crds. The outline ptterns re creted, nd the originl stitch ptterns re deleted. Line sewing in the creted outline ptterns is set to [Not Sewn (Line)], nd region sewing is set to [Fill Stitch]. If the [Convert Whole to Outline] commnd is selected, the thred color will e set to the first thred color in the sewing order for the originl stitch pttern. If multiple outline ptterns re creted from single stitch pttern, the outline ptterns re grouped. If there is n opening (re with no stitching, ut surrounded y stitching) in the originl stitch pttern, hole sewing my e pplied. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions Converting stitch pttern to outline pttern Outline ptterns cn e creted from ech color in stitch pttern or from n outline round the entire pttern Convert Whole to Outline 2 Convert Prts to Outlines 76

78 Checking Emroidery Ptterns Checking Emroidery Ptterns Zooming 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click or in the [Tools] group. Using the Pn tool The prt of the work re tht is displyed cn esily e chnged y using the Pn tool. 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click in the [Tools] group. : Click the Design Pge to zoom in. (Right-click the Design Pge to zoom out.) : Click the Design Pge to zoom out. (Right-click the Design Pge to zoom in.) Otherwise, click eside, nd then click [Zoom ll], [Selected oject zoom] or [Actul size zoom]. 3 Drg the work re to view the desired prt. You cn lso pn the work re when ny other tool is selected y holding down the <Spce> key while drgging the pointer. To scroll horizontlly, hold down the <Alt> key while rotting the mouse wheel. Zoom ll The entire Design Pge is displyed to fit within the window. The sme opertion cn e performed y clicking in the [Tools] group. Selected oject zoom The Design Pge is zoomed to disply only the selected ojects. Actul size zoom The Design Pge is displyed t its ctul size. Zooming is lso possile y drgging the [Zoom] slider in the sttus r or clicking the Zoom rtio. You cn lso zoom in or out when ny other tool is selected y holding down the <Ctrl> key while rotting the mouse wheel. cc "Lyout & Editing Window" on pge 11 77

79 Checking Emroidery Ptterns Using the Mesure tool 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click in the [Tools] group. Chnging the disply of the emroidery design 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Click [Solid], [Stitch] or [Relistic] in the [View Mode] group. 3 Click the two points, one on ech end of the distnce tht you wnt to mesure. The length ppers in the sttus r. 4 1 Solid View 1 Length 2 Width 3 Height 4 Angle 2 When the rulers re displyed, click / to switch the mesurement units etween millimeters nd inches. 3 Stitch View Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions You cn disply stitch view of it in order to see how the stitching is connected. 78

80 Checking Emroidery Ptterns Relistic View If is selected under [Mchine Type] in the [Design Settings] dilog ox, click the [View] t, nd then select the [View Thred Trimming] check ox to view the thred trimming loctions in the Design Pge. OFF ON You cn disply relistic view of it in order to see how the design will pper once it is sewn. Chnging relistic view settings 1. Click the [View] t. 2. Click [Relistic View Settings] in the [View Mode] group. 3. If necessry, specify settings for [Thred Width], [Contrst] nd [Brightness], nd then click [Apply] ([OK]). 79

81 Checking Emroidery Ptterns Checking the stitching with the Stitch Simultor 1 Click the uttons to view simultion of the stitching. c d e f g h i c d e f g h Strts the stitching simultion. During stitching simultion, this utton chnges to, which cn e clicked to temporrily stop the simultion. Stops the simultion nd returns to the previous disply. The slider shows the current loction in the simultion. In ddition, the slider cn e moved to chnge the position in the simultion. : Returns to the eginning of stitching nd stops the simultion. : Advnces to the end of stitching nd stops the simultion. Drg the slider to djust the simultion stitching speed. Select this check ox to utomticlly scroll the simultion of the pttern when it is too lrge to e fully displyed. Click to hide the ottom section of the Stitch Simultor. Click to disply it gin. Shows the numer of the current stitch/ totl numer of stitches. : Reverses the simultion y the indicted numer of stitches. : Advnces the simultion y the indicted numer of stitches. Shows the numer of the color eing drwn/totl numer of colors used. i Shows the currently displyed pttern section/totl numer of hoop sections in the pttern. (Appers only for split emroidery ptterns.) : Returns to the eginning of stitching in the current or previous hoop section. : Advnces to the eginning of the design in the next hoop section. If the Stitch Simultor is not displyed t the ottom of the window, click [Stitch Simultor] on the [View] t. The zoom tools nd pn tool cn e used while simultion is eing viewed. If ny other commnd is selected, the simultion stops. If vlue is entered t g, h or i, the simultion is reversed/dvnced to the indicted loction. If pttern ws selected when the stitching simultion ws strted, only the selected pttern is drwn in the simultion. The [Auto Scroll] check ox is not ville in Relistic View. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions : Returns to the eginning of stitching for the current or previous thred color. : Advnces to the eginning of stitching for the next color. 80

82 Checking Emroidery Ptterns Viewing design in the Reference Window 1 Click the [View] t. Zooming The Reference Window cn e switched to disply either the entire Design Pge or only the emroidery pttern. 2 Select the [Reference Window] check ox in the [Show/Hide] group. ON The disply re frme (red rectngle) indictes the prt of the pttern displyed in the Design Pge. OFF 81

83 Checking Emroidery Ptterns Moving/Resizing/Redrwing the disply re frme The prt of the design displyed in the Design Pge cn e selected from the Reference Window. Checking nd Editing the Sewing Order c d e f g h Insted of moving the disply re frme, the frme cn e redrwn to disply the desired prt of the pttern in the Design Pge. c d e f g h Select how ptterns re displyed in the [Sewing Order] pne. Select the desired commnd to chnge the sewing order. Optimize Sewing Order Click to rerrnge the sewing order so tht the prts of the entered ojects with the sme thred color will e sewn together. Thred Color Set the color of the selected oject. Show/hides in the work re the stitched ojects. Lock Click to lock the selected oject so it cnnot e edited. Jump Stitch Trimming The Jump Stitch Trimming function cn e turned on or off. Select Ptterns Selects the ptterns in the Design Pge. 1 Click the [View] t. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 2 Click [Sewing Order] in the [Show/Hide] group. Clicking the utton switches etween displying nd hiding the Sewing Order. With the frme, you cn select the re in the Reference Window to e displyed enlrged. 82

84 Checking Emroidery Ptterns 3 Click in the [Sewing Order] pne, nd then click [Zoom] nd [Show y color order]. Sewing order optimiztion The sewing order nd entry nd exit points cn e utomticlly djusted to reduce the numer of thred color chnges nd jump stitches. Zoom Click to enlrge ech pttern to fill its frme. Show y color order Click to disply in one frme ll ptterns of the sme color tht will e sewn together. Click to optimize the sewing order. For the pttern t the right (the numers indicte the sewing order), the sewing order will e djusted s shown elow OFF ON When multiple sme color ptterns re comined into one frme, ppers to the left of tht frme. Click to disply the comined sme color ptterns in seprte frmes. ppers under the first frme, nd ech frme is displyed with sunumer following the first, to indicte its sewing order within the ptterns of the sme color. Click to recomine ll of the sme color ptterns ck into one frme. The sewing order is djusted so tht ptterns of the sme color re grouped in the most optimized sequence. In ddition, ptterns of the sme color re optimized so tht the exit point of the previous pttern nd the entry point of the next pttern re the closest points. However, overlpping ptterns will e rrnged in the most pproprite sewing order. 83

85 Checking Emroidery Ptterns The ptterns in locked frmes nd hidden frmes will lso e optimized. The sewing order of multi-position ptterns will not e optimized. cc "Optimizing the sewing order" on pge 38 Selecting pttern 1 Click frme contining the pttern in the [Sewing Order] pne. Editing the sewing order The sewing order cn e chnged y selecting the frme contining the pttern, then drgging the frme to the new loction. A red line ppers, indicting the position where the frme is eing moved. The frme cn lso e moved y clicking in the [Sewing Order] pne, then clicking the desired commnd in the menu tht ppered. Sew First Click to move the selected pttern to the eginning of the sewing order. Sew Previous Click to move the selected pttern hed one position in the sewing order. Sew Next Click to move the selected pttern ck one position in the sewing order. Sew Lst Click to move the selected pttern to the end of the sewing order Blue line 2 Mrching line To select multiple ptterns, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while clicking the frmes for the desired ptterns. In ddition, multiple frmes cn e selected y drgging the pointer over them. 2 Click in the [Sewing Order] pne to select the pttern in the Design Pge corresponding to the frme selected in the [Sewing Order] pne. The pttern cn lso e selected y doule-clicking its frme in the [Sewing Order] pne. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions Check the stitching fter chnging the sewing order to e sure tht overlpping ptterns will not e sewn in the wrong order. 84

86 Checking Emroidery Ptterns Chnging colors 1 Select one or more frmes in the [Sewing Order] pne, nd then click the [Sewing Order] pne. t the top of The Color pne ppers in front of the other pnes. Displying/hiding frmes not sewn Frmes contining ptterns tht will not e sewn cn e displyed or hidden. Click, then [Hide Ojects Not Stitched]. 2 Click the desired color in the [Color] pne. OFF ON cc "Color pne" on pge 46 Chnging sewing ttriutes 1 In the [Sewing Order] pne, select one or more frmes contining pttern other thn stitch pttern. The sew type selector for the selected frme ppers. As defult, frmes contining ptterns tht will not e sewn will e hidden. When frmes contining ptterns tht will not e sewn re displyed, tht frme cn e selected nd its pttern cn e edited. 2 Click the [Sewing Attriutes] t. If the [Sewing Attriutes] pne is not displyed, click the [View] t, then [Attriutes], nd then click [Sewing Attriutes]. 3 Chnge the sewing ttriutes nd sew type. cc "Line sew types", "Region sew types" on pge 49 nd "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 85

87 Checking Emroidery Ptterns Displying emroidery ptterns Ech emroidery ptterns cn e displyed or hidden in the Design Pge. Overlpping emroidery ptterns cn esily e edited if the pttern not eing edited is hidden. Locking emroidery ptterns Emroidery ptterns cn e locked to prevent them from eing moved or deleted. Locked emroidery ptterns cnnot e selected or edited in the Design Pge. Select frme, nd then click. ON OFF Frmes with contin multiple ptterns of the sme color. If these frmes re selected to e displyed, ll ptterns in the frme re displyed. ppers if the disply setting is not the sme for ll ptterns in frme with eside it. Displying either the line or region of n emroidery pttern mde up of n outline nd inside region displys the entire emroidery pttern. Select frme, nd then click. Frmes with contin multiple ptterns of the sme color. If these frmes re selected to e locked, ll ptterns in the frme re locked. ppers if the lock setting is not the sme for ll ptterns in frme with eside it. Locking either the line or region of n emroidery pttern mde up of n outline nd inside region locks the entire emroidery pttern. Locking ny prt of comined pttern, such s grouped ptterns, text rrnged on curve or ptterns with hole sewing specified, locks the entire emroidery pttern. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 86

88 Checking Emroidery Ptterns Jump Stitch Trimming The Jump Stitch Trimming function cn e turned on or off. These settings re pplied only when emroidering with our multi-needle emroidery mchines. Before these settings cn e specified, select under [Mchine Type] in the [Design Settings] dilog ox. cc "Specifying the Design Pge Settings" on pge 14 ppers if the thred trimming setting is not the sme for ll ptterns in frme with eside it. The thred is cut efore the thred color is chnged, even if [Jump Stitch Trimming] hs een turned off for the frme. Click the [View] t, nd then select the [View Thred Trimming] check ox in the [View Mode] group. To view the thred trimming loctions in the Design Pge. The Jump Stitch Trimming utton ( in the [Sewing Order] pne. ) is ville Select frme, nd then click. ON OFF Aout Minimum jump stitch length for thred trimming The jump stitch length cn e specified on the [Output] t into the [Design Settings] dilog ox. (To displyed it, click Settings])., then [Design If the jump stitch length is less thn the length specified for [Minimum jump stitch length for thred trimming], the thred will not e cut, even if [Jump Stitch Trimming] hs een set. Whether or not [Minimum jump stitch length for thred trimming] is ville differs depending on the selected mchine model. For detils, refer to the Opertion Mnul for the mchine. 87

89 Checking Emroidery Ptterns The defult setting cn e specified for whether or not thred trimming is pplied to ojects tht re creted. Click [Option] ove the Rion, nd then click [Options] to disply the [Options] dilog ox. Next, click [Jump Stitch Trimming], nd then select or cler the [Add jump stitch trimming to the entered ptterns.] check ox. You cn enter comments nd informtion out the pttern to sved.pes file. cc Click "Adding jump stitch trimming to new ptterns" on pge 302 cc "Jump Stitch Trimming" on pge 16, "Mchine thred trimming ccording to settings specified in Lyout & Editing" on pge 297 nd "Adding jump stitch trimming to new ptterns" on pge 302 Checking emroidery design informtion, then [Design Property]. The informtion shown in the color list cn e switched. Color Chnges The thred color informtion for ech color chnge is displyed. This llows you to check the totl numer of thred color chnges. Totl Colors The thred color informtion for the necessry threds is displyed. This llows you to check the totl numer of thred colors. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 88

90 Checking Emroidery Ptterns You cn select nd check the properties of individul ptterns within the emroidery design y selecting the pttern efore opening this dilog ox. In this cse, clering the [Show out selected Oject(s)] check ox switches the dilog ox to disply properties for ll ptterns in the Design Pge. If the Design Pge ws set to [Custom Size] or [Hoop Size] ws set to multi-position hoop ( mm or mm) or the jumo frme ( mm), [Design Property] dilog ox ppers with the sewing informtion for ech hoop of the pttern in the Design Pge. Files cn e serched for in Design Dtse ccording to the entered informtion. 89

91 Opening/Importing Emroidery Designs Opening/Importing Emroidery Designs Creting new emroidery design Click, then [New]. To view the dt in the selected folder s thumnils in the [Browse] dilog ox, click [Browse]. The size of the Design Pge cn e chnged. cc "Specifying the Design Pge Settings" on pge 14 Opening Lyout & Editing file 1 Click, then [Open]. To see more detiled design, select file, nd then click [Preview]. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 2 Select the drive, the folder nd the file, nd then click [Open], or doule-click the file's icon. To open the displyed file, click [Open]. If no files re listed, there re no.pes files in the selected folder. Select folder contining.pes file. If the selected file is in formt other thn the.pes formt, the messge "Unexpected file formt" ppers in the [Preview] window. A file cn e opened in ny of the following wys. Drg the emroidery design from file Windows Explorer into the Lyout & Editing window. Doule-click the emroidery design file in Windows Explorer. Doule-click the emroidery design file in Design Dtse. 90

92 Opening/Importing Emroidery Designs Importing emroidery designs Emroidery designs cn e imported from the [Import] pne. For more detils on the [Import] pne, refer to "Exmple of Importing Emroidery Dt" on pge 13. From folder 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Import Ptterns] in the [Import] group, nd then click [from File]. From Design Lirry 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Import Ptterns] in the [Import] group, nd then click [from Design Lirry]. 3 Click. 1 3 From the [Ctegory] selector, select ctegory to disply the corresponding emroidery dt. 1 Indictes the pth to the currently selected folder. 4 Select the file icon for the design to e imported, nd then click [Import]. 91

93 Opening/Importing Emroidery Designs 4 Select folder, nd then click [OK]. From n originl crd 1 Insert n originl crd into the USB crd writer module. cc Refer to "Trnsferring to mchine y using n originl crd" on pge Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Import Ptterns] in the [Import] group, nd then click [from Crd]. 5 Click [File Type] in the [Import] pne. Select the file nme extensions of the corresponding emroidery dt to e displyed, nd then click [OK]. 6 Select the file icon, nd then click [Import]. When importing designs from other vendors, e sure to choose design tht will fit in the Design Pge. After the crd hs een red, the emroidery designs on the crd re displyed. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions Since.dst files do not contin thred color informtion, the colors of n imported.dst file my not pper s expected. You cn chnge the thred colors y using functions in the [Sewing Order] pne or y holding down the <Alt> key nd selecting stitch pttern. cc "Selecting stitch ptterns y thred color" on pge 71 When importing.dst files, the numer of jump stitches for thred trimming cn e specified. cc "Specifying the numer of jumps in emroidery design of the DST formt" on pge Select the file icon, nd then click [Import]. Due to copyright issues, some originl crds cnnot e used with this function. 92

94 Opening/Importing Emroidery Designs Importing vector imges (WMF/EMF/SVG) Vector imge dt in the ".wmf" (Windows Metfile), ".emf" (Enhnced Metfile) nd ".svg" (Sclle Vector Grphics) file formts cn e converted to shpe ptterns. 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Import Ptterns] in the [Import] group, nd then click [Import from Vector Imge]. 3 Select the drive, folder nd file, nd then click [Open]. Imge, text, width of the line, grdient, opcity, nd ny other styles or ttriutes of grphics will not e imported. With files in the ".emf" nd ".svg" formts, the dt is converted while retining curves. The dt on ll lyers of n SVG file, regrdless of whether it is displyed or hidden, will e converted into the emroidery pttern. Creting n emroidery pttern using vector imges drwn with other imge-editing pplictions Being converted to the ".svg" file formt, vector imge files creted with other commercilly ville pplictions (e.g., ".i" (Adoe Illustrtor Artwork) nd ".cdr" (CorelDrw file)) cn e imported. First convert the vector imge files into either of WMF, EMF or SVG file formt with your pplictions, nd then import them to Plette y following the steps descried in "Importing vector imges (WMF/EMF/SVG)". Rster imge files (e.g., ".mp" nd ".jpg") cn e used s ckground imges in Plette, or they cn e converted to emroidery ptterns using the Imge To Stitch Wizrd. cc For detils, refer to pge 131. The imported imge ppers in the Design Pge. 93

95 Opening/Importing Emroidery Designs Importing emroidery design from Design Center 1 Strt up Design Center nd open the file. cc "Originl Imge Stge" on pge 212 nd "Opening file" on pge Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Import Ptterns] in the [Import] group, nd then click [from Design Center]. 4 Specify the desired settings eside [Import], [Mgnifiction] nd [Orienttion], nd then click [Import]. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions Import As Stitches: Imports, s stitch ptterns, emroidery dt creted in Design Center. As Outlines: Imports, s outline ptterns, emroidery dt creted in Design Center. This dt cn e edited in the sme wy s outline ptterns creted in Lyout & Editing. The mximum mgnifiction rtio tht cn e specified is the rtio tht enlrges the design to the size of the Design Pge. 94

96 Sving nd Printing Sving nd Printing Sving Overwriting Click, then [Sve]. If you select file type of previous softwre version, sved.pes files cn e opened with tht version of the softwre; however, ll sved designs will e converted to stitch pttern. 3 Click [Sve] to sve the dt. The new file nme ppers in the title r of the Lyout & Editing window. If no file nme hs een specified or if the file cnnot e found, the [Sve As] dilog ox ppers. Outputting design in different formt The dt shown in the Design Pge cn e exported s file of different formt (.dst,.hus,.exp,.pcs,.vip,.sew,.jef,.csd,.xxx, nd.shv). 1 Click, then [Export]. Sving with new nme 1 Click, then [Sve As]. 2 Select the drive nd the folder, nd then type in the file nme. 2 Select the drive nd the folder, nd then type in the file nme. 95

97 Sving nd Printing 3 Select formt (.dst,.exp,.pcs,.hus,.vip,.shv,.jef,.sew,.csd, or.xxx) tht the file will e exported s. The [Numer of jumps for trim] setting cn e specified for outputting to the.dst formt. Before outputting, click the [Option] utton, then [Options], then [DST Settings] to specify the settings. cc "Specifying the numer of jumps in emroidery design of the DST formt" on pge 301 Some ptterns imported from originl crds cnnot e exported. Divided emroidery ptterns nd emroidery ptterns for the jumo frme or multi-position hoop will e exported s single file, nd will not e split into sections. Printing Specifying print settings Before printing, you my need to chnge the print settings for the emroidery design files. 1 Click, then [Print], then [Print Setup]. c d e Specify the pper size. Specify the pper orienttion. To print the emroidery pttern, select [Emroidery print mode]. Print type Actul Size: Select this option to print the design t ctul size nd the sewing informtion (dimensions of the emroidery pttern, sewing color order, stitch count nd hoop position) on seprte pges. Reduced Size: Select this option to print reduced imge together with ll of the ovementioned informtion on single pge. Print option Print imge: Select this check ox to print the imge imported into the Design Pge in ddition to the emroidery pttern. However, ny prt of the imge extending out of the print re for the emroidery will not e printed. Print sewing re ox & center xes: (This setting is only ville when [Actul Size] is selected.) : Select this option to print lck lines to indicte the sewing re (refer to "Specifying the sewing re" on pge 16) nd the center xes for the dt. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions : Select this option to print n emroidery positioning mrk in the center of the xes. (This setting cnnot e selected if [Jumo Frme] hs een selected s the Design Pge size.) c d Print templte grid: Select this check ox to print green lines to represent the grid printed on the emroidery sheet included with the hoop. (This setting cnnot e selected if User Hoop, [Cp Frme], [Cylinder Frme], [Jumo Frme], [Clmp Frme] or [Round Frme] hs een selected s the Design Pge size.) f e g h i 96

98 Sving nd Printing f cc Print hoop section oundries onto the first pge: Select this check ox to print the sections of design where the Design Pge hs een set to custom size or to [Jumo Frme]. The pttern sections re printed in red. Divide emroidery imge into 2 pges: Select this check ox to print t ctul size nd on A4- or Letter-size pper design tht is lrger thn the pper size y dividing it in two nd printing ech hlf on different pges. (This setting is only ville when [Actul Size] is selected in the [Print Setup] dilog ox nd when the Design Pge is set to the lrger hoop sizes. This setting is not ville if [User Hoop] size is selected.) With this split printing feture, / or / is printed in the lower-right corner of the pper to indicte which hlf is printed. Color Chnges: Select this check ox to print the thred color chnge informtion for the pttern. When this check ox is clered, the informtion for the necessry threds is printed. This llows you to check the totl numer of thred colors. Stitch imge Norml: Select this option to print the design s lines nd dots. Relistic: Select this option to print relistic imge of the design. To chnge the settings of the relistic imge, click [Attriutes]. "Chnging relistic view settings" on pge 79 If the [Divide emroidery imge into 2 pges] check ox is clered nd you print on pper of lrger size, the design does not print in two hlves. Likewise, if you print on pper of smller size, the design might e cut off. g h i 2 Click [OK]. cc When printing n imported imge onto iron-on pper or printle fric, or when printing the sheet for positioning the emroidery in the printed imge, select [Imge print mode], nd then select n option under [Mteril]. Mteril Print the imge on printle fric or n iron-on trnsfer sheet: Select this option to print the ckground imge on iron-on pper or fric tht cn e printed on. Only the imge is printed. Print flipped imge: Select this check ox to print the imge flipped on verticl xis. When printing on iron-on pper, the imge is normlly printed flipped (mirror imge). (For detils, refer to the instructions for the iron-on pper tht you re using.) Select this option if your printer does not hve function for printing flipped (mirror) imge. (For detils, refer to the instructions for your printer.) Print sheet of pper for ligning the printed imge nd the emroidery: Select this option to print sheet for ligning the positions of the imge nd emroidery. Positioning mrks nd guide lines indicting the emroidering re re printed on the imge. Chnge Position The position where the imge is printed on the pper cn e chnged. (Any prt of the imge extending out of the print re of the pper is not printed.) Click [Chnge Position] to disply the [Imge Print Position Setting] dilog ox, nd then drg the imge to the desired printing position in the pper. "Chnging the disply of the emroidery design" on pge 78. With emroidery ptterns for the jumo frme The pttern in Side 2 of n emroidery pttern for the jumo frme is printed with the orienttion of the ctul emroidery (rotted 180 ). 97

99 Sving nd Printing Checking print imge You cn preview the contents of the Design Pge efore printing. Click, then [Print], then [Print Preview]. Printing Design Pge with sewing informtion You cn print the Design Pge together with its sewing informtion. 1 Click, then [Print], then [Print]. 2 Select the necessry settings. The print imge cn lso e displyed y clicking [Print Preview] in the [Print Setup] dilog ox. 3 Click [OK] to egin printing. 4 Follow the instructions for the printer to finish printing. Bsic Lyout & Editing Opertions 98

100 Sving nd Printing 99

101 Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text This section provides descriptions for entering text nd the vrious opertions for rrnging them. In ddition, detils re provided for creting emroidery ptterns whose text cn esily e replced. From Lyout & Editing, vrious emroidery ptterns cn e creted for text. The following types of text cn e creted. Built-in fonts: This softwre is provided with 130 uilt-in fonts. (10 uilt-in fonts re specificlly for smll text) TrueType fonts: TrueType fonts instlled on your computer cn e used to crete emroidery ptterns. Smll text: These smll fonts hve sizes etween 3 nd 6 mm (0.12 nd 0.24 inch). Becuse of their size, these fonts re useful for eutifully sewing smll text. Monogrm: Design custom monogrms y comining text nd decortive ptterns. User-defined fonts: User-defined fonts cn e creted y using the Font Cretor. In ddition, text cn e rrnged in the following wys. Text rrngement: The text cn e rrnged long n outline or n rc. Trnsforming: Text cn e trnsformed into ny of the 26 Trnsform styles.

102 Tutoril 2: Using Templtes Tutoril 2: Using Templtes Using the [Templte Wizrd], you cn esily crete custom emroidery ptterns y simply chnging the text in the ptterns tht re lredy ville. Follow ech step to crete custom emroidery pttern. The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_2. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Strting the Templte Wizrd Selecting the type of templte to e used Editing the text Outputting the edited templte Step 1 Strting the Templte Wizrd When Lyout & Editing strts up, the first dilog ox of the wizrd ppers. 1 Plug your USB medi into the computer. Step 2 Selecting the type of templte to e used 1 Select [shirtsch11b.pes] from the ctegory [Shirts_Chest], nd then click [Next]. 2 Click [Use Templte Designs]. 101

103 Tutoril 2: Using Templtes Vrious templtes re ville when [Templte] is selected in the [From] selector of the [Import] pne. Select [shirtsch11b.pes] from the ctegory [Shirts_Chest], nd then click [Templte Wizrd] to open the Templte Wizrd. 1 Click "R" in the text edit ox, to e chnged, nd then click [Edit Text]. The text is highlighted. 2 Type "S", nd then press the <Enter> key. Step 3 Editing the text c The results of editing pper in the preview window. The text "Sweethert" in the second row is highlighted. 3 Type "Chmpionship", nd then press the <Enter> key. 4 Click [Next]. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text c Text list: Edit the text here. Preview window: Check the results of the edited text. Emroidery informtion for the templte 102

104 Tutoril 2: Using Templtes Step 4 Outputting the edited templte Outputting the edited templte USB medi, sewing mchine, n originl crd or the Link function cn e selected s output destintions. c 1 Depending on the desired output destintion, prepre the USB medi or originl crd. Otherwise, connect the emroidery mchine to the computer. 2 Select the output destintion from the [Send To] selector, nd then click [Send]. d c d Edit in Design pge Click this utton to open the templte in Design Pge, where it cn e edited or sved. Send to selector Select the output destintion. Send Click this utton to output the templte. Crete New Emroidery Design Click this utton to return to the dilog ox for selecting templte. A different templte cn e edited. 1 In the [Send To] selector, select your USB medi to e used, nd then click [Send]. Select n output destintion ccording to the method used to trnsfer dt to your emroidery mchine. When no output destintion is found, the [Send] utton will e gryed out nd unville. cc "Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines" on pge 201 nd "Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer" on pge To crete nother emroidery pttern using different templte, click [Crete New Emroidery Design]. The dilog ox from Step 2 ppers. To close the Templte Wizrd, click [Cncel]. 103

105 Templte Feture Templte Feture Sving your design s new templte A design tht you hve creted cn e used s templte. 1 Crete n emroidery pttern tht contins text. 2 Apply the [Nme Drop] ttriute to the text. cc "Tutoril 5: Creting Nme Drop" on pge 124 nd "Nme Drop Feture (Replcing Text)" on pge Click, then [Sve As]. 4 Sve the creted emroidery pttern in folder of the [Templte Lirry] folder. Select the folder (Drive where Plette ws instlled)\progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\Lirry\Templte Lirry\Smple, type in the file nme, nd then click [Sve]. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 104

106 Tutoril 3: Entering text Tutoril 3: Entering text This section descries the procedures for importing trnsformed text pttern nd editing the text. The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_3. Step 1 Step 2 Importing trnsformed text pttern Editing entered text Step 1 Importing trnsformed text pttern Import text pttern from the [Import] pne. 1 Disply the [Import] pne. 2 Select [Text] from the [From] selector nd [Trnsformed] from the [Ctegory] selector. Select [TT_001.pes], nd then click [Import]. Step 2 Editing entered text 1 Select the imported text pttern, nd then click the [Text Attriutes] t. 2 Click in the text field. The text pttern ppers s dotted lines, nd the cursor ppers t the end of the text. 3 Press the <BckSpce> key to delete the text, nd then click chrcters in the chrcter tle to enter text. Finlly, press the <Enter> key to pply them. Smple uilt-in font ptterns re ville in the [Import] pne when [Text] is selected in the [From] selector. For detils on other wys to edit text, refer to the section indicted elow. cc "Editing entered text" on pge

107 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Entering text 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group, nd then click. 6 Press the <Enter> key or click the Design Pge. 3 If necessry, chnge the font, text size, color nd sew type. cc "Setting text ttriutes" on pge 107 nd "Emroidery ttriutes for text" on pge Click in the Design Pge. 5 Type the text. Hold down the <Ctrl> key nd press the <Enter> key to enter new line of text. Chrcters cn lso e entered y clicking them in the chrcter tle. This is prticulrly useful if you hve to enter ccented chrcters tht re not ville on your keyord. Click [Hide List] to hide the chrcter tle. While it is hidden, click [Show List] to disply the chrcter tle. If the entered chrcter is not ville with the selected font or if the chrcter cnnot e converted to n emroidery pttern, the chrcter ppers s in the Design Pge. If this occurs, enter different chrcter. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 106

108 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Editing entered text Switch to one of the following text edit modes, nd then type text s needed using the cursor ppering t the end of the text. Setting text ttriutes Text ttriutes cn e specified with the [Font] selector nd [Text Size] selector in the [Text] t. Using Text Attriutes t 1 Select single text pttern. 2 Click the [Text Attriutes] t, nd then click in the text field. The [Text] t ppers when text pttern or Text tool is selected. Font Click the [Font] selector, nd then select the desired font. Using Edit text tool c d 1 Select single text pttern. 2 Click the [Text] t, nd then click [Edit Text] in the [Edit] group. e Using keyord 1 Select single text pttern. 2 Press chrcter key in the keyord. Using Text tool 1 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group of the [Home] t, nd then select. c d e Font Type A numer identifies uilt-in fonts. identifies user-defined fonts. identifies TrueType fonts. Font smple If single string of text is selected, the fonts in the list pper with the selected chrcters. Font nme Recommended minimum size Most recently used fonts 2 Click text pttern to edit. 107

109 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text User-defined fonts 4 Select the check oxes for the fonts to e displyed, nd cler the check oxes for the fonts to e hidden. PEF files creted with Font Cretor nd sved in the [MyFont] folder where Plette ws instlled pper s userdefined fonts fter the fonts listed in the tle ove. The UD icon ppers on userdefined fonts. cc "Font Cretor" on pge 274 TrueType fonts The instlled TrueType fonts pper fter the user-defined fonts. TrueType font settings cn e chnged in the [TrueType Font Attriute Setting] dilog ox. cc "Specifying TrueType font ttriutes" on pge 110 Text creted using certin TrueType fonts my not e converted correctly into n emroidery pttern due to the shpe of the chrcter. These chrcters cnnot e emroidered correctly. Test sew efore emroidering on your project. In ddition, text creted using some TrueType fonts cnnot e converted t ll. Font Filter A font listed in the [Font] selector cn e selected. 1 Click text or monogrm, or select the [Text] tool or [Monogrm] tool. The [Monogrm] check ox is ville when pttern with monogrm font or the [Monogrm] tool is selected. 5 Click [OK] to pply the filter settings. To return the fonts to the defult (ll fonts displyed), click [Defult]. 6 To filter the fonts, click [Font Filter] so tht it ppers s. Clicking the utton switches etween filtering nd unfiltering the fonts. The font filter cnnot e pplied to smll text fonts. cc "Smll Text" on pge 118 Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 2 Click the [Text] t. 3 Click eside [Font Filter] in the [Font] group, nd then click [Font Filter Settings]. 108

110 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Text size Click the [Text Size] selector. Type the desired height nd press the <Enter> key, or select the desired vlue. Built-in fonts re listed in the [Font] selector with the recommended minimum size. We recommend using these fonts t size equl or greter thn the size indicted. 3 Chnge the text ttriutes. 1 c d e 1 Recommended minimum size f Specifying vrious text ttriutes 1 Select the text. 2 Click the [Text Attriutes] t. g h i j If the [Text Attriutes] pne is not displyed, click the [View] t, then [Attriutes], nd then click [Text Attriutes]. Kerning 0.0 mm 5.0 mm (etween "A" nd "B") Verticl Offset 0.0 mm 2.0 mm c Rotte Angle

111 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text d Chrcter Spcing 0.0 mm 2.0 mm Specifying TrueType font ttriutes 1 Select text in TrueType font. e Line Spcing 100% 150% 2 Click [TTF Settings] in the [Font] group. f Alignment Left Center Right 3 Select font style from the [Font style] selector, select chrcter set from the [Script] selector, nd then click [OK]. g h Direction Trnsform cc "Trnsforming text" on pge 111 i j cc Horizontl Click to return to the defult setting. Nme Drop Verticl "Nme Drop Feture (Replcing Text)" on pge 127 Both [Kerning] nd [Chrcter Spcing] set the spcing etween chrcters. [Chrcter Spcing] is lwys pplied to the entire text pttern, while [Kerning] cn e pplied to individul chrcters. cc Refer to "Editing individul chrcters" on pge 113 for more detils out selecting individul chrcters in text pttern. Settings specified for [Kerning], [Verticl Offset] nd [Rotte Angle] in the [Text Attriutes] pne re pplied to ll selected chrcters. The settings for [Font style] nd [Script] differ depending on the TrueType font tht is selected. If text creted from multiple TrueType fonts is selected, this commnd is not ville. In ddition, if text of the sme font ut different font styles or scripts is selected, this dilog ox ppers with the ttriute settings for the first letter in the text. In either cse mentioned ove, selecting only one chrcter from within text displys dilog ox contining only tht chrcter's ttriutes. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 110

112 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Trnsforming text If ws selected in step 2, the following opertions cn lso e performed. Drg, nd to trnsform the text. 1 Select the text. 2 Select the [Trnsform] check ox, nd then click the trnsformtion shpe utton. :Adjusts the text size. :Moves the text long the circle. Depending on the selected shpe, dotted line nd or pper round the text. A text pttern contins dt for oth line nd region sewing. Therefore, if this commnd is selected, depending on the form of the font, there my e gp etween the line nd the region in the text. :Adjusts the rdius of the circle. 3 Drg to trnsform the text. cn only e drgged verticlly. cn only e drgged horizontlly. To return the trnsformed text to its originl shpe, cler the [Trnsform] check ox. 111

113 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Depending on the shpe selected under [Trnsform], different hndles pper for editing the text. 4 Specify the desired settings in the [Fit Text to Outline Attriute Setting] dilog ox, nd then click [OK]. c d Horizontl Alignment Fitting text to n outline 1 Select the text or smll text nd n outline. 2 Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Group] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Fit Text to Outline]. c Verticl Alignment Text Orienttion Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text d the other side 112

114 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text When fit text to outline is specified, the text trnsformtion is cncelled. Only one string of text cn e rrnged on single outline. To chnge the position of text on the outline, select the text, nd then drg it. The settings for some text ttriutes ([Size], [Chrcter Spcing], [Verticl Offset] nd [Rotte Angle]) cn e chnged for single chrcters, even with text fit to n outline. cc "Editing individul chrcters" on pge 113 Editing individul chrcters 1 Select the text. 2 Select chrcters in the text. To select single chrcter, click chrcter. for the Relesing text from n outline c 1 Select text or smll text tht is rrnged on n outline. 2 Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Group] in the [Edit] group, nd then click [Relese Text from Outline]. Rottion hndle Size hndle c Verticl offset hndle Individul chrcters cn e rotted, resized or repositioned. In ddition, when text is selected, click the [Text] t to chnge the thred color nd sewing ttriutes. Multiple cn e selected nd the selected cn e chnged in the sme wy tht emroidery pttern points re selected. Drg the pointer. All points within the ox re selected. Hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the points. To deselect point, click the selected point. Hold down the <Shift> key while pressing n rrow key to select multiple points. Hold down the <Ctrl> key while pressing n rrow key to chnge the point tht is selected. cc "Selecting points" on pge

115 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Chnging chrcter size nd chrcter's ttriutes 2 When you relese the mouse utton, the chrcter spcing is chnged. You cn esily use drg opertions to chnge the size nd text ttriutes. Chnging the size 1 Bring the pointer onto the upper right hndle. 2 Drg the hndle. Chnging the verticl offset 1 Bring the pointer onto the lower hndle. 2 Drg the hndle verticlly. 3 When you relese the mouse utton, the chrcter size is chnged. Chnging the kerning 1 Plce the pointer onto the chrcter ody other thn the hndles, nd drg the chrcter horizontlly. 3 When you relese the mouse utton, the chrcter offset is chnged. Rotting the chrcters 1 Bring the pointer onto the hndle. 2 Drg the hndle. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 114

116 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text 3 When you relese the mouse utton, the chrcter ngle is chnged. Converting text to locks Converting text ptterns Text pttern Text cn e converted into locks, llowing you reshpe chrcters. By chnging the sewing direction line in ech of these smll regions, you cn crete text ptterns tht pper like mnul emroidery. 1 Select the text or monogrm text. 2 Click the [Text] t. 3 Click [Convert to Blocks] in the [Edit] group. Blocks Shpes *Blocks: A group of shpe ptterns with multiple sewing direction lines After eing converted, text ttriutes re no longer ville, ut the following editing opertions cn e performed. Convert to Blocks The pttern is converted while mintining the multiple sewing direction lines. The chrcter shpes cn e prtilly rerrnged. Convert to Outline The text is converted to shpes, which cn e edited. Vrious sew types or emossing/engrving effects cn e pplied. For detils on the shpe pttern nd text pttern, refer to pge 8. Smll text cnnot e converted into locks (shpe ptterns with multiple sewing direction lines). The text pttern is converted with the originl sewing qulity mintined. The shpes of creted locks cn e edited in their finest detils. cc For detils on editing locks or outlines, refer to "Reshping Emroidery Ptterns" on pge 66 Since the text dt is no longer ville, the text cnnot e edited. 115

117 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Converting text to outline pttern 1 Select text. 2 Click the [Text] t. 3 Click [Convert to Outline] in the [Edit] group. Selecting connection point positions in text pttern The positions for connection points etween chrcters within the sme text (end point of one chrcter nd the strt point of the next chrcter) cn e specified. The ville settings re [Defult], [Closest] nd [Frther]. 1 Select the text or monogrm text. If the [Sewing Attriutes] pne is not displyed, click the [View] t in the Rion, nd then click [Sewing Attriutes]. 2 Click setting under [Connection Points]. Trnsformed shpes re grouped. In ddition, hole sewing is utomticlly specified for openings (such s the tringle inside the letter "A"). Text ptterns creted with uilt-in fonts 025 nd 029, user-defined fonts or smll text fonts cnnot e converted to outlines. When pttern is converted outlines, the sewing qulity will decrese slightly. The sewing direction will ecome uniform, ut it cn e edited. cc "Specifying the sewing direction" on pge 51 Since the text dt is no longer ville, the text cnnot e edited. Defult c Stitches re creted in the defult sewing order for good stitching qulity of ll chrcters. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 116

118 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Closest Emroidery ttriutes for text Stitches re creted t the shortest distnce etween the end point of one chrcter nd the strt point of the next chrcter. This shortens jump stitches nd reduces the numer of times tht the thred is trimmed. c Frther The Sew group in the Attriutes t llows you to set the emroidery ttriutes (thred color nd sew type, outline nd inside region on/off). When text is selected, settings cn e specified for the following. c Stitches re creted t frther distnce etween the end point of one chrcter nd the strt point of the next chrcter. This lengthens jump stitches so they cn esily e trimmed mnully. A Connection Points setting cn e selected not only for region sewing, ut lso for line sewing. These settings re not ville with text creted using uilt-in fonts 025 or 029, TrueType font, user-defined font or smll text font. These settings re not ville for text contining chrcters of different colors. These settings re not ville for text where the sewing order of the chrcters is not continuous. Line color/region color Sets the thred color for outlines nd inside regions. cc "Color" on pge 46 Line sew type Sets the sew type for the outlines. Except with uilt in fonts 025 nd 029, nd user-defined fonts, ll sew types re ville for lines in text. cc "Line sew types" on pge 49 c Region sew type Sets the sew type for n inside region. [Stin Stitch], [Fill Stitch] nd [Prog. Fill Stitch] re ville for lines in text. cc "Region sew types" on pge 49 Text ptterns creted using uilt-in fonts 025 nd 029 or user-defined fonts only hve n inside region. The thred color nd sew type for only the region cn e selected. Sewing ttriute tht cn e set with Text under sewing. For detils, refer to "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge

119 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text To turn off line sewing, select [Not Sewn (Line)] from the [Line sew type] selector. To turn off region sewing, select [Not Sewn (Region)] from the [Region sew type] selector. The vriety of emroidering effects possile differs depending on the selected comintion of settings for line sewing nd region sewing. Smple smll text font ptterns re ville in the [Import] pne when [Text] is selected in the [From] selector nd [Smll Text] is selected in the [Ctegory] selector. cc "Exmple of Importing Emroidery Dt" on pge 13 Line sewing specified (Text Outline Sew Type) Any other thn [Not Sewn (Line)] Region sewing specified (Text Body Sew Type) Any other thn [Not Sewn (Region)] Editing smll text Smll text ttriutes cn e selected from the [Text] t, the [Text Attriutes] pne nd the [Color] pne. When the smll text tool is selected, the [Text] t ppers s shown elow. Smll Text Entering smll text 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group, nd then click. [Not Sewn (Line)] Any other thn [Not Sewn (Line)] Any other thn [Not Sewn (Region)] [Not Sewn (Region)] Precutions for emroidering smll text ptterns. cc "Fonts Suitle for Emroidering" on pge 303 The [Text] t ppers when smll text pttern or the smll text tool is selected. Smll text fonts c d c d Font numer Font smple Font nme Recommended size Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text cc "Font List" on pge Enter text in the sme wy tht regulr text is entered, strting with step 3. cc "Entering text" on pge

120 Advnced Opertions for Entering Text Only uilt-in fonts specificlly for smll text cn e used. cc For list of the uilt-in fonts specificlly for smll text, refer to "Smll Text" on pge 342. The settings for ll smll text ttriutes except the font re specified in the sme wy tht they re specified for regulr text ptterns. However, with smll text, settings cnnot e specified for the following. Sew type Sewing Attriutes Trnsform Nme Drop To edit n entered smll text, select the smll text with the [Select] tool, nd then type the new text into the text field in the [Text Attriutes] pne.there re three other wys to edit text. cc "Editing entered text" on pge 107 When sewing smll fonts For est results when using your emroidery mchine to emroider ptterns contining smll font ptterns, follow the recommendtions descried elow. 1 Reduce the thred tension to less thn wht is used when emroidering norml designs. 2 Sew t speed slower thn wht is used when emroidering norml designs. (For detils on djusting the thred tension nd sewing speed, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine.) 3 Do not trim the jump stitches etween the chrcters. (For detils on setting the mchine for thred trimming, refer to the Opertion Mnul for the emroidery mchine.) 119

121 Tutoril 4: Monogrms Tutoril 4: Monogrms The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_4. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Entering monogrms Adding decortive pttern Chnging chrcter size of the monogrm Chnging the thred color nd sew type of the monogrm Step 1 Entering monogrms 1 Disply the [Import] pne. 2 Select [Text] from the [From] selector nd [Monogrm] from the [Ctegory] selector. Click [TM_002.pes], then [Import]. 4 Click [Edit Text] in the [Edit] group. The text pttern ppers s dotted lines, nd the cursor ppers t the end of the text. 5 Press the <BckSpce> key to delete the text, nd then use the keyord to type in "XYZ". Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 6 Press the <Enter> key. The text ppers in the Design Pge. Smple monogrm ptterns re ville in the [Import] pne when [Text] is selected in the [From] selector nd [Monogrm] is selected in the [Ctegory] selector. 3 Select the imported monogrm pttern, nd then click the [Text] t. 120

122 Tutoril 4: Monogrms In this exmple, monogrm pttern ws imported from the [Import] pne; however, pttern cn lso e creted y selecting the Monogrm tool, then typing in text. cc "Entering text" on pge Select [Monogrm Decortion] from the [Ctegory] selector. Click [Deco09.pes], then [Decortive Import]. Chrcters cn lso e entered from the chrcter tle in the [Text Attriutes] t. You cnnot insert line feeds. A mximum of three chrcters cn e entered. Only uppercse letters (the chrcters displyed t the chrcter tle) cn e entered. Step 2 Adding decortive pttern A decortive pttern cn e dded. 1 Disply the [Import] pne, nd select [Decortive Pttern] from the [From] selector. 2 Select the monogrm. The decortive pttern is dded. If monogrm is selected, the [Decortive Import] utton nd [Mintin spect rtio] check ox will pper. To import the decortive pttern djusted to the size of the monogrm while mintining its originl height-to-width proportion, select the [Mintin spect rtio] check ox. Cler the check ox to import the decortive pttern with its height-to-width proportion djusted to the monogrm. If no monogrm is selected, the utton will pper s the [Import] utton. Clicking this utton will import the decortive pttern t its stndrd size. 121

123 Tutoril 4: Monogrms Step 3 Chnging chrcter size of the monogrm Chnging the chrcter size of the monogrm Click the [Text Size] selector, nd then type in "22". Chnging the thred color 1 Click [Color] t to disply the color plette. 2 Click [TANGERINE]. Dimond nd Script re fonts exclusively for monogrms. You cn lso use the uilt-in fonts or TrueType fonts. cc "Editing monogrms" on pge Select the chrcters "YZ", nd then click [RED]. Step 4 Chnging the thred color nd sew type of the monogrm Click the point for the monogrm chrcter whose settings re to e chnged. 1 Click here. 1 Chnging sew type 1 Click the [Text] t. 2 Click the [Text Body Sew Type] selector in the [Sew] group, nd then select [Fill Stitch]. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 122

124 Advnced Opertions for Entering Monogrms Advnced Opertions for Entering Monogrms Editing monogrms Monogrm ttriutes cn e selected from the [Text] t, the [Text Attriutes] pne, the [Sewing Attriutes] pne nd the [Color] pne. When the Monogrm tool is selected, the [Text] t ppers s shown elow. Dimond nd Script re fonts exclusively for monogrms. You cn lso use uilt-in fonts, userdefined fonts nd TrueType fonts. cc For list of the uilt-in fonts nd monogrm fonts, refer to "Font List" on pge 340. The [Text] t ppers when monogrm or the Monogrm tool is selected. Monogrm font Click the [Font] selector, nd then select the desired font. d c The settings for ll monogrm ttriutes except the font re specified in the sme wy tht they re specified for regulr text ptterns. However, with monogrms, settings cnnot e specified for the following. Rotte Angle, Chrcter Spcing, Line Spcing, Alignment, Direction Trnsform Nme Drop Fit Text to Outline To edit n entered monogrm, select the text pttern with the [Select] tool, nd then type the new text into the text field in the [Text Attriutes] pne. There re three other wys to edit text. cc "Editing entered text" on pge 107 Font Type A numer identifies uilt-in fonts. identifies Monogrm fonts. Font smple If single string of text is selected, the fonts in the list pper with the selected chrcters. c d Font nme Most recently used fonts 123

125 Tutoril 5: Creting Nme Drop Tutoril 5: Creting Nme Drop By creting n emroidery pttern contining text nd using the Nme Drop function, you cn esily crete numer of similr emroidery ptterns, for exmple, for uniforms, y replcing only the nme in the pttern. The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_5. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Designing the emroidery pttern Creting the list Outputting ptterns using text from the text list Step 1 Designing the emroidery pttern 1 Disply the [Import] pne, nd select [Design Lirry] from the [From] selector. 2 Select [Misc] from the [Ctegory] selector, nd then drg the rinow pttern into the Design Pge. 5 Type in "Fernnd", nd then press the <Enter> key. 6 Select the text pttern, select the [Trnsform] check ox, nd then click. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 3 Click the [Home] t. 4 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group, click, nd then click the Design Pge. 124

126 Tutoril 5: Creting Nme Drop 7 Drg the pttern to djust its position. (3) When entering text, press the <Enter> key so tht the cell in the next row enters input mode. Repet steps (1) through (3) to crete the text list. Selecting cell contining entered text llows you to preview tht text. Step 2 Creting the list 1 Select "Fernnd", nd then select the [Nme Drop] check ox, nd click [Nme Drop List] utton. Step 3 Outputting ptterns using text from the text list Let's prctice outputting the ptterns to files. Emroidery dt with the text replced y ech row of text in the list cn e outputted. 1 Click [To Folder]. 2 Enter text in the list. In this exmple, we will dd text t the end of the list. (1) Click cell in the row nd click [Edit Text], or click the cell to enter input mode. 2 Select the drive nd folder in the dilog ox tht ppers fter clicking, type the nme of the file in the [File Nme] ox, nd then click [OK]. (2) Use the keyord to enter the text. This ppliction egins checking tht there re no errors in the emroidery dt. If no errors were detected, it egins outputting the dt. 125

127 Tutoril 5: Creting Nme Drop The files re nmed "<file_nme>xxx.pes" (where "xxx" re consecutive numers strting with 001). 3 After the dt hs een outputted, the following messge ppers. Click [OK]. An emroidery file is sved in the selected folder for ech line of text in the list. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text 126

128 Nme Drop Feture (Replcing Text) Nme Drop Feture (Replcing Text) Text ttriutes with Nme Drop ttriute pplied d e f The [Nme Drop List] dilog ox for text pttern cn e displyed y selecting text pttern with the [Nme Drop] ttriute pplied, clicking [Text] in the [Home] t, then clicking [Text], then [Open Nme Drop List]. c Mintin spect rtio If this check ox is selected, the height-towidth proportion of the text is mintined. c g h i Nme Drop If this check ox is selected, the [Nme Drop] ttriute is pplied. When the [Nme Drop] ttriute is pplied, the settings for [Kerning], [Verticl Offset], [Rotte Angle], [Chrcter Spcing], [Line Spcing], the chrcter size nd color will e reset. Alignment d e f g h The [Nme Drop] ttriute is not ville with text where the [Fit Text to Outline] commnd hs een specified, smll text or monogrm text. i Nme Drop List Click this utton to disply the [Nme Drop List] dilog ox. 127

129 Nme Drop Feture (Replcing Text) Functions in the Nme Drop List dilog ox c d e g f If the pttern contins two text ptterns with the [Nme Drop] ttriute pplied, the text list ppers s shown elow. Sving / importing text list (CSV) Nme Drop List Crete the list of text to e used to replce text in the pttern. Doule-click cell to enter input mode. Select row to disply preview of the pttern with the text in tht row. A row in the text list cn e selected y pressing the or key. h j i Click to dd row t the end of the list. (Up to 500 rows cn e dded.) c Edit Text Enters input mode for the text in the selected cell. (Input mode cn lso e entered y doule-clicking cell.) d Select row, nd then click [Insert]. A new row is inserted ove the selected one. e Select row, nd then click [Delete]. The selected row is deleted. f g Sves the creted Nme Drop List. Click this utton, select the drive nd folder, type the nme of the file in the [File Nme] ox, nd then click [Sve] to sve the list s.csv file. Imports Nme Drop List s.csv file. Click this utton, select the drive nd folder, click the nme of the file, nd then click [Open], or doule-click the file's icon. Outputting ptterns using text from the text list h cc i cc Click to send to mchines y using the Link function. This utton is ville if n emroidery mchine comptile with the Link function is connected to the computer. Connect comptile emroidery mchine tht hs een strted in Link mode. "Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer" on pge 204 To Folder "Outputting ptterns using text from the text list" on pge 125 Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text Editing pttern with text replced j Select text in the [Nme Drop List] dilog ox nd click [OK] to return to the Design Pge nd edit the pttern with the text replced. 128

130 Nme Drop Feture (Replcing Text) 129

131 Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges Emroidery ptterns cn esily e creted from imges. In ddition, this section provides detils on creting n emroidery pttern tht is comined with n imge.

132 Stitch Wizrd: Automticlly Converting n Imge to n Emroidery Design Stitch Wizrd: Automticlly Converting n Imge to n Emroidery Design An emroidery pttern cn e creted from digitl cmer photo, scnned illustrtion, or clip rt imge. Auto Punch (cc p. 132) Cross Stitch (cc p. 135) Photo Stitch 1 (cc p. 139) Photo Stitch 2 (cc p. 144) 131

133 Tutoril 6-1: Auto Punch Tutoril 6-1: Auto Punch In this section, we re going to use the Auto Punch function to utomticlly crete n emroidery pttern from n imge. This cretes n emroidery pttern from shpes nd colors in the imge. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Importing imge dt into Lyout & Editing Strting the Auto Punch wizrd Applying n imge msk nd djusting its size nd position Creting order from the msk outline nd converting to n emroidery pttern Step 1 Importing imge dt into Lyout & Editing 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Open] in the [Imge] group, nd then click [from File]. 3 Doule-click the [Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\ Tutoril_6] folder to open it. When this ppliction is instlled, the [Plette Ver.10] folder is instlled in the Documents folder. 4 Select the file [penguin.mp], nd then click [Open], or doule-click the file's icon. Imges with few nd distinct colors work est with [Auto Punch]. Repet steps 1 to 4 to choose nother picture imge. Otherwise, the imge cn e replced with the dilog ox in Step 4. cc "Select Msk dilog ox" on pge 147 You cn import picture imges from scnner, or clipord, nd import tht imge. cc "Importing Imge Dt" on pge 150 Step 2 Strting the Auto Punch wizrd Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Auto Punch] in the [Stitch Wizrd] group. The imge ppers in the work re. 132

134 Tutoril 6-1: Auto Punch Step 3 Applying n imge msk nd djusting its size nd position 1 Click to select the circle msk. Drg hndle to djust the size of the msk, nd drg the msk to djust its position. Click [Next]. Step 4 Creting order from the msk outline nd converting to n emroidery pttern Select the [Add msk outline] check ox, check the preview imge, nd then click [Finish]. The msk outline selected here cn e used s line dt (order) in Step 4. cc "Select Msk dilog ox" on pge Drg the imge to djust its output loction nd size. The white ckground indictes the sewing re in the Design Pge. Click [Next]. The imge is utomticlly hidden nd stitches re utomticlly input. cc "Check Msk Shpe/Modify Imge dilog ox" on pge

135 Auto Punch Fetures Auto Punch Fetures Auto Punch Prmeters dilog ox c c d Zoom Crete Lines Click this utton to disply the [Select Regions] dilog ox, where the res to e converted to lines cn e selected. d f g e i h Result View The resulting nlyzed imge ppers in the Result View ox. Omit Region Colors/Omit Line Colors In the [Omit Region Colors] list nd [Omit Line Colors] list, click the colors to select whether or not they will e sewn. You cn select whether or not res will e sewn y selecting their colors. Colors tht re crossed out re set to not e sewn. To select whether or not prt of the imge is to e sewn, click in the Result View ox, or click in the [Omit Region Colors] nd [Omit Line Colors] lists. Ares filled with crosshtch pttern in the Result View ox will not e sewn. In ddition, lines tht pper s dotted lines will not e sewn. 1 j e f g h i j Click the res to e converted to lines, nd then click [OK]. Thred Chrt Select the thred chrt to e used. Add msk outline If this check ox is selected, line dt is creted from the msk outline. Noise reduction Sets the level of noise (distortions) tht is removed from the imported imge. Segmenttion sensitivity Sets the sensitivity for the imge nlysis. Mx. Numer of Colors Sets the numer of colors used. Retry To view the results of the chnges, click this utton. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 1 These res will not e sewn. 134

136 Tutoril 6-2: Cross Stitch Tutoril 6-2: Cross Stitch The Cross Stitch function cretes cross-stitch emroidery ptterns from imges. In this section, we will crete cross-stitch emroidery pttern from n imge. Step 1 Step 2 Importing imge dt into Lyout & Editing Strting the Cross Stitch wizrd Step 1 Importing imge dt into Lyout & Editing 3 Click [Next]. Select the [Tutoril_6] folder, nd then select [tulip.mp] s the imge. cc "Importing imge dt into Lyout & Editing" on pge 132 From this dilog ox, n imge msk cn e pplied, nd its size cn e djusted nd shpe edited. For this exmple, we will simply continue to the next step. Step 2 Strting the Cross Stitch wizrd cc "Select Msk dilog ox" on pge Click [Next]. 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Cross Stitch] in the [Stitch Wizrd] group, nd then click [Color]. From this dilog ox, the size nd position of the imge cn e djusted. For this exmple, we will simply continue to the next step. cc "Check Msk Shpe/Modify Imge dilog ox" on pge

137 Tutoril 6-2: Cross Stitch 5 Click [Next]. In this dilog ox, the cross size nd the numer of colors cn e specified. For this exmple, we will use the defult settings. 6 Click [Finish]. In this dilog ox, stitches cn e dded, deleted or edited, nd colors nd the numer of times ech stitch is sewn cn e specified. For this exmple, we will use the defult settings. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges The imge is utomticlly hidden nd stitches re utomticlly input. 136

138 Cross Stitch Fetures Cross Stitch Fetures Cross Stitch Prmeters dilog ox c f g h Mx. Numer of Colors Sets the numer of colors used in the creted pttern. Retry To view the results of the chnges, click this utton. Next Continues to the next step ([Edit Cross Stitch] dilog ox). d e f Edit Cross Stitch dilog ox Click utton in (1) to select the type of stitch, select thred color in (2), nd then click or drg in (3) to edit the stitches. c d g h Result View Ares tht will not e converted to crossstitching re shown with crosshtch pttern. Omit Colors In the Omit Colors list, click the colors to select whether or not they will e sewn. To select whether or not prt of the imge is to e sewn, click in the Result View ox, or click in the [Omit Colors] list. Ares filled with crosshtch pttern in the Result View ox will not e sewn. 1 f Selecting stitches Selecting stitches to e dded/deleted (cross-stitches): Specifies crossstitch inside ox. (ckstitches): Specifies ck stitch inside ( or ) or on the edge ( or ) of ox. g e 1 These res will not e sewn. c d e Zoom Cross size Sets the size of the pttern. Thred Chrt You cn select the rnd of thred to use in the creted cross stitch pttern. Color Option To chnge the color, click [Chnge Color] to disply the [Thred Color] dilog ox, nd then click the desired color. To select the color to e used for stitch, click, nd then click the stitch to e sewn with tht color. 137

139 Cross Stitch Fetures c d e f g Editing re For cross-stitches Clicking ox: Adds one stitch. For ckstitches Clicking n edge of ox: Adds one stitch t the edge. Clicking digonl line in ox: Adds one stitch on the digonl. For oth cross-stitches nd ckstitches Drgging the pointer: Adds consecutive stitches. Right-clicking/drgging with the right mouse utton held down: Deletes one stitch/deletes consecutive stitches. Zoom Disply Templte To disply the imported imge, click [Disply Templte]. Add msk outline If this check ox is selected, line dt is creted from the msk outline. Cross Stitch Times/Bckstitch Times For the numer of times ech stitch is to e sewn, select [Single], [Doule] or [Triple]. If [Previous] is clicked to return to the [Cross Stitch Prmeters] dilog ox fter the stitches hve een edited, the edited stitches re reset to their previous rrngement. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 138

140 Tutoril 6-3: Photo Stitch 1 Tutoril 6-3: Photo Stitch 1 By using the Photo Stitch 1 function, emroidery ptterns cn e creted from photos. This type of emroidery pttern creted from photo hs detiled nd overlpping stitching. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Importing photo dt into Lyout & Editing Strting the Photo Stitch 1 wizrd Applying n imge msk nd djusting its size nd position Selecting pproprite thred colors nd creting n emroidery pttern Step 1 Importing photo dt into Lyout & Editing Select the [Tutoril_6] folder, nd then select [swimming_girl.jpg] s the imge. cc "Importing imge dt into Lyout & Editing" on pge 132 Step 3 Applying n imge msk nd djusting its size nd position 1 Drg the hndles to djust the shpe of the msk. Drg the msk to djust its position. Step 2 Strting the Photo Stitch 1 wizrd 2 Then click Next. 3 Click [Design Settings]. 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Photo Stitch 1] in the [Stitch Wizrd] group, nd then click [Color]. With [Photo Stitch 1], n emroidery pttern cn e creted in color (Color), sepi (Sepi), gryscle (Gry) or one color (Mono). For this exmple, select [Color]. 139

141 Tutoril 6-3: Photo Stitch 1 4 Select [Hoop Size] nd choose Design Pge size of mm from the selector. Then, click [OK]. Step 4 Selecting pproprite thred colors nd creting n emroidery pttern 5 Click [Fit to pge] to chnge the finl finishing size. At this point, the emroidery pttern cn e completed y clicking [Finish]. However, this section will descrie how to improve the photo stitching y chnging vrious settings. The size of the emroidery pttern ppers in the lower left corner of the dilog ox. The user cn chnge the size freely with this disply. The minimum sizes of emroidery ptterns tht cn e sewn re listed elow. Fce only: mm Hed nd fce: mm cc "Check Msk Shpe/Modify Imge dilog ox" on pge 148 nd "Gry Blnce / Modify Imge dilog ox" on pge Check the preview of the re to e converted then click [Next]. 1 From the [Thred Chrt] selector, select the thred chrt to e used. In the [Mx. Numer of Colors] selector, specify "20". Click [Updte Preview]. 2 Slide the [Brightness] slider one position to the left, nd the [Contrst] slider two positions to the right. Click [Updte Preview]. Mke djustments s needed, depending on the imge. If it is difficult to djust the tone, click [Select from Cndidtes]. cc "Select from Cndidtes" on pge 143. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 140

142 Tutoril 6-3: Photo Stitch 1 3 While looking t the preview on the right side, select colors from the list for the most frequently used colors (light lue for the ckground) nd for the more chrcteristic colors (deep rose for the lips), nd then click [Reserve]. For this exmple, four colors (crem rown, light lue, slmon pink nd deep rose) re reserved. If the creted emroidery pttern contins colors tht you do not wish to emphsize (for exmple, grys in the fce), chnge the sewing order in the [Sewing Order] pne so tht the undesirle color is sewn efore ll other colors. cc "Chnging colors" on pge In the [Mx. Numer of Colors] selector, specify "10", nd then click [Updte Preview]. 5 Click [Finish]. The imge is utomticlly hidden. 141

143 Photo Stitch 1 Fetures Photo Stitch 1 Fetures Photo Stitch 1 Prmeters dilog ox With Color, Sepi or Gry With Mono c d e c d e Select the thred colors in the color options, specify the desired settings under [Sewing Option] nd [Color Option] c, nd then, click [Updte Preview] d to preview the effects of the specified settings. Click [Finish] e to convert the imge to n emroidery pttern. Color options Color/Sepi/Gry You cn select the rnd of thred to Thred Chrt use in the creted pttern. Select whether thred colors will e selected utomticlly (on) or mnully Auto Select (off). Select this check ox to turn on this function. Numer of Colors List of colors used Add Remove Reserve Mono List of colors used Chnge Color Sets the numer of colors selected y the Auto Select function. Displys the thred colors tht re eing used. With this list, the thred colors tht re eing used cn e checked or chnged. Click this utton to dd thred color to the list of colors used. When clicked, the [Add] dilog ox ppers. Select thred chrt, then thred color, nd then click [OK] to dd the color to the list. Added thred colors will e reserved s thred colors tht must e used. Select thred color in the list of colors used, nd then click this utton to delete the selected color from the list. This is used to delete unnecessry thred colors nd reduce the numer of colors. Specifies thred colors tht must e used. Select thred color in the list of colors used, nd then click this utton to disply in the Reserved column. To cncel this setting, click to icon so tht it ppers s. Displys the thred colors tht re eing used. Click this utton to disply the [Thred Color] dilog ox, where the thred colors cn e chnged. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 142

144 Photo Stitch 1 Fetures Detil c Sewing Option Run Pitch Sew Pge Color (Aville only with Color, Sepi nd Gry) Add msk outline Others Selecting setting closer to [Fine] cretes more detils in the pttern nd increses the numer of stitches. (The stitches will e overlpping.) When the vlue is lowered, the sewing pitch (stitch length) will e shortened, resulting in finer stitching. If this check ox is clered, the prts of the pttern tht re the sme color s the Design Pge will not e sewn. If it is selected, those prts will e sewn. If this check ox is selected, line dt is creted from the msk outline. Click this utton to disply the [Others] dilog ox, where the following settings cn e specified. [Conversion Priority]: To give priority to creting pttern s close to the originl photogrph, select [Stitch Qulity]. To give priority to reducing the numer of jump stitches, select [Jump Stitch Reduction]. [Imge Type]: If [Photo] is selected, the thred colors will e mixed together, which will result in more nturl look. If [Crtoon] is selected, the thred colors will not e mixed together, which will result in more simply colored look. Select [Photo] for imge dt from photogrph, etc. Select [Crtoon] for imge dt from n illustrtion, etc. Brightness / Contrst The top slider is used to djust the rightness. The ottom slider is used to djust the contrst. The imge cn e utomticlly djusted. Click this utton to disply nine ptterns with different rightness nd contrst levels sed on the originl imge. Select one of the cndidtes, nd then click [OK]. Select from Cndidtes d Updte Preview Updte the previewed imge fter settings hve een chnged. If the [Auto Select] check ox is selected, the thred colors will e utomticlly selected from the chrt selected in the [Thred Chrt] selector. If thred colors re reserved, they will included in the colors selected ccording to the numer specified in the [Numer of Colors] ox. If the [Auto Select] check ox is clered, the settings in the [Thred Chrt] selector nd [Numer of Colors] ox re not pplied, nd only the thred colors in the current list of colors used will e used to ssign thred colors. When thred colors re dded/deleted, the [Auto Select] check ox is clered. To use dded thred colors nd utomticlly select other thred colors, select the [Auto Select] check ox, nd then updte. The thred colors in the list of colors used re listed, in order, strting from the rightest. This order is the sewing order nd cnnot e chnged. Creting eutiful photo emroidery Actul thred colors my differ from the thred colors on the screen. In ddition, thred colors my pper differently on the screen depending on your operting environment. By editing the colors to crete user thred chrt corresponding to the threds tht you hve, you cn crete ptterns while viewing them in colors nerest to the ctul threds tht will e emroidered. cc "Editing user thred color lists" on pge 192 The following types of photos re not pproprite for creting emroidery ptterns. Photos where the suject is smll, such s in photos of gtherings Photos where the suject ppers drk, such s photos tken in room or tken with cklighting An imge with width nd height etween 300 nd 500 dots is suitle. 143

145 Tutoril 6-4: Photo Stitch 2 Tutoril 6-4: Photo Stitch 2 We will crete n emroidery pttern with [Photo Stitch 2] in method different thn tht used with [Photo Stitch 1]. Although this emroidery pttern will lso e creted from photo, this type of emroidery pttern contins repeting zigzg stitches. This produces more generl rendering thn with [Photo Stitch 1]; however, the dt is creted with well-regulted stitching. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Importing photo dt into Lyout & Editing Strting the Photo Stitch 2 wizrd Applying n imge msk nd djusting its size nd position Chnging the sewing ngle Step 1 Importing photo dt into Lyout & Editing Select the [Tutoril_6] folder, nd then select [girl2- fce.mp] s the imge. cc "Importing imge dt into Lyout & Editing" on pge 132 Step 2 Strting the Photo Stitch 2 wizrd 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Photo Stitch 2] in the [Stitch Wizrd] group, nd then click [Mono]. Step 3 Applying n imge msk nd djusting its size nd position 1 Click to select the circle msk. Drg hndle to djust the size of the msk, nd drg the msk to djust its position. Click [Next]. cc "Select Msk dilog ox" on pge From this dilog ox, the size nd position of the imge cn e djusted. For this exmple, we will simply continue to the next step. Click [Next]. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges cc "Check Msk Shpe/Modify Imge dilog ox" on pge 148 nd "Gry Blnce / Modify Imge dilog ox" on pge

146 Tutoril 6-4: Photo Stitch 2 Step 4 Chnging the sewing ngle 1 In the [Direction] ox, type "45". 2 Click [Updte Preview]. 3 Click [Finish]. 145

147 Photo Stitch 2 Fetures Photo Stitch 2 Fetures Photo Stitch 2 Prmeters dilog ox With Color Sewing Option Line intervl Mx. Density Lower vlue Line intervl Higher vlue Direction Add msk outline If this check ox is selected, line dt is creted from the msk outline. Color Option With Mono c c Specify the desired settings under [Sewing Option] nd [Color Option], nd then click [Updte Preview] c to preview the effects of the specified settings. Click [Finish] d to convert the imge to n emroidery pttern. d d Color Thred Chrt Color Set Thred Colors Used Chnge Color Mono Chnge Color Color/Mono Brightness / Contrst Updte Preview You cn select the rnd of thred ville in the [Color Set] selector. If [Auto Select] is selected, the most pproprite four colors will utomticlly e selected. Selecting different option specifies the four colors used when creting the emroidery pttern. The color choices re: cyn (C), mgent (M), yellow (Y), lck (K), red (R), green (G) nd lue (B). Select one of the following comintions tht contins the colors most used in the imge. Color comintions: CMYK, RGBK, CRYK, BMYK Displys the four selected thred colors. Under [Thred Colors Used], click color. Then, click [Chnge Color] to disply the [Thred Color] dilog ox. Select the new color nd click [OK]. The selected thred color will e pplied to the imge shown in the preview window. Click on the [Chnge Color] utton to open the [Thred Color] dilog ox if you wish to chnge the color of the photo stitching. Select the color nd click [OK] to mke the color chnge. The top slider is used to djust the rightness. The ottom slider is used to djust the contrst. Updtes the previewed imge fter settings hve een chnged. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 146

148 Advnced Stitch Wizrd Opertions Advnced Stitch Wizrd Opertions Imge To Stitch Wizrd Click t the top of the window (in the [Quick Access Toolr]) to disply the Strtup Wizrd, nd then click [Crete Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges]. If n imge hs een imported, the next dilog ox ppers. Adjusting the Msk nd Imge Select Msk dilog ox The [Select Msk] dilog ox ppers no mtter which conversion method ws selected. d c d e f e c d e f Smple imge efore eing converted Smple imge of emroidery pttern fter eing converted Select the conversion method. Select to strt up Design Center nd import the imge into the Design Pge. Description of conversion method Click to continue to the next step. If no imge hs een imported into the Design Pge, the [Open n imge file] dilog ox ppers. c f Msk shpes The imge will e msked with the selected shpe. The msk cn e reshped or repositioned. Select the tool pproprite for the opertion to e performed. : Drg the hndles to enlrge/ reduce the msk. Drg the msk to djust its position. : Points cn e entered, moved nd deleted to crete msk with the desired shpe. To dd points, click the outline of the msk. To move point, select the point, nd then drg it. To delete points, select the point, nd then press the <Delete> key. With smll originl imge, it my not e possile to reduce the size of the msk. f 147

149 Advnced Stitch Wizrd Opertions c If [Auto Generte] ws clicked, n outline of msk ws utomticlly detected from the imge. The [Auto Generte] utton is ville only with imges tht hve light-colored ckground, like in this photo. Move the [Originl] [Shrp] slider to djust the shrpness of the imge's outlines. A setting more towrds [Shrp] mkes more noticele oundry etween right nd drk res. Move the [Drk] [Bright] slider to djust the rightness of the imge. Move the [Low] [High Contrst] slider to djust the contrst of the imge. f Clicking [Open Imge] llows you replce the imge with different one. The [Open n imge file] dilog ox ppers. Select file. The next step differs depending on the color rnge selected for the emroidery pttern. A msk shpe edited with or creted y clicking [Auto Generte] will e dded t the top of the list. Then, this msk shpe cn e selected the next time pttern is creted using Stitch Wizrd. A mximum of five shpes will e dded, nd they will e rrnged in order of the most recently used. These msk shpes pper no mtter which Imge To Stitch function is selected. d e Zoom Clicking the [Imge Tune] utton displys n [Imge Tune] dilog ox. Check Msk Shpe/Modify Imge dilog ox If Color, Sepi or Gry ws selected for [Photo Stitch 1], [Photo Stitch 2] or Cross Stitch, or if [Auto Punch] ws selected: The following dilog ox ppers. c Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges d cc c d Adjust the position nd size of the imge. Drg the imge to the desired position. Drg the hndle to djust the imge to the desired size. Click [Design Settings] to chnge the size of the Design Pge. Specify the settings in the [Design Settings] dilog ox. "Specifying the Design Pge Settings" on pge 14 Click [Fit to pge] to djust the imge to the size of the Design Pge. Emroidery pttern size 148

150 Advnced Stitch Wizrd Opertions Gry Blnce / Modify Imge dilog ox If [Mono] ws selected for [Photo Stitch 1] or [Photo Stitch 2]: The following dilog ox ppers. Importing to Design Center We will crete emroidery dt in Design Center y using n imge tht ws opened in Lyout & Editing. 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Design Center] in the [Stitch Wizrd] group. Design Center strts up nd the imge ppers in the Design Pge. c d e cc "Bsic Design Center Opertions" on pge 211 nd "Line Imge Stge" on pge 224 cc c d e Adjust the position nd size of the imge. Drg the imge to the desired position. Drg the hndle to djust the imge to the desired size. Click [Design Settings] to chnge the size of the Design Pge. Specify the settings in the [Design Settings] dilog ox. "Specifying the Design Pge Settings" on pge 14 Click [Fit to pge] to djust the imge to the size of the Design Pge. Emroidery pttern size Drg the slider to djust the gry lnce. 149

151 Importing Imge Dt Importing Imge Dt An imported imge cn e used with the Imge To Stitch Wizrd, s templte for mnul punching, or for printing onto iron-on trnsfer sheets or printle fric when using "Print nd Stitch". An imge cn e imported using ny of the following four methods. From file From the Clipord From scnner (TWAIN Device) Only one imge cn e dded to the work re. If you try to disply different imge, it will replce the previous one. Imge file formts Imges in the following formts cn e imported. - Windows itmp (.mp), Exif (.tif,.jpg), Windows Metfile (.wmf), Portle Network Grphics (.png), Encpsulted PostScript (.eps), GIF (.gif) Vector imge dt in the ".wmf" (Windows Metfile), ".emf" (Enhnced Metfile) nd ".svg" (Sclle Vector Grphics) file formts cn e converted to shpe ptterns s it is without some informtion not supported. cc "Importing vector imges (WMF/EMF/SVG)" on pge 93 If n EPS file doesn't contin "Preview" imge, it cn not e displyed correctly. When you crete file in EPS formt, e sure to sve it with preview imge. Importing imge from file 3 Select the drive, the folder nd the file. Click [Open]. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Open] in the [Imge] group, nd then click [from File]. If the [Preview] check ox is selected, the contents of the selected file will pper in the [Preview] window. Vrious clip rt imges cn e found in the [ClipArt] folder (in the folder where Plette ws instlled) t: C:\Progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\ClipArt 150

152 Importing Imge Dt Importing imge from the clipord 4 From the [Sources] list, click the desired device to select it. Click [Select]. 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Open] in the [Imge] group, nd then click [From Clipord]. If no TWAIN device is instlled, there will e no nmes displyed in the [Sources] list. First, instll the driver softwre for the TWAIN device. 5 Click the [Imge] t. The imge on the clipord is imported into the Design Pge. 6 Click [Open] in the [Imge] group, nd then click [From TWAIN Device]. This cn only e done when there is imge dt on the Clipord. Importing imge from scnner (TWAIN Device) TWAIN is n ppliction interfce (API) stndrdiztion for softwre tht controls scnners nd other devices. 1 Check tht the scnner or other TWAIN device is correctly connected to your computer. 2 Click the [Imge] t. 3 Click [Open] in the [Imge] group, nd then click [Select TWAIN device]. The driver interfce for the device selected in the Select Source dilog ox ppers. 7 Specify the necessry settings for importing n imge, nd then import the imge. For informtion on using the driver interfce, refer to the help mnul for tht interfce, or contct the mnufcturer of the interfce. The imported imge will e psted into the Design Pge t its originl size. 151

153 Chnging the Imge Settings Chnging the Imge Settings Adjusting the density of the ckground imge 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Drg the slider, or click or in the [Imge] group. Chnging the size, ngle nd position of the imge Selecting n imge 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Modify Imge] in the [Imge] group. Hide (off) 50% 25% 75% 100% Press the shortcut key <F6> to switch etween displying the imge (On (100%)) to displying it fded t ech density (75%, 50% nd 25%) to hiding the imge (Off). The imge is selected nd ppers s shown elow. 1 Hndle 2 Red line The sttus r shows the dimensions (width nd height) of the imge. 1 2 Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges Moving n imge Drg the selected imge to the desired loction. Scling n imge Drg the hndle to djust the imge to the desired size. If the <Shift> key is held down while hndle is drgged, the imge is enlrged or reduced from the center of the imge. 152

154 Chnging the Imge Settings Rotting n imge An imge cn e rotted in 90 increments. 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Rotte Right] or [Rotte Left] in the [Edit] group. Sving the imge dt Sving s file 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Sve] in the [Imge] group, nd then click [to File]. Rotte Right 3 Select the drive, the folder nd the formt. Type in file nme. Click [Sve]. Rotte Left Deleting n imge 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Delete] in the [Edit] group. The imge dt cn e sved in either of the following formts: Windows itmp (.mp), Exif (.jpg). An imge cn lso e deleted y selecting it, then pressing the <Delete> key. cc "Chnging the size, ngle nd position of the imge" on pge 152 Outputting to the Clipord 1 Click the [Imge] t. 2 Click [Sve] in the [Imge] group, nd then click [to Clipord]. 153

155 Tutoril 7: Print nd Stitch Tutoril 7: Print nd Stitch In this exmple, we will crete design tht comines emroidery nd n imge. Print the ckground imge on fric. Emroider The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_7. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Creting design comined with ckground imge Creting design comined with ckground imge Printing the ckground imge Printing the positioning sheet Emroidering For this exmple, we will use the gift ox imge (Ber_Bckground.jpg) nd the emroidery pttern of the er (tutoril_7_ber.pes). 1 Strt up Lyout & Editing. Specify Design Pge size of mm. cc "Specifying the Design Pge Settings" on pge 14 2 Click the [Imge] t. 4 Import the file [Ber_Bckground.jpg]. Select the file Ber_Bckground.jpg in the folder [Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_7]. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 3 Click [Open] in the [Imge] group, nd then click [from File]. cc "Importing Imge Dt" on pge Disply the [Import] pne. 154

156 Tutoril 7: Print nd Stitch 6 Import the file [tutoril_7_ber.pes]. Select [Tutoril] from the [From] selector nd [Tutoril_07] from the [Ctegory] selector. Drg [tutoril_7_ber.pes] to the Design Pge. 8 Trnsform the text to fit with the design of the imge. Click [Text Attriutes] t. Select the [Trnsform] check ox, nd then click. cc "Importing emroidery designs" on pge 91 7 Enter the text. Select uilt-in font [No. 30], nd thred color [DEEP ROSE]. Type in "Hppy Birthdy!". c Drg the rottion hndle to djust the ngle of the pttern. c d cc "Entering text" on pge 106 d Drg or hndle to djust the size of the pttern. cc "Trnsforming text" on pge 111 nd "Rotting ptterns" on pge 33 9 After the design is finished, sve the emroidery dt onto medi so it cn e trnsferred to the emroidery mchine. cc For detils on sving emroidery ptterns, refer to "Sving" on pge 95. For detils on trnsferring designs to n emroidery mchine, refer to "Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines" on pge

157 Tutoril 7: Print nd Stitch Step 2 Printing the ckground imge Print the ckground imge on n iron-on trnsfer sheet or printle fric. 1 Click, then [Print], then [Print Setup]. e To print flipped imge on n iron-on trnsfer sheet, select the [Print flipped imge] check ox. Some printers will utomticlly print n imge flipped if n iron-on trnsfer sheet is selected s the pper. If this type of printer is eing used, cler the [Print flipped imge] check ox. For detils, refer to the instructions for the printer eing used. 3 Click [Chnge Position]. 4 Check the imge position. 2 Specify the print settings. c d c d e Select the printer to e used. Under [Pper] nd [Orienttion], select the pproprite settings for the iron-on trnsfer sheet or printle fric to e printed on. Select [Imge print mode]. Select [Print the imge on printle fric or n iron-on trnsfer sheet]. If ny prt of the imge extends out of the print re, drg the imge to djust its position. 5 Click [OK]. 6 Click [Print]. To check the print imge, click [Print Preview]. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 156

158 Tutoril 7: Print nd Stitch 7 Specify the pproprite settings in the [Print Setup] dilog ox, nd then click [OK]. cc "Printing" on pge 96. Printing egins. 2 Click [Print]. Select [Print sheet of pper for ligning the printed imge nd the emroidery]. 3 Specify the pproprite settings in the [Print Setup] dilog ox, nd then click [OK]. cc "Printing" on pge 96. Printing egins. For detils on printing on iron-on trnsfer sheets or printle fric, refer to the instructions for the iron-on trnsfer sheets nd printle fric. Step 3 Printing the positioning sheet Print sheet for ligning the imge nd the emroidery. 1 Specify the print settings. To check the print imge, click [Print Preview]. Step 4 Emroidering 1 If n iron-on trnsfer sheet is used, trnsfer the imge onto fric. For detils on trnsferring from iron-on trnsfer sheets, refer to the instructions for the iron-on trnsfer sheets. 2 Hoop the fric in the emroidery frme. Under [Pper] nd [Orienttion], select the pproprite settings for the pper to e printed on. 157

159 Tutoril 7: Print nd Stitch 3 Plce the positioning sheet on the fric to e emroidered so tht it is ligned with the printed imge. For detils on using the emroidery mchine, refer to the Opertion Mnul included with the mchine. Some ptterns of completed smples for "Print nd Stitch" re provided in the following folder. Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\ Smple\Lyout & Editing\Print nd Stitch If the positioning sheet is too lrge, cut it to n pproprite size so it cn esily e used for ligning the positions. Tpe the positioning sheet to the fric to secure it in plce. 4 Attch the emroidery frme to the emroidery mchine. Be sure tht the positioning sheet does not move out of plce. 5 Align the needle with the mrk t the center of the positioning sheet. If the emroidery mchine hs uilt-in cmer, press the strt positioning utton to detect the positioning mrk nd utomticlly lign the emroidering position. With other emroidery mchines, mnully lign the positions. 6 After positioning is finished, remove the positioning sheet from the fric. Creting Emroidery Ptterns Using Imges 7 Strt the emroidery mchine to emroider the pttern. 158

160 Tutoril 7: Print nd Stitch 159

161 Opertions for Specific Applictions This section descries opertions for creting emroidery ptterns using mnul punching nd for specific pplictions such s ppliqués, emroidered ptches nd lrge-sized emroidery ptterns.

162 Tutoril 8-1: Creting Appliqués Tutoril 8-1: Creting Appliqués The Applique Wizrd provides instructions for esily creting ppliqués. For this exmple, we will crete n ppliqué tht hs holes (empty regions). Finish The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_8. Step 1 Creting n ppliqué pttern Step 2 Using the Applique Wizrd 5 The Applique Wizrd cnnot e used if pttern contining text with the [Nme Drop] ttriute pplied is selected. Select the two ptterns, click [Modify Overlp] in the [Edit] group, nd then select [Set hole sewing] to pply hole sewing. Step 1 Creting n ppliqué pttern 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Shpes] in the [Tools] group, nd then click cc "Hole sewing" on pge 39. Step 2 Using the Applique Wizrd 1 Select the outer pttern, nd then click [Applique Wizrd] in [Home] t to strt the [Applique Wizrd] dilog ox Drg the pointer in the Design Pge to drw circle. Select s descried in steps 1 nd 2, nd then drg the pointer in the Design Pge to drw hert on top of the circle. Be sure to select the outer pttern efore strting the [Applique Wizrd].

163 Tutoril 8-1: Creting Appliqués 2 Specify settings in the [Applique Wizrd] dilog ox in the following order - f. c d e Running Stitch Select this setting to sew the cutting line, then cut long the cutting line with scissors. f Cutting In order for this setting to e ville c d e f Applique Mteril Applique Position Tck down Covering Stitch Output Pttern Crete n pplique with hole sewing This check ox ppers when using pttern with hole sewing pplied nd [Replce] is selected under [Output Pttern]. To return ll prmeters to their defult settings, click [Defult]. 3 Specify cutting lines for the ppliqué in [Applique Mteril]. The outline of the ppliqué cn e sewn s running stitches or the ppliqué cn e cut out, or it cn e neither sewn nor cut out. For this exmple, select [Yes] then [Cutting]. cc "Bsic requirements for Cutwork functions" on pge 173 Select this setting to cut the fric with mchine instlled with cutwork needles. 4 [Applique Position] is specified utomticlly. The guideline for ttching the ppliqué piece is set to e sewn utomticlly. 5 Specify sting of the ppliqué in [Tck down]. The ppliqué piece cn e sted onto the se fric. Select one of three stitches. For this exmple, select [Yes] then [V Stitch]. Stin Stitch E Stitch V Stitch Opertions for Specific Applictions 162

164 Tutoril 8-1: Creting Appliqués 6 Specify the stitching for securing the ppliqué in [Covering Stitch]. Select the sew type nd other ttriutes ([Width] nd [Density]) for finishing the ppliqué. For this exmple, select "Stin Stitch", nd then set [Width] to "3.0 mm" nd [Density] to "5.0 line/mm". Stin Stitch Settings cn e specified for [Width] nd [Density]. 7 Under [Output Pttern], select whether covering stitches will e dded round the entire pttern ([Add]) or covering stitches will e sewn for shpe lines ([Replce]). For this exmple, select [Replce]. Add Settings cn e specified for [Distnce from originl Pttern]. Replce E Stitch Settings cn e specified for [Stroke], [Intervl] nd [Pitch]. 8 Specify hole sewing in [Crete n pplique with hole sewing]. V Stitch Settings cn e specified for [Stroke], [Intervl] nd [Pitch]. cc For detils on setting [Stroke], [Intervl] nd [Pitch], refer to"e/v Stitch" on pge 328 Select this check ox when creting n ppliqué with holes (empty regions). For this exmple, select this check ox. This check ox ppers when only the outer pttern with hole sewing pplied or only text pttern (with fonts other thn uilt-in fonts 025 nd 029, user-defined font or Smll Text font) is selected, or when [Replce] is selected under [Output Pttern]. * Multiple text ptterns cn e selected if certin conditions re met. 163

165 Tutoril 8-1: Creting Appliqués The shpe of the ppliqué mteril ppers s shown elow, depending on whether the [Crete n pplique with hole sewing] check ox is selected or not. When the [Crete n pplique with hole sewing] check ox is clered Aout the Output Pttern settings Add Covering stitches will e creted round the originl pttern. Under [Distnce from originl Pttern], specify the distnce of the covering stitches from the originl pttern. When the [Crete n pplique with hole sewing] check ox is selected 9 Click [OK] to exit the Applique Wizrd dilog ox. This cn e used to comine vrious ptterns. When [Cutting] is selected under [Applique Mteril]: Uncut sections will remin in cutting lines specified with the Applique Wizrd. Be sure to cut them with scissors fter emroidering is finished. The [Add] setting is not ville if the stitch pttern does not exist, for exmple, when oth the line nd region sew types re set to [Not Sewn]. Replce Covering stitches will e sewn for outlines in the originl pttern. The originl pttern will e deleted. Shpe nd text ptterns cn e used s the originl pttern. However, the following ptterns cnnot e used. - Open lines - Closed lines tht re intersecting - Text creted with uilt-in fonts 025 nd 029, n user-defined font or Smll Text font - Originl ptterns contining oth shpe pttern nd text pttern Opertions for Specific Applictions 164

166 Tutoril 8-1: Creting Appliqués When multiple ptterns re selected, covering stitches will e creted s shown elow. If the ptterns do not overlp Covering stitches will e creted for ech pttern. [Add] [Replce] If the ptterns overlp With the [Add] setting, covering stitches will e creted for n outline round ll ptterns. [Add] [Replce] 165

167 Tutoril 8-2: Creting Emroidered Ptches Tutoril 8-2: Creting Emroidered Ptches The Emroidered Ptch Wizrd provides instructions for esily creting emroidered ptches. The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_8. Step 1 Step 2 Creting the ptch pttern Using the Emroidered Ptch Wizrd The Emroidered Ptch Wizrd cnnot e used if pttern contining text with the [Nme Drop] ttriute pplied is selected. Step 1 Creting the ptch pttern 1 Select the pproprite [Shpes] tool, nd then drw hert. cc "Drwing vrious shpe" on pge Drg ech pttern to rrnge them so tht they re well lnced. Opertions for Specific Applictions 2 Import the fish pttern from the [Aqutic] ctegory of the Design Lirry. cc "From Design Lirry" on pge Select the [Text] tool, nd then type in "I", "Fresh" nd "Fish". cc "Entering text" on pge

168 Tutoril 8-2: Creting Emroidered Ptches Step 2 Using the Emroidered Ptch Wizrd 1 Select ll ptterns, nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Emroidered Ptch] in the [Cut nd Sew] group to strt the [Emroidered Ptch Wizrd]. 3 Specify settings in the [Emroidered Ptch Wizrd] dilog ox in the following order -. [Width], [Density] nd [Distnce from originl Pttern] will e ville if [Yes] hs een selected. Use [Distnce from originl Pttern] to specify the distnce etween the originl pttern nd the order. 5 Under [Cutting Line], specify the cutting lines for the emroidered ptch. The cutting line of the emroidered ptch cn e sewn s running stitches or the emroidered ptch cn e cut out. For this exmple, select [Running Stitch], nd then set [Distnce from stin stitch] to "3.0 mm". Running Stitch Select this setting to sew the cutting line, then cut long the cutting line with scissors. Stin Stitch Cutting Line Cutting In order for this setting to e ville cc "Bsic requirements for Cutwork functions" on pge 173 Select this setting to cut the fric with mchine instlled with cutwork needles. To return ll prmeters in the [Emroidered Ptch Wizrd] to their defult settings, click [Defult]. 4 Under [Stin Stitch], specify order for the emroidered ptch. For this exmple, select [Yes], nd then set [Width] to "3.0 mm", [Density] to "4.5 line/ mm" nd [Distnce from originl Pttern] to "5.0 mm". 6 Click [OK] to exit the [Emroidered Ptch Wizrd] dilog ox. When [Cutting] is selected under [Cutting Line], uncut sections will remin in the cutting lines creted with the Emroidered Ptch Wizrd. Be sure to cut them with scissors fter emroidering is finished. The thred color of the stin stitching is the color currently specified in the Design Pge. 167

169 Tutoril 8-2: Creting Emroidered Ptches Prcticl use of Stin Stitch nd Cutting Line When [Stin Stitch] is set to [Yes] The distnce etween the ptch pttern nd the stin stitches is specified under [Distnce from originl Pttern], nd the distnce etween the stin stitches nd the cutting line is specified under [Distnce from stin stitch]. When [Stin Stitch] is set to [No] The distnce etween the ptch pttern nd the cutting line is specified under [Distnce from originl Pttern] Ptch pttern 2 Cutting Line Ptch pttern 2 Stin Stitch 3 Cutting Line If multiple ptterns re selected for the ptch pttern, the finished result differs depending on the distnces etween the ptterns s well s etween the ptterns, stin stitches nd cutting line in ddition to the width of the stin stitches. If multiple ptterns re selected for the ptch pttern, the finished result differs depending on the distnces etween the ptterns nd etween the ptterns nd cutting line. Opertions for Specific Applictions 168

170 Tutoril 8-3: Creting Cutwork Pttern Filled with Net Stitching Tutoril 8-3: Creting Cutwork Pttern Filled with Net Stitching Cutwork ptterns, comining emroidery nd cutting with cutwork needles, cn e creted using the extended functions. By using the [Cutwork Wizrd], cutwork pttern cn esily e creted. Finish The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_8. Step 1 Creting n outline shpe for cutwork Step 2 Using the Cutwork Wizrd For the cutwork functions to e ville, click, then [Design Settings]. Under [Mchine Type], select 2. Select [Outline Shpes] from the [From] selector, select [Leves] from the [Ctegory] selector, select [OL_clover01.pes], nd then click [Import]. When the cutwork functions re not eing used, it is not necessry to select this setting. cc "Specifying the Design Pge Settings" on pge 14 Step 1 Creting n outline shpe for cutwork 1 Disply the [Import] pne. Ptterns in [Outline Shpes] from the [From] selector re pproprite for creting the cutwork ptterns. 169

171 Tutoril 8-3: Creting Cutwork Pttern Filled with Net Stitching 3 Enlrge the pttern imported into the Design Pge. 4 Ungroup the pttern. Select the pttern, right-click it, nd then click [Ungroup]. The [Cutwork Wizrd] cn lso e used if closed shpe ptterns or text ptterns re selected. If line of the pttern crosses itself, the [Cutwork Wizrd] will not e ville. Text with uilt-in font 025 or 029 or userdefined font cnnot e used. Shpe ptterns nd text ptterns cnnot e comined. 3 Specify settings in the [Cutwork Wizrd] in the following order - e. c d e Step 2 Using the Cutwork Wizrd 1 Select the four leves, nd then click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Cutwork Wizrd] in the [Cut nd Sew] group to strt the [Cutwork Wizrd]. c d e Stilize Cut Edge Cutting Line Secure Wter-Solule Stilizer Net Fill Covering Stin Stitch To return ll prmeters to their defult settings, click [Defult]. Opertions for Specific Applictions 4 Specify running stitching long the edge efore cutting in [Stilize Cut Edge]. By specifying tht running stitches e sewn efore the fric is cut, the cut edges re reinforced, preventing them from unrveling. For this exmple, select [Yes]. 170

172 Tutoril 8-3: Creting Cutwork Pttern Filled with Net Stitching 5 Specify cutting line type in [Cutting Line]. Select whether the fric will e cut long the cutting line or whether the cutting line will remin s running stitches. For this exmple, select [Cutting]. Cutting In order for this setting to e ville cc "Bsic requirements for Cutwork functions" on pge 173 Select this setting to cut the fric with mchine instlled with cutwork needles. Running Stitch Select this setting to sew the cutting line, then cut long the cutting line with scissors. 7 Specify net fill stitching inside the cutout res in [Net Fill]. By sewing net fill stitching in cutouts, inner cutouts cn e reinforced while llowing for greter design vriety. For this exmple, select [Yes]. Select the prmeters ccording to the procedure from step 8 to 10, when [Net Fill] is set to [Yes]. 8 Specify the net fill stitch pttern in [Pttern]. Five net fill stitch ptterns re ville. For this exmple, select [Pttern 2]. 6 Specify securing of the wter-solule stilizer in [Secure Wter-Solule Stilizer]. Running stitches will e sewn to secure the wter-solule stilizer fter the fric hs een cut. In order to prevent emroidery from losing its shpe fter it hs een cut, plce wter-solule stilizer in the cutout res nd sew it in plce. For this exmple, select [Yes]. Pttern 1 Pttern 2 Pttern 3 Pttern 4 Pttern 5 171

173 Tutoril 8-3: Creting Cutwork Pttern Filled with Net Stitching 9 Specify the pttern spcing for the net fill stitch in [Spcing]. For this exmple, set it to [3.0 mm]. 13 Specify the density of the stin stitching in [Density]. For this exmple, set it to [6.5 line/mm]. 2.0 mm 10.0 mm 10 Specify the pttern direction of the net fill stitch in [Direction]. For this exmple, set it to [0 ]. 5.0 line/mm 7.0 line/mm 14 Click [OK] to exit the [Cutwork Wizrd] Specify stin stitching fter cutting in [Covering Stin Stitch]. Stin stitching is sewn long the edges of inner cutouts. The zigzg stitch or the stem stitch is used s n underly for the stin stitching. For this exmple, select [Yes]. Opertions for Specific Applictions Select the prmeters ccording to the procedure from step 12 to 13, when [Covering Stin Stitch] is set to [Yes]. 12 Specify the width of the stin stitching in [Width]. For this exmple, set it to [4.0 mm]. 3.0 mm 6.0 mm 172

174 On Using the Cutwork Functions On Using the Cutwork Functions Before using Cutwork functions, check the following. Bsic requirements for Cutwork functions Ptterns when [Outline Shpes] is selected in the [From] selector of the [Import] pne. Set the "Mchine Type" to multineedle emroidery mchine For the Cutwork functions to e ville, click, then [Design Settings]. Under [Mchine Type], select. Outline shpes nd text cn e used to crete cutwork pttern Outline shpes tht hve een drwn with the tools indicted elow. Text creted in fonts other thn uilt-in fonts 025 nd 029, user-defined font or smll text font. Use multi-needle mchine tht hs een upgrded to work with Cutwork functions The emroidery mchine should e set to cutwork mode in the settings screen efore strting to emroider. Refer to the included Opertion Mnul for the detils of emroidery mchine opertion. Cutwork functions cnnot e used with singleneedle emroidery mchines. In ddition, some multi-needle mchines my not support the functions. Be sure to check tht your mchine is comptile with the cutwork functions. 173

175 On Using the Cutwork Functions Lyout & Editing window for cutwork ptterns The settings nd window res specificlly for cutwork functions re descried elow Sewing Order The cutting lines pper in one frme in the [Sewing Order] pne, nd the icon for the cutwork needle ppers eside the frme. 2 Design Pge The cutting lines pper s gry dotted lines in the Design Pge, regrdless of whether the [Solid View], [Stitch View] or [Relistic View] is selected. 3 Sewing Attriutes In the [Sewing Attriutes] pne, detiled cutting settings cn e specified for the cutwork functions. cc "Cutting" in the "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge Previewing cutting lines In the [Stitch Simultor] pne, the cutwork needles re displyed in four different shdes of gry. In stitch simultion, the cutting lines pper s short gry lines, indicting the needle drop points for mking the cuts. 3 Opertions for Specific Applictions While eing edited In stitch simultion 174

176 On Using the Cutwork Functions 5 Checking Design Property When [Cutting] hs een ssigned to line from the [Line sew type] selector, [Design Property] screen ppers s shown elow. Trnsferring/sving/ exporting the cutwork ptterns In ddition to trnsferring cutwork ptterns to mchine, they cn e sved or printed. Trnsferring Trnsferring using USB medi By using commercilly ville USB medi, cutwork ptterns cn e trnsferred to emroidery mchines comptile with the USB medi. cc "Trnsferring to mchine y using USB medi" on pge 201 [Color order] cn e lso viewed in the [Design Property] screen in the Design Dtse. In ptterns with [Cutting] selected in the [Line sew type] selector, the line color nd region sewing settings re not ville. Designs contining the line sew type [Cutting] re sved s cutwork ptterns. cc "Trnsferring/sving/exporting the cutwork ptterns" on pge 175 Creted cutwork ptterns cn e used only with emroidery mchines upgrded for cutwork. With Plette Ver.10, the line sew type [Cutting] chnges to [Running Stitch] in the following situtions. When the [Mchine Type] setting (on the [Design Pge] t of the [Design Settings] dilog ox) is chnged from multi-needle emroidery mchine to single-needle emroidery mchine When cutwork pttern is imported while [Mchine Type] (on the [Design Pge] t) is set to single-needle emroidery mchine Cutwork pttern cnnot e trnsferred to mchine y using n originl crd or the Link function. Cutwork pttern cnnot e creted in Design Center. To set the line sew type to [Cutting], use Lyout & Editing. Trnsferring directly to mchine's memory Cutwork ptterns cn e trnsferred to emroidery mchines tht cn e connected to computer using USB cle. cc Sving "Trnsferring directly to mchine's memory" on pge 201 Cutwork ptterns cnnot e trnsferred to mchine y using n originl crd or the Link function. The cutwork ptterns cn e trnsferred to emroidery mchine only fter the upgrde for cutwork hs een instlled nd certified to the mchine. Sving cutwork ptterns in the PES formt For detils, refer to "Sving nd Printing" on pge 95. Designs contining the line sew type [Cutting] re sved s cutwork ptterns. 175

177 On Using the Cutwork Functions Exporting Exporting cutwork ptterns in other formts Creted cutwork ptterns cn e converted to other formts (.dst,.hus,.exp,.pcs,.vip,.sew,.jef,.csd,.xxx, nd.shv) nd outputted. When exported s nother formt, the cutting lines will e chnged to running stitch. Opertions for Specific Applictions 176

178 Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs Lyout & Editing hs function for creting split emroidery designs when the emroidery pttern eing creted is lrger thn the emroidery hoop. The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_9. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Specifying the Design Pge size in Lyout & Editing Creting the emroidery design Checking the emroidering order Attching stilizer to the fric Using the Positioning Sheet, mrk the emroidering position on the fric Hooping the fric Emroidering Step 1 Specifying the Design Pge size in Lyout & Editing 1 Click, then [Design Settings]. 2 Specify the Design Pge size nd the size of the design sections. c Select [Custom Size], nd then type or select the desired width nd height for the Design Pge. This setting is to specify the exct width nd height of design. For this exmple, set width to 230 mm nd height to 330 mm. Click the [Section Size (for Hoop Size)] selector, nd then select the size of the sections (your emroidery hoop). For this exmple, select mm ( mm). With the [Section Size (for Hoop Size)] setting, the width nd height of the sections re 10mm smller thn the ctul hoop size in order to provide spce for fine positioning djustments with djustment sections. The 10mm is for overlpping. It is not necessry for the [Section Size (for Hoop Size)] to mtch the Design Pge size. Select the hoop size to e used for sewing. 3 Click [OK]. c Select the type of emroidery mchine to e used. 177

179 Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs Step 2 Creting the emroidery design For this exmple, we will use one of the lce emroidery ptterns provided with the softwre. 1 Disply the [Import] pne. 2 Select [Tutoril] from the [From] selector nd [Tutoril_9] from the [Ctegory] selector. Click [tutoril_9-1.pes], then [Import]. Step 3 Checking the emroidering order Check the sewing order to see the order tht the design sections will e sewn nd determine which prts of the fric should e hooped. The design sections re sewn in order from left to right, top to ottom. 1 Click, then [Design Property]. cc "Importing emroidery designs" on pge Uncheck the [Show out selected Oject(s)] to view the seprte design sections. Click on [Next] nd [Previous] to move ck nd forth through ech section. Check the design, nd then click [Cncel]. Opertions for Specific Applictions Before n emroidery pttern creted in custom Design Pge is sved, running stitches re dded t the edges of the design sections so tht the design sections cn esily e ligned during sewing. This lignment stitching ppers in the [NOT DEFINED] color nd cnnot e edited. cc Memo of "Step 7 Emroidering" on pge

180 Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs Step 4 Attching stilizer to the fric Stilizer must lwys e used when emroidering to stilize the fric. There re mny types of stilizer; the type tht you will use depends on the type of fric tht you re emroidering on. For lrge-size designs tht re split into sections, the stilizer must e dhered to the fric, for exmple, iron-on stilizer. In some cses, you my need to use two pieces of stilizer for your emroidery. When using spry dhesive, spry the dhesive onto hooped piece of stilizer tht is strong enough for the entire lrge-size emroidery. In some cses, you my need to use two pieces of stilizer for your emroidery. For est results, ttch the stilizer to the fric (s descried on this pge). Without the correct stilizer, the design my ecome misligned due to puckering in the fric. Be sure to check the recommendtions on the stilizer pckge. 1 Punch hole t the end of ech rrow on the positioning sheet. 2 Plce the positioning sheet on the fric, nd then insert the tip of mrking pen into ech hole to mrk the fric. 3 Connect the points mrked on the fric to drw reference lines. Step 5 Using the Positioning Sheet, mrk the emroidering position on the fric The positioning sheets re included in the pckge. The Positioning Sheets re lso in the [Positioning Sheet] folder nd cn e printed out with printer. Loction of the Positioning Sheets: C:\Progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\Positioning Sheet. The positioning sheets in the PDF files re t ctul size. When printing the positioning sheet from the PDF file, e sure to print it t ctul size. Do not print while reducing or enlrging to fit the pper size. 4 Plce the positioning sheet on the fric, nd mrk points A, B, C nd D. A D 5 To mrk n re to the right of the previously mrked re, lign points A nd D on the positioning sheet with mrks B nd C on the fric. B C A A B B D D C C 179

181 Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs 6 To mrk n re elow the previously mrked re, lign points A nd B on the positioning sheet with mrks C nd D on the fric. A A D B B C Step 6 Hooping the fric 1 Insert the emroidery sheet into the inner ring of the emroidery hoop, nd then plce them on top of the fric with the centerline on the emroidery sheet ligned with the reference lines (drwn on the fric) for the first pttern section to e sewn. D C 7 Repet steps 5 through 6 to reposition the positioning sheet nd drw the emroidering position for ech section of the emroidery pttern. The intersection of the horizontl nd verticl line indictes the center of the emroidery hoop. While crefully considering how the fric will e hooped, plce the positioning sheet on the fric, nd then drw lines to indicte the emroidering position. In ddition, ecuse ll emroidery res re not drwn on the positioning sheet for lrge emroidery hoops, e creful tht the emroidery re does not extend from the mrked re on the fric s shown elow. 2 Keeping the reference lines on the emroidery sheet ligned with the reference lines for the first pttern section, plce the fric nd inner ring of the emroidery hoop into the outer ring of the hoop, nd then pull the fric so tht it is tight. 3 Finish hooping the fric, nd then remove the emroidery sheet. Opertions for Specific Applictions 180

182 Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs Plce the fric nd hoop on level surfce, nd then mke sure tht the inner ring is pressed in well enough tht the top edge of the inner ring ligns with the top edge of the outer ring. If the emroidery sheet is not used, the mrks on the emroidery hoop cn e used to hoop the fric verticlly nd horizontlly. However, since the center point on some emroidery mchines is off center, the emroidery sheet should e used for est results. Another wy to hoop the fric is to use sticky stilizer tht cn e hooped seprtely, ter wy the protective pper, then crefully lign the fric onto the sticky surfce using the emroidery sheet s guide. Tip: The sticky stilizer should e removed right wy fter the emroidery design is finished. Tip: The fric cn e hooped more esily if doule-sided tpe is ffixed to the ck of the inner ring, which is plced on top of the fric, nd then the fric is clmped etween the inner ring nd the outer ring. 5 Hoop the fric for the next design section. cc "Hooping the fric" on pge 180 When n emroidery design creted in custom Design Pge is sved or trnsferred to n originl crd, lignment stitching (single lines of running stitches with the color [NOT DEFINED], with pitch of 7.0 mm, nd strting with fixed stitches with pitch of 0.3 mm) is dded t the edges of the design sections. (The lignment stitching ppers in the print preview nd is printed in red.) Smple dt for this tutoril 1) Emroider the upper-left design section. Alignment stitching is sewn elow nd on the right side of the emroidered design section. Step 7 Emroidering 1 When lrge-size emroidery designs re trnsferred to the emroidery mchine, the ptterns pper on the emroidery mchine disply s shown elow. For this exmple, select the first emroidery pttern section (A). If there is no stitching in section A, select the first section tht contins stitching. Click on [Appliction] utton, nd then click [Design Property] to check the emroidering order. 2) Hoop the fric for the upper-right design section with the left side of the hoop ligned on the lignment stitching on the right side of the design section sewn in step 1, nd then emroider the design. Before the design section is emroidered, lignment stitching is sewn on the left side. Mke sure tht this lignment stitching ligns with the lignment stitching sewn in step 1. After the design section is emroidered, lignment stitching is sewn elow the design section. 2 Attch the emroidery hoop to the emroidery mchine, nd then using the mchine's lyout djusting functions, lign the needle position with the intersection of the lines drwn on the fric. 3 Emroider the selected pttern. 4 Remove the emroidery hoop from the emroidery mchine, nd then remove the fric from the hoop. 181

183 Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs 3) Hoop the fric for the lower-left design section with the top of the hoop ligned on the lignment stitching t the ottom of the design section sewn in step 1, nd then emroider the design. Before the design section is emroidered, lignment stitching is sewn t the top. Mke sure tht this lignment stitching ligns with the lignment stitching sewn in step 1. After the design section is emroidered, lignment stitching is sewn on the right side of the design section. 4) Hoop the fric for the lower-right design section with the left side of the hoop ligned on the lignment stitching on the right side of the design section sewn in step 3 nd with the top of the hoop ligned on the lignment stitching t the ottom of the design section sewn in step 2, nd then emroider the design. Before the design section is emroidered, lignment stitching is sewn on the left side nd t the top. Mke sure tht this lignment stitching ligns with the lignment stitching sewn in step 3 nd in step 2. Opertions for Specific Applictions 6 Continue hooping the fric nd emroidering until the entire emroidery design is sewn. 182

184 Tutoril 9-2: Creting Design for Multi-Position Hoops Tutoril 9-2: Creting Design for Multi- Position Hoops This progrm enles you to crete multi-position designs tht you cn stitch in ny multi-position hoop ttched to your emroidery mchine. c c ABC Exmple of multi-position hoop: mm hoop Although the size of the design tht cn e emroidered using n multi-position hoop is mm (or mm, depending on the sewing re of the emroidery mchine), first determine which of the three instlltion positions (indicted s,, nd c in the illustrtion ove) the multi-position hoop will e instlled t nd determine the orienttion of the design. When creting the design, ech design section cn only e s lrge s the sewing re of the emroidery mchine. The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_9. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Selecting the Design Pge size Creting the design Optimizing hoop chnges Checking the pttern Step 1 Selecting the Design Pge size 1 Click, then [Design Settings]. 2 Select under [Mchine Type], nd then select [Hoop Size] nd choose Design Pge size of mm or mm from the selector. Then, click [OK]. 183

185 Tutoril 9-2: Creting Design for Multi-Position Hoops Settings for multi-position hoops re indicted y " ". Choose the pproprite setting fter checking the size of the hoop ville for your mchine. Step 2 Creting the design 1 The Design Pge ppers on the screen s shown elow. The size of one pttern must e no lrger thn mm (or mm). Ech pttern must completely fit within single re (,, or c) Are Emroidering re when the multi-position hoop is instlled t the top instlltion position. Are Emroidering re when the multi-position hoop is instlled t the middle instlltion position. Are c Emroidering re when the multi-position hoop is instlled t the ottom instlltion position. The dotted lines seprte ech re. c 1: The position of this pttern is correct since it fits completely within re. 2: The position of this pttern is correct since it fits completely within either re or re c. 3: The size of this pttern is cceptle, ut its position must e corrected since it does not fit completely within ny of the res. (It will e necessry to correct the position in order to fit in either or c.) 4: This pttern must e corrected since it is too lrge. (It will e necessry to correct the position nd size in order to fit in either,, or c.) c Opertions for Specific Applictions 2 Crete the design, mking sure tht it meets the following conditions. c 184

186 Tutoril 9-2: Creting Design for Multi-Position Hoops Step 3 Optimizing hoop chnges 1 Click, then [Design Settings]. A check mrk ppers when this function is turned on; no check mrk is displyed when this function is turned off Click [Output] t c 3 Select the [Optimize the numer of times to chnge the hoop s position] check ox, nd then click [OK]. When the Optimize hoop chnge function is turned on, the sewing order tht you hve set is optimized to reduce the numer of times tht the hoop instlltion position is chnged. For the exmple shown on this pge, the sewing order is: (pttern 1) (pttern 2) (ptterns 3 & 5) c (ptterns 4 & 6) If the Optimize hoop chnge function is turned off, ech pttern is sewn ccording to the sewing order tht you hve set. For the exmple shown on this pge, the sewing order is: (pttern 1) (pttern 2) (pttern 3) c (pttern 4) (pttern 5) c (pttern 6) Therefore, since the numer of times for chnging the hoop instlltion position is not optimized, it my e chnged more often thn if it ws optimized. Since the pttern my not e sewn correctly or the fric my not feed evenly if the hoop instlltion position is chnged too often, we recommend turning on the [Optimize hoop chnge] function. Turning on this function will chnge the sewing order tht you hve set, therefore, check the sewing order efore you egin emroidering. 185

187 Tutoril 9-2: Creting Design for Multi-Position Hoops Step 4 Checking the pttern 1 Click, then [Design Property]. Sving the design The entire design is sved s single file (.pes). If the file size or the numer of color chnges is lrger thn the specified numer, or if one of the ptterns does not completely fit within n emroidery re, the error messge ppers. 2 Check the sewing order of ech pttern nd the numer of times the hoop position will e chnged. Only the ptterns tht would e sewn t the current position in the hoop instlltion order pper in the Design Pge, nd the emroidering re for the current hoop position is outlined in red. The position in the hoop instlltion order for the currently displyed pttern. To disply informtion for ptterns t other positions in the hoop instlltion order, click [Previous] or [Next]. Writing the design to n originl crd A design for multi-position hoop is creted y considering the pttern in ech hoop instlltion position s one pttern, then comining them. Therefore, when this type of design is written to n originl crd, one multi-position hoop design is sved s comintion of multiple ptterns. : This pttern is sewn when the hoop is instlled t the top instlltion position (position ). : This pttern is sewn when the hoop is instlled t the middle instlltion position (position ). : This pttern is sewn when the hoop is instlled t the ottom instlltion position (position c). Therefore, the frme instlltion position sewing order for the pttern shown ove is,, then c. Opertions for Specific Applictions If pttern is lrger thn the emroidery re or if pttern is positioned so tht it does not completely fit within n emroidery re, the error messge ppers. After the pttern cusing the error is displyed, select the pttern nd chnge its size or position. 186

188 Tutoril 9-2: Creting Design for Multi-Position Hoops Notes on emroidering using the multiposition hoop Before emroidering your design, sew tril smple of the design on scrp piece of fric from your design, mking sure to use the sme needle nd thred. Be sure to ffix stilizer mteril to the ck of the fric nd tightly stretch the fric within the hoop. When emroidering on thin or stretch frics, use two lyers of stilizer mteril. If no stilizer mteril is used, the fric my ecome over-stretched or wrinkled or the emroidery my not e sewn correctly. cc For more wys to stilize lrge designs, refer to "Attching stilizer to the fric" on pge 179 Use the zigzg stitch for sewing the outlines in order to prevent emroidering outside the outlines. Printing Design Pge for multiposition hoop On the first pge, complete imge of the Design Pge is printed t ctul size. (However, for mm Design Pge, reduced imge of the Design Pge is printed.) On the following pges, n imge of ech design section nd its sewing informtion re printed in the sewing order. When [Actul Size] is selected: An imge of the pttern in ech design section is printed on seprte pge s the corresponding sewing informtion. When [Reduced Size] is selected: An imge of the pttern in ech design section is printed on the sme pge s the corresponding sewing informtion. cc "Printing" on pge 96 For ptterns tht require the hoop to e instlled t different instlltion positions, design the emroidery pttern so tht the vrious prts of the pttern overlp in order to prevent mislignment while emroidering. 1 1 Overlp 187

189 Tutoril 9-3: Emroidering With the Jumo Frme Tutoril 9-3: Emroidering With the Jumo Frme This section descries the procedures for creting emroidery dt nd for emroidering using the jumo frme (frme size: mm; with mounts on oth sides of the emroidery frme). If the jumo frme ws selected, the size of the Design Pge ecomes mm in order to crete mrgins tht llow utomtic positioning using the uilt-in cmer. The jumo frme descried here ws designed specificlly for our multi-needle emroidery mchines equipped with uilt-in cmer. It cnnot e used with ny other mchine, such s single-needle emroidery mchines. Check the Opertion Mnul provided with your multi-needle emroidery mchine to determine if it is comptile with the jumo frme. Jumo frme: mm emroidery frme For detils on emroidering using the cmer nd on ffixing the emroidery positioning stickers, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with the emroidery mchine. The smple file for this tutoril is locted t Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Tutoril\Tutoril_9. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Selecting the Design Pge size Creting the emroidery design Checking divided pttern Attching stilizer to the fric Emroidering Step 1 Selecting the Design Pge size 1 Click, then [Design Settings]. 2 Click under [Mchine Type], select mm (Jumo Frme) from the [Hoop Size] selector under [Pge Size], nd then click [OK]. Opertions for Specific Applictions 188

190 Tutoril 9-3: Emroidering With the Jumo Frme Check the size of emroidery frmes tht cn e used with your mchine efore chnging the setting. 2 Select [Tutoril] from the [From] selector nd [Tutoril_9] from the [Ctegory] selector. Click [tutoril_9-3.pes], then [Import]. 3 The Design Pge ppers on the screen s shown elow. Side 1 emroidering re Are emroidered first Side 2 emroidering re Are emroidered second The emroidery pttern is utomticlly divided into the different res. The emroidery pttern is split with section overlpping nd. If the pttern rrnged in this section uses stin stitches, the stitch my chnge when the pttern is split. Therefore, we recommend shifting the pttern or chnging the sew type to fill stitches. cc "Importing emroidery designs" on pge 91. Step 3 Checking divided pttern Before strting to emroider, the divided emroidery pttern cn e checked. If pttern tht you do not wish to e divided hs een split onto Side 1 nd Side 2, you cn check the emroidery pttern, then djust it so it is not split. 1 Click, then [Design Property]. Step 2 Creting the emroidery design For this exmple, n emroidery pttern provided with this softwre will e used in the procedure descried elow. 1 Disply the [Import] pne. 189

191 Tutoril 9-3: Emroidering With the Jumo Frme 2 Click [Next] to view the next side of the emroidery design. Step 4 Attching stilizer to the fric Alwys use stilizer when emroidering. For lrge designs split into sections, the stilizer must e ttched to the fric, for exmple, y using iron-on stilizer, self-dhesive stilizer or spry dhesive. Use stilizer pproprite for the fric. In ddition, e sure to use stilizer tht is strong enough nd lrge enough for the entire emroidering re. You my need to ttch two lyers if thin stilizer is used. cc See more informtion out stilizer, "Step 4 Attching stilizer to the fric" on pge179. Step 5 Emroidering To view the emroidery pttern of the seprte sides, uncheck the [Show out selected Oject(s)]. Emroider using the emroidery positioning stickers included with the emroidery mchine. These stickers re detected y the emroidery mchine's uilt-in cmer to utomticlly position the fric. 1 Hoop the fric in the emroidery frme. Opertions for Specific Applictions Sving the design The entire design is sved s single file (.pes). cc "Trnsferring to mchine y using USB medi" on pge 201, nd "Trnsferring directly to mchine's memory" on pge 201 An emroidery design for the jumo frme cnnot e trnsferred to the mchine y using n originl crd. Trnsfer these designs directly to the mchine's memory or to the mchine y using USB medi. 2 Attch the emroidery frme to the emroidery mchine. 3 Select the pttern for side 1, nd then strt the emroidery mchine to emroider the side 1 emroidering re. 190

192 Tutoril 9-3: Emroidering With the Jumo Frme 4 When emroidering is finished, follow the instructions on the emroidery mchine to ffix emroidery positioning sticker on the emroidering re. 6 Follow the emroidery mchine instructions to remove the emroidery positioning stickers. An imge of the needle loction ppers in the screen with the positioning detection re frmed y line. Affix n emroidery positioning sticker so tht it fits within the line. For detils, refer to the Opertion Mnul for the mchine. 7 Select the pttern for side 2, nd then strt the emroidery mchine to emroider the side 2 emroidering re. The emroidery mchine's uilt-in cmer detects the emroidery positioning sticker. 5 After the sticker hve een detected, remove the emroidery frme, rotte it 180, nd then re-ttch it to the emroidery mchine. For detils on using the emroidery mchine, refer to the Opertion Mnul included with it. Crefully remove the emroidery frme nd rettch it correctly. If the emroidery frme is not correctly ttched or if there is slck in the fric, the emroidery pttern my ecome misligned. The emroidery mchine's uilt-in cmer detects the emroidery positioning sticker gin. Emroidery dt for the jumo frme When the emroidery design is eing sved in [Lyout & Editing], older file formt versions re not ville. In ddition, the emroidery design is sved s dt specificlly for our multi-needle emroidery mchines equipped with uilt-in cmer. It cnnot e sewn with ny other mchine. An emroidery pttern creted in Design Pge set to the jumo frme size in [Design Center] cnnot e trnsferred directly to the mchine. Import the emroidery pttern into [Lyout & Editing], nd then trnsfer it to the emroidery mchine. 191

193 Specifying/Sving Custom Sewing Attriutes Specifying/Sving Custom Sewing Attriutes Sving frequently used sewing ttriutes Frequently used sewing ttriutes cn e sved together, nd reclled when specifying sewing ttriutes. Sving the settings in list 1 Click the [Sewing Attriutes] t. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 2 If necessry, chnge the settings, nd then Deleting group of settings from the list 1 In the [Lod/Sve Defult Settings] dilog ox, select the group of settings to e deleted. 2 Click [Delete] to delete the selected group of settings from the list. Reclling group of settings from the list 1 In the [Lod/Sve Defult Settings] dilog ox, select the group of settings to e reclled. click. 3 Click [Sve As]. 4 Type in nme for the group of settings, nd then click [OK] to register the group in list. A group of settings tht you hve sved will pper with "*" eside its nme. Sewing ttriutes pproprite for vrious frics re lredy ville. Select the type of fric to e emroidered to specify the recommended settings for tht fric. 2 Click [Lod]. The settings in the [Sewing Attriute Setting] dilog ox chnge to the sved settings. Opertions for Specific Applictions The sved setting cn lso e used on different computer. Simply copy [sstu.txt] from [C:\Progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\Settings] on the originl computer to the Settings folder t the sme pth on the destintion computer. In Explore click on C:\Progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\Settings. Single left click on the Settings folder to view the contents. Single right click on sstu.txt nd select copy from the menu. Pste to USB device nd trnsfer to different computer. Editing user thred color lists If you hve list of thred colors tht re frequently used, they cn e sved in user thred chrt. 1 Click [Option], then [Options]. 192

194 Specifying/Sving Custom Sewing Attriutes 2 Click [Edit User Thred Chrt]. Creting new thred chrt 1 Click [New Chrt]. 2 Type in the nme of the chrt, nd then click [OK]. 3 A user thred chrt cn e sved, edited or deleted. c d e f g A sved thred chrt cn e selected from the [User Thred Chrt] selector nd [Thred Chrt] selector. Renming thred chrt 1 From the [User Thred Chrt] selector j, select the chrt. 2 Click [Renme Chrt]. h i j k l m 3 Type in the nme of the chrt, nd then click [OK]. c d e f g h i j k l m Select n existing thred chrt. Adds thred colors from existing thred chrt. When editing or deleting thred chrt, select the thred chrt here efore performing the opertion. Imports the thred chrt. Deletes thred chrt. Cretes new thred chrt. Chnges the thred chrt nme. Displys thred colors in existing thred chrt. Deletes thred color. Displys thred colors in the user thred chrt. Chnges the order of the thred colors. Adds new thred color. Edits thred color. Deleting chrt 1 From the [User Thred Chrt] selector j, select the chrt. 2 Click [Delete Chrt] c. 3 If messge ppers, click [Yes]. 193

195 Specifying/Sving Custom Sewing Attriutes Importing thred chrt 1 Click [Import Chrt] c. 2 Select the drive, the folder, nd the tc, tc2 or csv file, nd then click [Open]. Adding new item 1 Click [New Item] f. 2 To crete new color, click [Mix]. 3 Specify the color, nd then click [OK] to dd the specified color to the [Edit Thred] dilog ox. Files in the.tc,.tc2 or.csv formt cn e imported. cc "User thred chrt files" on pge If messge ppers, click [Yes]. Editing chrt 1 From the [User Thred Chrt] selector j, select the chrt. 2 Continue with the pproprite procedure. To sve the chnges, click [OK]. Adding items from thred chrt 1 From the [Thred Chrt] selector h, select the thred rnd or user thred chrt. If multiple user thred chrts hve een creted, thred colors cn e selected from different user thred chrts. 2 From the list i, click the thred colors. The color cnnot e chnged if the slider () is moved to the top of the scle. 4 If necessry, type in the code, rnd nd description into the pproprite oxes. Only numers cn e entered for the code. () Opertions for Specific Applictions To dd multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting thred colors. 3 Click [Add] l. The selected items re dded to the list in the user thred chrt j. 5 Click [OK] to dd the new item to the user thred chrt k. An sterisk (*) ppers in front of the index numer for items creted or edited y the user. 194

196 Specifying/Sving Custom Sewing Attriutes Deleting items 1 From the list for the user thred chrt k, select the item to e deleted. 2 Click [Delete] m to delete the item from the user thred chrt. Editing n item An item registered in the list for user thred chrt cn e edited to chnge the color or thred numer. 1 From the list for the user thred chrt k, select the item to e edited, nd then click [Edit Item] g. 2 Edit the item detils in the sme wy s dding new item. As with newly dded items, n sterisk (*) ppers in front of the index numer of edited items. User thred chrt files Existing user thred chrts cn e imported, or edited user thred chrts cn e used on different computer. A newly creted user thred chrt is sved, in the.tc2 formt with the sme nme s the thred chrt, t [C:\Progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\MyChrt]. Existing user thred chrts, creted with the previous versions of the ppliction such s Plette Ver.9, cn e used in Plette Ver.10. Import the file "chrt2.tc" from the following loction; [C:\Progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.9\Color]. The file "chrt1.tc" in the [Color] folder cnnot e imported. A user thred chrt file in the.csv formt cn e imported. The.csv file should contin informtion for Code, Brnd, Description, R, G nd B, seprted y comms with one color on ech line. The RGB vlues must e within Exmple: For.csv file 100,MyBrnd,Blck,10,10,10 101,MyBrnd,White,245,245,245 Chnging the order of items 1 From the list for the user thred chrt k, select the item to e moved. 2 Click [Up] or [Down] e to chnge the order of the item. 195

197 Specifying/Sving Custom Sewing Attriutes Thred colors in emroidery ptterns creted with this ppliction my pper differently on the emroidery mchine, depending on the model used. 1. Emroidery mchines without function for displying thred colors The specified thred color informtion cnnot e displyed t ll. 2. Emroidery mchines with function for displying thred colors Of the thred color informtion specified in the emroidery pttern, only the thred color nmes re displyed on the mchine. However, the nmes tht re displyed re limited to the mchine's preset thred color nmes. Therefore, the mchine displys the nmes of its preset thred colors tht re closest to the colors specified in the emroidery pttern. 3. Emroidery mchines with thred color index Some mchines cn disply the thred informtion specified with this ppliction. However, for thred colors tht hve een edited or dded y the user (thred colors with n sterisk (*) t the left side), only the thred numer is displyed. Opertions for Specific Applictions 196

198 Using Mnul Punch Tool Using Mnul Punch Tool By using the [Mnul Punch] tools, you cn crete emroidery ptterns whose sewing direction lines cn e mnully djusted. Shpes drwn using the [Mnul Punch] tools cn e edited in the sme wy s shpes drwn using the [Shpes] tools. Creting n originl logo Using the [Mnul Punch] tools, n emroidery pttern cn e creted using n imge of your logo in the ckground. 2 First, select the [Mnul Punch] tool. Click the [Home] t, click [Shpes], nd then click. 1 Open n imge of the logo to e used to crete the emroidery pttern. cc "Importing Imge Dt" on pge 150 For this exmple, we will crete pttern of the red design t the fr left. A fded copy of the ckground imge cn e displyed in the [Design Pge]. cc "Adjusting the density of the ckground imge" on pge 152 cc : Select this tool to crete stright lock ptterns (region sewing). (Shortcut key: <Z>) : Select this tool to crete curved lock ptterns (region sewing). (Shortcut key: <X>) : Select this tool to crete running ptterns (line sewing). (Shortcut key: <V>) : Select this tool to crete feed ptterns (jump stitches). (Shortcut key: <B>) "Jump Stitch nd Jump Stitch Trimming" on pge

199 Using Mnul Punch Tool 3 Click points 1 through 4, in order Click point 13, then point 14 (lst point of running stitching connecting the prts), nd then press the <Enter> key. Specify the point so tht it overlps/connects the prt creted in step 5. To remove n entered point, right-click it or press the <BckSpce> key Select the Curve tool. Click in the [Input] group of the [Mnul Punch] t. 5 Click points 5 through 11, in order. Click point 12 (lst point of the pttern prt), nd then press the <Enter> key Click in the [Input] group of the [Mnul Punch] t. 9 Click points 15 through 23, in order. Click point 24 (lst point of the pttern prt), nd then press the <Enter> key. Specify the point so tht it overlps/connects the prt creted in step Opertions for Specific Applictions Click in the [Input] group of the [Mnul Punch] t. 11 Insted of pressing the <Enter> key, the pttern prt cn e completed y doule-clicking. 6 Click in the [Input] group of the [Mnul Punch] t. 198

200 Using Mnul Punch Tool 11 Click points 25 through 27, in order. Click point 28 (lst point of the pttern prt), nd then press the <Enter> key. Specify the point so tht it overlps/connects the prt creted in step Imge of finished logo If prts re connected to previous nd following ones, jump stitches will not e creted in order to utomticlly optimize entry nd exit points. We recommend checking stitching with the Stitch Simultor efore sewing. cc "Checking the stitching with the Stitch Simultor" on pge 80 Mnully dding or djusting sewing direction lines in shpe ptterns fterwrd llows you to continue creting ptterns using the sme Mnul Punch tools. cc "Specifying the sewing direction" on pge

201 Trnsferring Dt This section descries opertions for trnsferring emroidery designs to emroidery mchines.

202 Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines The procedures for trnsferring the creted emroidery pttern to n emroidery mchine differ depending on your emroidery mchine model. For detils, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine. Trnsferring to mchine y using USB medi Designs cn e trnsferred to n emroidery mchine comptile with the USB Host function. The "Plette Softwre Key" cnnot e used s USB medi. Do not sve emroidery files on the "Plette Softwre Key" for trnsferring. 4 After the dt hs een trnsferred, the messge "Finished outputting dt." ppers, indicting tht the trnsfer is finished. Click [OK], nd then remove the USB medi. If multiple USB medi re connected, specify where the dt is to e trnsferred in the re shown elow. 1 Plug the USB medi into the computer. 2 Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Send] in the [Sew] group, click [Send to USB Medi], nd then select the desired drive. Trnsferring directly to mchine's memory Designs cn e trnsferred to emroidery mchines tht cn e connected to computer using USB cle. 1 Connect the emroidery mchine to the computer. Dt trnsfer egins. If there is lredy file with the sme nme t the destintion, the following dilog ox ppers. Select whether to overwrite the existing file, to stop copying or to copy the file using different nme. 2 Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Send] in the [Sew] group, click [Send to Your Mchine], nd then select the desired drive. Dt trnsfer egins. 201

203 Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines If there is lredy file with the sme nme t the destintion, the following dilog ox ppers. Select whether to overwrite the existing file, to stop copying or to copy the file using different nme. Trnsferring to mchine y using n originl crd Designs cn e trnsferred to n emroidery mchine equipped with crd slot. 4 After the dt hs een trnsferred, the messge "Finished outputting dt." ppers, indicting tht the trnsfer is finished. Click [OK]. For detils on trnsferring designs with this method, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine. If multiple mchines re connected, specify where the dt is to e trnsferred in the re shown elow. Be sure tht the hoop size of the design does not exceed the hoop tht will e used on the emroidering mchine. When writing to n originl crd tht lredy contins dt, ll dt on the crd will e deleted. Before writing to crd, sve ll necessry dt to hrd disk or other medi, nd check tht no necessry dt remins on the crd. cc "From n originl crd" on pge 92 An emroidery design for the jumo frme cnnot e trnsferred to the mchine y using n originl crd. This size is designed specificlly for our multi-needle emroidery mchines equipped with uilt-in cmer. cc "Tutoril 9-3: Emroidering With the Jumo Frme" on pge 188 cc For detils on writing multiple emroidery designs, refer to "Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines" on pge 246. Trnsferring Dt If the connected emroidery mchine hs een set to Link mode, the commnd [Send to Your Mchine], mentioned in this procedure, cnnot e selected. To select this commnd, return the mchine to norml mode. 1 Plug the USB crd writer module. Insert n originl crd into the USB crd writer module. 2 Click the [Home] t. 202

204 Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines 3 Click [Send] in the [Sew] group, nd then click [Write to Crd]. 4 When the following messge ppers, click [OK]. Trnsferring split emroidery designs Emroidery ptterns for the split ptterns creted on the custom-sized Design Pge re written to crds split into their seprte sections. If the totl size of the pttern exceeds the cpcity of the medi or the mchine's memory or if the pttern is split into over 80 sections with Design Pge size of cm (35.4" 35.4"), you will need to split the pttern nd write the seprte sections onto severl medi. If ll pttern sections cnnot e sved with single opertion, the [Select Hoop Sections] dilog ox ppers. Select pttern sections until the medi ecomes full. Dt trnsfer egins. The following messge ppers while the dt is eing trnsferred. 5 After the dt hs een trnsferred, the following messge ppers, indicting tht the trnsfer is finished. Click [OK]. The crd cpcity indictor t the top of the dilog ox shows the mount of spce ville on the crd (white) nd the mount of spce used y the pttern sections (lue). When pttern section is selected, the totl mount of spce used y the selected pttern sections ppers in lue. If the cpcity is exceeded, the entire crd cpcity indictor ppers in red. To deselect pttern section, click it gin. Click [Write] to write the selected pttern sections to the medi. (The [Write] utton is ville only when pttern section is selected nd there is sufficient spce on the medi for the selected pttern sections.) cc For detils on creting split emroidery designs, refer to "Tutoril 9-1: Creting Split Emroidery Designs" on pge

205 Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer Emroidery designs cn e emroidered y trnsferring the emroidery dt from the computer to one or more emroidery mchines comptile with the Link function. These emroidery designs re emroidered fter the dt is sent from the computer to the emroidery mchine in the sme wy tht document is printed fter the dt is sent from computer to printer. The Link function cn e used only with emroidery mchines comptile with the function; it cnnot e used with other mchines. For detils, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine. The Link function cnnot e used with the following emroidery designs. Size exceeds the re tht cn e emroidered with the mchine Emroidery designs in Design Pge of custom size or for the jumo frme Ptterns for the mm hoop Up to four emroidery mchines cn e connected using the Link function. 1 Crete n emroidery design in [Lyout & Editing]. For detils on connecting the mchines to the computer, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine. If the mchine is positioned fr from the computer, we recommend you to use selfpowered USB hu. Do not use USB extension cles or repeter cles. Do not connect or disconnect the USB cle while the mchine is turned on. Select [Power Options] in [Control Pnel], nd then set oth [System stndy] nd [System hierntes] to [Never]. One or more emroidery mchines cn e connected to PC y using the Link function. Trnsferring Dt 2 Set the emroidery mchine in Link mode. Turn on the Link function of the emroidery mchine, nd then turn off the mchine. For detils on setting the mchine in Link mode, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine. 4 Click the [Home] t. 3 Use the USB cle included with the emroidery mchine to connect the mchine to the computer. Turn on the emroidery mchine. 204

206 Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer 5 Click [Send] in the [Sew] group, nd then click [Link]. 6 After the design hs een trnsferred, press the strt/stop utton on the emroidery mchine to egin emroidering. The trnsferred dt cnnot e edited from the emroidery mchine. The received dt cn only e emroidered. However, emroidering settings cn e specified. When emroidering is strted, the following ppers in the [Link] dilog ox. c Trnsferred design Queue Displys the dt efore it is trnsferred to the emroidery mchine. When the mchine is redy to strt loding the dt, dt trnsfer egins. While the dt is eing trnsferred, messge ppers in the screen of the emroidery mchine, nd the design moves to the trnsferred design re. c Shows the sttus of the emroidery mchine. Ech sttus indiction is descried elow Sttus Redy Witing Description Press the utton on the emroidery mchine (Strt/Stop utton) to strt sewing. If there is no dt in the queue, select [Link] s the destintion in the ppliction, nd send dt. If this is the sttus even though there is dt in the queue, continue the opertion y using the mchine's opertion pnel. If the dt sent from [Lyout & Editing] does not pper in the trnsferred design ox, continue the opertion y using the mchine's opertion pnel. If you wnt to send more thn one design to the [Link] dilog, repet step 4 for ech design. The [Link] dilog will remin open while the selected design from [Lyout & Editing] will e sent to the Link. Sewing Pused Color chnge Check thred Check frme Error The mchine is sewing. The mchine hs temporrily een stopped. Chnge the thred spool on the mchine. Check the oin thred or the upper thred on the mchine. Instll different emroidery frme on the mchine. Check the detils of the error tht occurred on the mchine. 205

207 Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer If multiple designs were sent to single mchine Multiple emroidery designs cn e emroidered fter eing sent to the [Link] dilog ox. In this cse, the dilog ox ppers s shown elow. Design Dtse is ville to send multiple designs t time. cc "Sending emroidery designs to mchines y using the Link function" on pge 250 If multiple emroidery mchines re connected The [Distriutor] dilog ox ppers, in ddition with the [Link] dilog ox for ech emroidery mchine. The designs in the [Distriutor] dilog will ll e selected. Specify which file is to e trnsferred to which mchine. Distriutor dilog ox c With the [Nme Drop] function, you cn lso send multiple designs where only the text is replced. cc "Outputting ptterns using text from the text list" on pge 128 c d e f The following opertions cn e performed from this dilog ox. Moves the selected design(s) to the eginning of the emroidering order. Moves the selected design(s) one position forwrd in the emroidering order. c Moves the selected design(s) one position ckwrd in the emroidering order. d Moves the selected design(s) to the end of the emroidering order. e Automticlly djusts the emroidering order of the designs to reduce s much s possile the numer of thred color chnges. f Deletes the selected design(s) from the [Link] dilog ox. c Selects ll emroidery designs. Deselects the emroidery designs. Deletes the selected emroidery design. (The design is deleted without eing moved to the <Recycle Bin>.) Sending design to the Distriutor dilog for multiple mchines. For multiple designs to e sent, repet Step 5 for ech design. Trnsferring Dt Before the messge "The mchine will move. Keep your hnds etc. wy from the mchine." ppers on the mchine nd [OK] is pressed, the emroidering order of the designs, including the first one, cn e chnged since the first design hs not yet een sent to the mchine. 206

208 Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer 1 Select mchine in the [Mchine Nme] selector, select n emroidery file, nd then click [Send]. Mchine nme 2 Repet step 1 to move ech design to the [Link] dilog ox. The initil mchine nme is the mchine's ID. For detils, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine. The nme of the mchine cn e chnged. For detils, refer to "Chnging the emroidery mchine nme ppering with the Link function" on pge 208 The emroidery designs re moved to the [Link] dilog ox. 207

209 Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer The emroidering order of designs in the queue cn e chnged. cc For detils, refer to "If multiple designs were sent to single mchine" on pge 206. If dditionl mchines re connected while the [Link] dilog ox is displyed, corresponding queues will pper. If mchine is disconnected, the corresponding queue will dispper. To disply the [Property] dilog ox for file, doule-click the file's icon, or click file to select it, right-click it, nd then click [Property] from the menu tht ppers. To reduce this dilog ox to utton on the tskr, click the [Minimize] utton. Chnging the emroidery mchine nme ppering with the Link function 1 Click [Mchine Nme] in the [Option] menu of the queue whose nme is to e chnged. 2 Type the nme in the [Mchine Nme] ox, nd then click [OK]. To disconnect the USB cle, or shut down the computer After dt trnsferring to emroidery mchine nd the trnsferring messge on the screen of the mchine is closed, you cn disconnect the USB cle, or shut down the computer. When connected to the emroidery mchine gin, you cn continue the Link opertion. The emroidery mchine cn finish sewing the design currently eing emroidered even if the computer is turned off. If the emroidery mchine is turned off while it is emroidering, the resume opertion cn e used the next time it is turned on. At tht time, trnsmission cn e resumed using the Link function y clicking [Link] in [Design Dtse] or in the [Option] menu of [Lyout & Editing] to disply the [Link] dilog ox. If the emroidery mchine connection cnnot e detected, the [Link] dilog ox will close utomticlly. To disply the [Link] dilog ox gin fter the computer hs een restrted, click [Link] in [Design Dtse] or in the [Option] menu (in the upper-right corner) of [Lyout & Editing]. To disply the [Distriutor] dilog ox, click [Distriutor] in the [Option] menu of the [Link] dilog ox. A nme (up to 10 lphnumeric chrcters/ symols) cn e specified for the emroidery mchine. When n emroidery mchine is connected to the computer, the emroidery mchine is recognized y the computer s removle disk nd is ssigned drive letter. If this drive letter is the sme s one tht hs lredy een ssigned y the computer, designs cnnot e sent from the computer to tht emroidery mchine. This prolem occurs, for exmple, if network drive hs een ssigned computer drive letter. If this occurs, cncel the ssignment for the drive with the conflicting drive letter. When the numer of emroidery mchines connected to the computer vi USB is incresed, the operting system my require tht the computer e restrted. At tht time, restrt the computer. Trnsferring Dt 208

210 Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer 209

211 Design Center This section descries the sic opertions performed in Design Center. A simple step-ystep procedure is provided to crete n emroidery pttern from templte imge, such s n illustrtion.

212 Bsic Design Center Opertions Bsic Design Center Opertions In Design Center, emroidery ptterns cn e creted from n originl imge. In ddition, you cn specify colors nd sewing ttriutes for the lines nd regions tht re more detiled thn those specified with the [Auto Punch] function in Lyout & Editing. An emroidery design is creted in the following four stges. Step 1 Originl Imge Stge Step 2 Line Imge Stge Step 3 Figure Hndle Stge Step 4 Sew Setting Stge Open n imge file, nd select the colors to e used for creting the outlines. The originl imge is converted to lck-ndwhite line imge. Outlines cn e drwn or ersed. The line imge is converted to figure hndle imge. Points in the figure hndle imge cn e edited to chnge the design. The sew type nd thred colors re specified in the outline to complete the emroidery design. Exmple: The stripes in the scrf re ersed. Stripes re dded to the scrf. Exmple: The eyes re moved, nd the fcil expression is chnged. A str is dded to the til of the plne. Exmple: By pplying colors different thn in the originl imge, the design is given different ppernce. If the dt is sved, work cn e stopped t ech stge, then strted gin. The most pproprite imges to use re those with few nd distinct colors. Imges or photos tht re intricte or hve grdtions re not suitle since it is difficult to extrct their outlines. Line imge dt is sved in the.pel formt, nd figure hndle dt is sved in the.pem formt. The emroidery dt is sved in the.pem formt. To trnsfer.pem dt creted in Design Center to n emroidery mchine, import the pttern into Lyout & Editing, nd then trnsfer the dt to n emroidery mchine. cc "Importing into Lyout & Editing" on pge 220 nd "Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines" on pge 201 This section descries the sic opertions performed in Design Center. For detils on the procedures or settings, refer to "Design Center Window" on pge

213 Bsic Design Center Opertions Step 1 Originl Imge Stge 4 Click. Extrct outlines from n imge 1 Click the down rrow in the ottom-left corner of the [Strt] screen to show the [All Apps] view. 5 Select the desired imge file, nd then click [Open]. 2 Click [Design Center] under the title [Plette Ver.10] in the screen. Airplne imge is locted t: Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10 \Smple\Design Center. Design Center 3 Click. 212

214 Bsic Design Center Opertions 6 In the imge displyed in the [Pick Colors] window, select the colors to e used for the outlines (emroidery lines). The selected color ppers in ox on the right side, nd ppers in the check ox to show tht the color is selected. Step 2 Line Imge Stge Using the Erser 1 To erse line, click [Erser] in the [Tools] group, nd then select tool ccording to the size of the re or thickness of the line to e ersed. 2 Move the pointer over the line to e ersed, nd then click the line or drg the pointer to erse the line. The desired color cn e selected more esily if the [Zoom] slider is used to enlrge the imge. If color other thn tht for the outline ws selected, cler the check ox eside the color to deselect it. 7 After selecting the colors to e used for the outlines, click [OK]. The line imge ppers in the Design Pge. Using the Pen 1 To drw lines, select the [Pen] in the [Tools] group, nd then select tool with the desired thickness of the line to e drwn. 213

215 Bsic Design Center Opertions 2 Drg the pointer to drw line. To dd point, click in the Design Pge. 2 Click [OK]. To drw verticl or horizontl lines, hold down the <Shift> key while moving the pointer. The line imge is converted to figure hndle imge. If lines re drwn or ersed incorrectly, click (Undo utton) to undo the lst opertion. To chnge the disply size, use [Zoom] commnd. The prt of the work re tht is displyed cn esily e chnged y using the [Pn] tool. Step 3 Figure Hndle Stge Design Center Editing the extrcted outline 1 When the line imge is finished, click [To Figure Hndle] in the [Stge] group or (the second icon from the left) in the upperright corner of the screen. Moving outlines 1 Click the [Figure Hndle] t. 2 Click in the [Tools] group, nd then click the outline to e moved Rottion hndle 2 Scle hndles 214

216 Bsic Design Center Opertions 3 Move the pointer over the outline so tht the shpe of the pointer chnges to, nd then drg the outline. Drg hndle to chnge the size or ngle. To delete the outline, press the <Delete> key. 3 Doule-click the end point. Adding lines to the figure hndle imge 1 Click [Input Line] in the [Tools] group. Reshping outlines 1 Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group. 2 Click the strt point (1), nd then click the next point (2). 2 Click n outline. 1 2 A line is drwn connecting the two points. Continue clicking to drw dditionl lines. To remove the lst point tht ws entered, rightclick. To drw verticl or horizontl lines, hold down the <Shift> key while moving the pointer. 1 Point 2 Pink Line To dd point, click the outline (1). To crete corner, drg the point (2)

217 Bsic Design Center Opertions 4 If the point is deleted, the corner is removed. Click the point to e deleted, nd then press the <Delete> key, or click [Delete] in the [Clipord] group. 2 Select point, nd then click [Split t Point] in the [Edit] group to split the line. Connecting lines Two points cn e connected to form line. 5 To chnge the shpe of the line, drg the point. 1 Perform steps 1 nd 2 in "Reshping outlines" to select line. 2 While holding down the <Alt> key, drg the selected point to the other point tht you wnt to connect to it. The shpe of the pointer chnges to, nd red squre ppers when the two points re overlpping. Design Center If multiple points re selected, ll of the points will e moved or deleted. To select dditionl points, hold down the <Ctrl> key nd click ech point, or drg the pointer over the points. 3 Relese the mouse utton to connect the two points. Splitting lines Lines cn e split t point. 1 Perform steps 1 nd 2 in "Reshping outlines" to select line. 216

218 Bsic Design Center Opertions Continuing to the Sew Setting Stge When the figure hndle imge is finished, continue to the Sew Setting Stge. 1 Click [To Sew Setting] in the [Stge] group or in the upper-right corner of the screen. Step 4 Sew Setting Stge We re now going to pply sewing ttriutes to the different prts of the outline to crete the emroidery pttern. Specifying sewing ttriutes 1 Click the [Sew Setting] t. 2 To specify the sew type for the line, click [Line] in the [Tools] group, nd then select the desired tool from [Line Sew Tool]. 1 1 [Line sew type] selector : Click this utton to pply sewing Even fter continuing to the Sew Setting Stge, you cn return to the Figure Hndle Stge to edit the figure hndle imge. ttriutes to the entire outline. : Click this utton to pply sewing ttriutes to portion of the outline. To specify the sew type for the region, click [Region] in the [Tools] group. 1 1 [Region sew type] selector Sewing ttriutes cnnot e pplied to regions if the region is not completely enclosed in n outline in the Figure Hndle Stge. 3 Click. 217

219 Bsic Design Center Opertions 4 Click the desired color. 7 When using, click the region where the sewing ttriutes re to e pplied. 5 Click the down rrow in the sew type selector nd choose the desired sew type. 6 When using or, click the outline where the sewing ttriutes re to e pplied. To chnge the sewing ttriutes, repet steps 1 through 7. Design Center 218

220 Bsic Design Center Opertions Sewing ttriutes for region cnnot e pplied to open regions (regions not fully enclosed in n outline), s shown in the illustrtion elow. From the [Sewing Attriute Setting] dilog ox, detiled settings for ttriutes, such s the width of stin stitches nd the run pitch, cn e specified. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 233. The Reference Window is useful for specifying colors while checking the colors of the originl imge. If ttriutes cnnot e pplied to region, return to the Figure Hndle Stge nd mke sure tht region is closed. Edit ny roken lines with the Edit Point tool. cc "Adding lines to the figure hndle imge" on pge 215 Using the Reference Window This llows you to select colors while checking the colors in the originl imge. 1. Click the [View] t. 2. Select the [Reference Window] check ox in the [Show/Hide] group. 3. Click the [Imge] t. The imge opened in Originl Imge stge ppers. If [Reference] hs een clicked, click [Originl]. 219

221 Bsic Design Center Opertions Step 5 Importing into Lyout & Editing The emroidery pttern creted in Design Center cn e imported into Lyout & Editing. In ddition, the creted dt cn e trnsferred to the mchine using functions in Lyout & Editing. If the sewing ttriutes of n outline or region re not set, the emroidery pttern cnnot e imported. 1 Click the [Sew Setting] t. 2 Click [Send to Lyout & Editing] in the [Stge] group. Lyout & Editing strts up. 3 Select either to import pttern s stitch pttern or s outline pttern. Design Center 4 Specify settings for [Import], [Mgnifiction] nd [Orienttion], nd then click [Import]. For detils on the settings [As Stitches] nd [As Outlines] eside [Import], refer to "Importing emroidery design from Design Center" on pge

222 Design Center Window Design Center Window Appliction utton 2 Rion 3 Quick Access Toolr 4 Stge utton Indictes the current stge. Click to move to different stge. 5 Option utton 6 Help utton 7 Reference Window (cc p. 228) Displys ll outlines nd ptterns in the work re, giving you n overview while you work on detiled re. 8 Design Pge 9 Work re 10 Sttus Br 11 Refresh Window utton cc "Understnding Windows" on pge

223 Originl Imge Stge Originl Imge Stge Using the wizrd This wizrd provides step-y-step guide for creting emroidery ptterns. Click, nd then select [Wizrd] from the commnd list. e f Most Recently Used Files From the list, click the nme of the file, nd then click [Open]. Alwys show Wizrd t Strtup Select this check ox to strt up the wizrd ech time Design Center is strted up. Opening n imge When you click the [From Imge] utton in the [How do you wnt to produce emroidery?] dilog ox, the [From Imge] dilog ox ppers. c d e f c d Open Imge File Clicking this utton tht displys the [Open] dilog ox to select n imge file. cc "Imge file formts" on pge 150 From Clipord Clicking this utton to pste the imge on the Clipord into the Design Pge. This function cn only e used when there is n imge on the Clipord. Design Center From Imge Clicking this utton displys the [From Imge] dilog ox. c From TWAIN Device Clicking this utton to import n imge from TWAIN device (such s scnner) connected to your computer, then pste it in the Design Pge. cc New Line Imge Clicking this utton opens new Design Pge in the Line Imge Stge. "Drwing new line imge freehnd" on pge 225. d Use Current Imge Clicking this utton to use n imge opened in the Originl Imge Stge. This function cn only e used when n imge is opened in the Originl Imge Stge. c New Figure Clicking this utton opens new Design Pge in the Figure Hndle Stge. cc "Drwing new figure hndle imge freehnd" on pge 227. d Open PEM Clicking this utton displys the [Open] dilog ox so tht.pem file cn e selected. 222

224 Originl Imge Stge To import n imge from file TWAIN device Connect the TWAIN device to the computer, nd then click [Imge], then [Open from TWAIN Device], or click [From TWAIN Device] in the [From Imge] dilog ox. When the [Select Source] dilog ox ppers, select device. Next, click [Select]. For informtion on using the driver interfce, refer to the help mnul for tht interfce, or contct the mnufcturer of the interfce. Tips for scnning illustrtions for Design Center If the outline is not cler, trce the outline on trcing pper. Better scnning results my e produced y reducing the tone of the imge. Opening file 1 Click, nd then select [Open] from the commnd list. 2 Select the drive nd the folder. 3 To open file, select it, nd then click [Open], or doule-click the file's icon. If n imge file is selected, the file is opened in the Originl Imge Stge. If.pel file is selected, the file is opened in the Line Imge Stge. If.pem file is selected, the file is opened in the Figure Hndle Stge or the Sew Setting Stge. 223

225 Line Imge Stge Line Imge Stge Extrcting the outlines of n imge 1 In the Originl Imge Stge, click [To Line imge]. When the extrcting color oundries using [Detect Outlines], the colors re converted to line imge s shown elow. cc "Originl Imge Stge" on pge Selecting the colors to e used for the outlines, nd then click [OK]. e g Click [Preview] to preview the line imge in the Design Pge. d f Design Center g c c d e f Zoom slider Use this slider to djust the zoom rtio for displying the imge. Tone slider Use this slider to reduce color tones in imges where it is difficult to select the outline color. Noise reduction slider Use this slider to reduce imge noise (distortions) in imges where the outline is not cler. Click the outline color(s) to convert into lck outlines. Displys the colors selected in d. To deselect color, cler the corresponding check ox. To extrct the color oundries, click [Detect Outlines] check ox. 224

226 Line Imge Stge Drwing new line imge freehnd Click, nd then select [New Line Imges] from the commnd list. Using the Pen nd Erser tools, the line imge cn e drwn freehnd in the Design Pge. cc "Line Imge Stge" on pge 213. In the Line Imge Stge, the file will e sved s.pel file. cc "Sving emroidery ptterns" on pge 237, nd "Drwing new figure hndle imge freehnd" on pge

227 Figure Hndle Stge Figure Hndle Stge Chnging settings for converting to outlines 1 In the Line Imge Stge, click [To Figure Hndle]. ON cc "Line Imge Stge" on pge Specify the desired settings in the [Figure Oject Conversion Setting] dilog ox, nd then click [OK]. To replce the lck lines with figure hndle lines following the order of the outlines, cler the [Thinning Process] check ox. OFF d Select setting under [Resolution]. c e Fine Select this setting only if the imge contins mny smll detils. Norml Select this setting to provide sufficient resolution without mking the file too lrge. Corse Select this setting to keep the file s smll s possile. To replce the lck outlines with figure hndle lines long the center of the outlines, select the [Thinning Process] check ox, nd then use the slider to select the degree of detil. c d e Use the [SIZE] slider to set the size. You will not e le to enlrge the imge eyond the limits of the Design Pge re. If necessry, click [Design Pge Property], nd then chnge the Design Pge size. To crete outline dt from prt of the imge, select the specific re y clicking [Pick Are], then drgging the pointer (+) to drw selection frme round the re to e selected. Design Center When the slider is set to [Much], even very thick lck lines will e replced with line long the center. 226

228 Figure Hndle Stge It my not e possile for outline dt to e creted from n imge when moving from the Line Imge Stge to the Figure Hndle Stge, even fter vrious outline conversion settings hve een specified. If this occurs, return to the Line Imge Stge, nd correct the outlines in the line imge or pply corrections to the imge. Specifying the Design Pge size 1 Click the [Figure Hndle] t. 2 Click [Design Pge Settings] in the [Design Pge] group. Drwing new figure hndle imge freehnd Click, nd then select [New Figure Dt] from the commnd list. 3 Select the Design Pge size, nd then click [OK]. c d In the Figure Hndle Stge, the file will e sved s.pem file. To retrieve dt from sved.pem file, use the commnd [Import Figure] in the [Figure Hndle] t. c d Select mchine type. The settings ville in the [Pge Size] selector differ depending on the mchine type selected here. To djust the Design Pge size ccording to the hoop size, select [Hoop Size], nd then select the desired hoop size from the selector. To specify custom Design Pge size, select [Custom Size], nd then type or select the desired width nd height for the Design Pge. To return to the defult settings, click [Defult]. Do not select hoop size lrger thn the emroidery hoop tht cn e used with your mchine. Do not crete Custom Hoop lrger thn the emroidery hoop tht cn e used with your mchine. 227

229 Figure Hndle Stge Editing outlines Scling outlines Scling numericlly: 1 Select the outline. 2 Click the [Figure Hndle] t. 3 Click [Numericl Setting] in the [Edit] group, nd then select [Size]. Rotting outlines Rotting mnully 1 Select the outline. 2 Move the pointer over the rottion hndle. And then drg. Rotting numericlly 1 Select the outline. 2 Click [Numericl Setting] in the [Edit] group, nd then select [Rotte]. 4 Select size, nd then click [OK]. 3 Type or select the desired rottion ngle, nd then click [OK]. Design Center To chnge the width nd height proportionlly, select the [Mintin spect rtio] check ox. Select whether the width nd height will e set s percentge (%) or dimension (millimeters or inches). Type or select the desired width nd height. An ngle cn lso e selected y drgging the [Rotte] dilog ox. Viewing outlines in the Reference Window in Flipping outlines horizontlly or verticlly 1 Select the outline. 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Select the [Reference Window] check ox in the [Show/Hide] group. 2 Click [Flip Verticlly] or [Flip Horizontlly] in the [Edit] group. 228

230 Figure Hndle Stge Zooming The [Reference Window] cn e switched to disply either the entire Design Pge or only the emroidery pttern. Displying different reference imge 1 Click the [Imge] t. Click the [Pn/Zoom] t, click. Displys the entire Design Pge. 2 Click [Reference], then click. Displys the entire pttern. 3 Select the reference imge, nd then click [Open]. Moving the disply re frme The prt of the outline displyed in the Design Pge cn e selected from the [Reference Window]. 1 Move the pointer over the disply re frme. 2 Drg the disply re frme so tht it surrounds the desired prt of the outline. The selected prt of the outline is displyed in the Design Pge. Redrwing the disply re frme Insted of moving the disply re frme, the frme cn e redrwn to disply the desired prt of the outline in the Design Pge. Click the re to e displyed, or drg the pointer over the desired prt of the outline in the [Reference Window]. 229

231 Figure Hndle Stge Chnging the ckground imge Chnging the disply of the ckground imge 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Drg the slider, or click or in the [Templte] group. Hide (off) 50% 100% Chnging ppliction settings Chnging the grid settings 1 Click the [View] t. 25% 75% Press the shortcut key <F6> to switch etween displying the imge (On (100%)) to displying it fded t ech density (75%, 50% nd 25%) to hiding the imge (Off). 2 Specify the grid settings in the [Grid] group. Design Center Chnging the size nd position of the ckground imge 1 Select the templte. Click [Modify Templte] in the [Templte] group. 2 Drg the templte imge to move it to the desired loction. Drg hndle to enlrge or reduce the size of the templte imge. c To disply the grid, select the [Show Grid] check ox. To hide the grid, cler the [Show Grid] check ox. To disply the grid s solid lines, select the [with Axes] check ox. To disply the grid s dots (intersecting points of the grid), cler the [with Axes] check ox. To set the grid spcing, type or select vlue in the [Intervl] ox. Chnging the mesurement units Click [Option], then [Options], then [System Unit], nd then select the desired mesurement units ([mm] or [inch]). cc "System unit" on pge 20 c 230

232 Sew Setting Stge Sew Setting Stge 1 In the Figure Hndle Stge, click [To Figure Hndle] to disply the [Stge] group. 4 Click the enclosed region to pply the sewing ttriutes. 2 Click [To Sew Setting] in the [Stge] group. In the Sew Setting Stge, the colors of the Design Pge nd ckground cn e chnged from the [Design Settings] dilog ox (displyed y clicking the [Option] menu, nd then selecting [Design Pge Settings].) 1 1 Mrching lines If the ttriutes cnnot e pplied to region, go ck to the Figure Hndle Stge nd mke sure tht region is closed. Edit ny roken lines with the Edit Point tool. Setting region/line sewing Region sewing 1 Click the [Sew Setting] t. 2 Click [Region] in the [Tools] group. Although region my seem closed, if the sewing ttriutes cnnot e specified for the region, the region my not ctully e closed. To find the opening in the region, use the line drwing mode in the Figure Hndle Stge to divide the region into smller regions, nd then check which region sewing ttriutes cnnot e pplied to in the Sew Setting Stge. 3 If necessry, chnge the color nd sew type. cc "Sewing ttriutes" on pge

233 Sew Setting Stge Line sewing 1 Click [Line] in the [Tools] group, nd then select the desired tool ( or ) from [Line Sew Tool]. Sewing ttriutes The Sew pne on the [Sew setting] t, ville in the Sew Setting Stge, llows you to set the color nd sew type of region nd outlines. The sewing ttriutes tht re ville depend on the tool selected. Exmple 1: When is selected 2 If necessry, chnge the color nd sew type. cc "Sewing ttriutes" on pge Click the outline to pply the sewing ttriutes Region color utton 2 Region sew type selector Exmple 2: When or is selected Line color utton 2 Line sew type selector 1 Sew type 1 Click in sew type selector. 2 Click the desired sew type. Line sew type Region sew type Design Center 1 Mrching lines When is selected, settings re pplied only to portion of the clicked outline. 3 Click the region or line to pply the sew type setting. To turn off sewing, select [Not Sewn (Line)] from the [Line sew type] selector or [Not Sewn (Region)] from the [Region sew type] selector. If the sewing hs een turned off, the regions pper in white or the lines pper s dotted lines. 232

234 Sew Setting Stge Specifying sewing ttriutes 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Select the [Sewing Attriutes] check ox in the [Show/Hide] group to disply the [Sewing Attriutes] dilog ox. For region sewing Beginner mode Expert mode c cc d e To Expert mode/to Beginner mode Click to switch the mode. Click to lod/sve the sewing settings. "Sving frequently used sewing ttriutes" on pge 192 Hide Hint/Show Hint Click to switch etween displying nd hiding the hint view With ech chnge in the sewing ttriutes, preview of the stitching cn e checked here. 1 Chnge the sewing ttriutes displyed under [Line sew] or [Region sew]. cc For detils on the different sewing ttriutes nd settings, refer to "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 325 nd "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge When the line sewing ttriutes re displyed, click n outline to pply the line sewing ttriutes to the outline. When the region sewing ttriutes re displyed, click region to pply the region sewing ttriutes to the region. e d c e d c For line sewing Beginner mode Expert mode Sving frequently used sewing ttriutes Frequently used sewing ttriutes cn e sved together, nd reclled when specifying sewing ttriutes. Perform this opertion in the sme wy tht it is performed in Lyout & Editing. cc For detils, refer to "Sving frequently used sewing ttriutes" on pge 192 Color 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Select the [Sewing Attriutes] check ox in the [Show/Hide] group to disply the [Sewing Attriutes] dilog ox. 3 Click the [Color] t. e d c e d c Click to return to the defult setting. 233

235 Sew Setting Stge 4 From the [Thred Chrt] selector, select thred color chrt or user thred chrt. 2 Specify the desired settings in the [Grdtion Pttern Setting] dilog ox, nd then click [OK]. c c To select preset grdtion pttern, click the desired pttern under [Select pttern]. Move the sliders to djust the density of the grdtion pttern. The preview re shows the setting chnges tht you mke. 5 From the list of thred colors, click the desired color. cc For detils on the four uttons under the list, refer to "Specil colors" on pge 48 6 Click the region or outline to pply the color setting. Creting grdtion The density of the color cn e djusted t vrious loctions to crete custom grdtion pttern. Grdtion cn e specified if stin stitches, fill stitches or progrmmle fill stitches hve een selected for the region sewing nd [Mnul] hs een selected s the sewing direction. An dditionl color (used for lending in Lyout & Editing) cnnot e specified with the grdtion setting in Design Center. Design Center 1 In Expert mode of the [Sewing Attriute Setting] dilog ox, select the [Grdtion] check ox, nd then click [Pttern]. Applying effects to concentric circle nd rdil stitches In order to increse the decortive effect, you cn move the center point of regions set to the concentric circle stitch or rdil stitch. 1 Click the [Sew Setting] t. 2 Click [Region] in the [Tools] group. 3 Select the desired color nd sew type ([Concentric Circle Stitch] or [Rdil Stitch]). 234

236 Sew Setting Stge 4 Click the region. The center point ( ) ppers. 5 Drg the center point to the desired loction. Preventing overlpping stitching of regions (hole sewing) By specifying hole sewing, the stitching in overlpping regions will not e sewn twice. Hole sewing cn e set only when one region completely encloses nother. 1 Click the [Sew Setting] t. 2 Click [Hole Sew] in the [Tools] group. 3 Click the region tht completely encloses nother region. 4 Click [OK] to set hole sewing. To move the center point lter, click, nd then right click the region with the concentric circle stitch or rdil stitch pplied. The center point ppers nd cn e moved. 235

237 Sew Setting Stge To cncel hole sewing, click the white inner region. The inner region will e sewn twice when it ppers in the sme color s the outer region. Checking nd editing the sewing order 1 Click the [Sew Setting] t. 2 Click [Sewing Order] in the [Check Design] group. 3 To chnge the sewing order of color, select the frme for the color, nd then drg the frme to the desired position. Applying stmps Stmps cn e pplied to regions in the Sew Setting Stge of Design Center. 1 Click the [Sew Setting] t. 2 Click [Stmp] in the [Tools] group, nd then select the desired tool from [Stmp Tools]. To select dditionl frmes, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key nd select ech frme. The frmes contining regions re seprted from the frmes contining outlines with thick verticl line. Frmes from one side of the line cnnot e moved to the other side. To enlrge the pttern for etter viewing, click. Design Center : Click this utton to pply stmp. : Click this utton to edit the pplied stmp. Settings for stmps re specified in the sme wy tht they re in Lyout & Editing. 4 To view the sewing order of multiple ptterns of the sme color, select the frme, nd then click the [Prt] t. cc "Applying nd editing stmps" on pge 58 Some stmp ptterns re provided with this ppliction; however, y using Progrmmle Stitch Cretor, you cn edit the ptterns tht re provided or you cn crete your own. 5 To chnge the sewing order of pttern, select the frme for the pttern, nd then drg the frme to the desired position. 6 Click [OK]. 236

238 Sew Setting Stge Checking the stitching in the Stitch Simultor 1 Click the [Sew Setting] t. 2 Click [Stitch Simultor] in the [Check Design] group to view stitching using the stitch simultor. Sving emroidery ptterns The file cn e sved t ech stge. Overwriting Click, nd then select [Sve] from the commnd list. The sic opertions re the sme s those descried for Lyout & Editing. cc "Checking the stitching with the Stitch Simultor" on pge 80 Viewing emroidery ptterns in the Reference Window Emroidery ptterns cn e viewed in the Reference Window in the Sew Setting Stge in the sme wy tht they re in the Figure Hndle Stge. cc "Viewing outlines in the Reference Window" on pge 228. Sving with new nme 1 Click, nd then select [Sve As] from the commnd list. 2 Select the drive nd the folder, nd then type in the file nme. 237

239 Sew Setting Stge 3 Click [Sve]. Imge dt from the Originl Imge Stge cn e sved s itmp file (.mp). In the Line Imge Stge, imge dt is sved s.pel file. In the Figure Hndle Stge nd the Sew Setting Stge, pttern dt is sved s.pem file. If you select file type of previous softwre version, sved.pem files cn e opened with tht version of the softwre; however, some informtion my e lost. Design Center 238

240 Sew Setting Stge 239

241 Design Dtse Using Design Dtse, the creted emroidery dt cn e mnged. In ddition, while viewing imges of the file contents, the files cn e orgnized, or multiple emroidery designs cn e trnsferred to emroidery mchines.

242 Design Dtse Window Design Dtse Window Toolr 2 Folder pne 3 Contents pne Displys thumnils of ll emroidery design in the selected folder. 4 Crd reding utton Reds n originl crd. 5 Folder content disply utton Displys the folder contents. 6 Send to selector Select where the emroidery files will e written or sent. 7 Write utton Begins writing the selected designs (displyed in the writing list). 8 Remove utton Returns the selected design (displyed in the writing list) to the unselected stte. 9 Writing list Displys the list of designs to e written to the originl crd, USB medi or emroidery mchine. 10 Add utton Adds the design selected in the contents pne to the writing/trnsfer list. 11 Writing ox disply/non-disply utton Click when writing/trnsferring designs. Click this utton to hide or disply the Writing list. Settings for the following cn e selected from the Option menu. Select mm or inch s the system units. Select Blue, Blck, Silver or Aqu s the ppliction color. 241

243 Strting Up Design Dtse Strting Up Design Dtse 1 Click the down rrow in the ottom-left corner of the [Strt] screen to show the [All Apps] view. 2 Click [Design Dtse] under the title [Plette Ver.10] in the screen. 3 Click folder in the folder pne. All emroidery files in the folder re displyed in the contents pne on the right. The displyed files hve the following extensions..pes,.phc,.dst,.exp,.pcs,.hus,.vip,.shv,.jef,.sew,.csd,.xxx.pem files re not displyed since they cnnot e red y the mchine. Import the emroidery design into Lyout & Editing from Design Center, nd then sve it s.pes file. Zipped file cn not e red in this ppliction. cc "Importing into Lyout & Editing" on pge 220 Design Dtse 242

244 Orgnizing Emroidery Designs Orgnizing Emroidery Designs Creting new folders 1 In the folder pne, on the left, select the folder. 2 Click [File], then [Crete New Folder]. To copy the file from one folder to nother on the sme drive, hold down the <Ctrl> key while drgging the emroidery design. To move the file from one folder to nother on different drives, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging the emroidery design. The file cn lso e removed from the current folder (or copied) y selecting the menu commnd [Edit] - [Cut] (or [Edit] - [Copy]). Then, the file cn e dded to the new folder y selecting it in the folder pne, then selecting the menu commnd [Edit] - [Pste]. Chnging file nmes 3 Type in the nme of the new folder, nd then press the <Enter> key. Moving/copying files to different folder 1 In the folder pne, locte the folder where you wnt to move the emroidery design. 2 In the folder pne, click the folder tht contins the emroidery design. 3 Drg the emroidery design in the contents pne to the folder you previously locted in the folder pne. The nmes of emroidery designs cn e chnged from Design Dtse only when the sewing informtion (menu commnd [Disply] [Detils]) is displyed. cc "Chnging how files re displyed" on pge In the folder pne, select the folder contining the emroidery design. 2 Select the emroidery design. Then click gin. 3 Type in the new nme of the emroidery design, nd then press the <Enter> key. If the two folders re on the sme drive, the selected emroidery design is moved to the other folder. If the two folders re on seprte drives, the selected emroidery design is copied into the other folder. When renming file, the file extension cnnot e chnged. 243

245 Orgnizing Emroidery Designs Deleting files 1 In the folder pne, select the folder contining the emroidery design tht you wnt to delete. Smll Thumnils Click or click [Disply], then [Smll Thumnils]. 2 In the contents pne, select the nme of the emroidery design. 3 Press the <Delete> key. The file is moved to the Recycle Bin. Chnging how files re displyed The emroidery designs in the contents pne cn e displyed s lrge thumnils or smll thumnils, or they cn e listed y their sewing informtion. Lrge Thumnils Click Thumnils]. or click [Disply], then [Lrge Sewing informtion Click or click [Disply], then [Detils]. Design Dtse 244

246 Opening Emroidery Designs Opening Emroidery Designs Opening files with Lyout & Editing 1 In the folder pne, select the folder contining the emroidery design tht you wnt to open in Lyout & Editing. Be sure to select folder tht contins.pes files. 2 In the contents pne, select the.pes file. 3 Click [File], then [Open in Lyout & Editing]. Importing files into Lyout & Editing Files in the following formts cn e imported..pes,.phc,.dst,.exp,.pcs,.hus,.vip,.shv,.jef,.sew,.csd, or.xxx 1 In the folder pne, select the folder contining the emroidery design tht you wnt to import into Lyout & Editing. 2 In the contents pne, select the emroidery design. 3 Click [File], then [Import Into Lyout & Editing]. The selected emroidery design ppers in the Lyout & Editing window. 245

247 Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines The procedures for trnsferring the creted emroidery design to n emroidery mchine differ depending on your emroidery mchine model. For detil, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine. Trnsferring to mchine y using USB medi/usb cle/originl crd 2 Click. 1 Prepre the medi to e used to mke the trnsfer, or connect n emroidery mchine to the computer. Be sure tht the hoop size of the design does not exceed the hoop tht will e used on the emroidering mchine. If the design is to e written to n originl crd, insert the originl crd into the USB crd writer module. If the design is to e written to USB medi, plug the USB medi into the computer. If the design is to e trnsferred directly to n emroidery mchine, connect the emroidery mchine to the computer. For detils on trnsferring design, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine. In order to use the Link function to trnsfer emroidery designs, n emroidery mchine comptile with the Link function must e running in Link mode. cc "Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer" on pge Contents pne (Aville designs) 2 Writing list (Selected designs) Design Dtse 246

248 Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines 3 Click the [Send To] selector, nd then click the destintion. Using USB medi Designs cn e trnsferred to n emroidery mchine comptile with the USB Host function. The "Plette Softwre Key" cnnot e used s USB medi. 4. Select from the [Send To] selector. If multiple USB medi re connected, for ech connected device ppers. Select the USB medi where the design is to e written. c d c d Sends designs to the USB medi. Sends designs directly to n emroidery mchine. Sends designs to the USB crd writer. Sends designs to emroidery mchine(s) y using the Link function. If Link is not ville in the [Send To] selector, check tht the emroidery mchine is running in Link mode nd tht the cle is correctly connected. 5 Click. 6 Select folder in, select n emroidery file from the contents pne, nd then click to dd the file to the writing list. After ll emroidery files to e written re dded to the writing list, click. d c cc "Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer" on pge 204 The remining steps differ depending on the destintion where the dt is to e sent. The designs in the writing list re written to the USB medi. When the designs hve een written, the messge "Finished outputting dt." ppers. 247

249 Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines Do not remove the USB medi while designs re eing written. If there is lredy file with the sme nme t the destintion, the following dilog ox ppers. Select whether to overwrite the existing file, to stop copying or to copy the file using different nme. Trnsferring directly to mchine's memory Designs cn e trnsferred to emroidery mchines tht cn e connected to computer using USB cle. 4. Select from the [Send To] selector. If multiple emroidery mchines re connected, for ech mchine ppers. Select the mchine to e used to emroider. 5 Click. If volume lel hs een specified for the USB medi, " [(Drive Letter):] (Volume Lel)" ppers in the [Send To] selector. If volume lel hs not een specified, " [(Drive Letter):] USB Medi" ppers. For detils on chnging the nme (volume lel) for the USB medi, refer to the mnul provided with the USB medi. 6 Select folder in, select n emroidery file from the contents pne, nd then click to dd the file to the writing list. After ll emroidery files to e written re dded to the writing list, click. d c The designs in the writing list re written to the emroidery mchine's memory. When the designs hve een written, the messge "Finished outputting dt." ppers. Design Dtse Do not remove the USB cle while designs re eing written. If there is lredy file with the sme nme t the destintion, dilog ox ppers. Select whether to overwrite the existing file, to stop copying or to copy the file using different nme. 248

250 Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines Using n originl crd Designs cn e trnsferred to n emroidery mchine equipped with crd slot. Files other thn.phc files cn e written. If no USB crd writer module is connected to the computer, n originl crd cnnot e selected s the output destintion. Before trnsferring, mke sure tht USB crd writer module is connected to the computer. 4. Select from the [Send To] selector. 5 Under [Mchine Type], select the type of emroidery mchine to e used. d An emroidery design for the jumo frme cnnot e trnsferred to the mchine y using n originl crd. If the pttern in the selected emroidery file is lrger thn the hoop size selected in step 6, or the numer of stitches or numer of colors for the pttern exceeds the mximum for the hoop selected in step 6, tht file cnnot e dded to the writing list. Only the emroidery designs displyed in the writing list will e written to the originl crd. c Single-needle mchine Multi-needle mchine 6 From the [Hoop Size] selector, select the pproprite size of emroidery hoop. Do not select hoop size lrger thn the emroidery hoop tht cn e used with your emroidery mchine. Otherwise, the creted originl crd will not work correctly with the emroidery mchine. When writing to n originl crd tht lredy contins dt, ll dt on the crd will e deleted. Before writing to crd, sve ll necessry dt to hrd disk or other medi, nd check tht no necessry dt remins on the crd. cc "From n originl crd" on pge 92 7 Click. 8 Select folder in, select n emroidery file from the contents pne, nd then click to dd the file to the writing list. After ll emroidery files to e written re dded to the writing list, click. Emroidery files cn lso e dded to the writing list y right-clicking the file, then clicking [Add to Writing List], or y selecting file in the contents pne nd drgging it to the writing list. A file cn lso e removed from the writing list y right-clicking it in the writing list, then clicking [Remove from Writing List]. 9 If the files re to e written to n originl crd, the following messge ppers. Click [OK]. Do not remove the crd or unplug the USB cle while designs re eing written to the crd (while the LED indictor is flshing). 249

251 Trnsferring Emroidery Designs to Mchines 10 When messge ppers, indicting tht writing is finished, click [OK]. Ptterns creted on custom-sized Design Pge re written to crds split into their vrious hoop sections. cc Note of "Trnsferring to mchine y using n originl crd" on pge 202 To rewrite the emroidery files written on the originl crd, click to select those files, nd move files to the writing list in the sme mnner. To check the emroidery design file eing written to the originl crd, click. Sending emroidery designs to mchines y using the Link function An emroidery mchine comptile with the Link function must e running in Link mode. cc "Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer" on pge Select from the [Send To] selector. 5 Click. 6 Select folder in, select n emroidery file from the contents pne, nd then click. ppers in the folder pne, nd ll emroidery designs written to the originl crd pper in the contents pne. c Emroidery designs written to the originl crd pper s [Crd Dt] in the contents pne. To disply the contents of the folder in the contents pne, click. Switch the disply y clicking nd. 7 Continue the procedure s descried in Step 5 of "Using the Link Function to Emroider From the Computer" on pge 205. Files in the.dst,.exp nd.phc formts cnnot e trnsferred with the Link function. When [Link] is selected in the [Send To] ox,.dst,.exp nd.phc files do not pper in the contents pne. In ddition, emroidery files with the Design Pge size set to [Custom Size] or with [Hoop Size] set to mm (Jumo Frme) do not pper in the contents pne. Design Dtse To disply the [Link] dilog ox gin fter the computer hs een restrted, click [Link] in the [Option] menu. 250

252 Serching for n Emroidery Design Serching for n Emroidery Design 1 In the folder pne, select the folder. 2 Click [File], then [Serch]. h Dte Modified In the oxes, type the modifiction dte rnge (from when to when). 3 Specify the serch conditions. Select the check ox of the serch conditions to e specified. c d e f g h n c d e f g File Nme Select to serch for files with specific file nme. Type the file nme in the ox. Wildcrd chrcters ("?" to represent single chrcter nd " " to represent multiple chrcters) cn lso e used. i j k l m Formt Select the check ox eside the desired file formt. Stitch Count In the oxes, type the lower nd upper limits of the rnge for the numer of stitches. Color Chnges In the oxes, type the lower nd upper limits of the rnge for the numer of color chnges. Totl Colors In the oxes, type the lower nd upper limits of the rnge for the totl numer of thred colors. Width In the oxes, type the lower nd upper limits of the width rnge. Height In the oxes, type the lower nd upper limits of the height rnge. i j k l m When serching for.pes files, the following conditions cn lso e specified. Design Nme Type the design nme in the ox. Ctegory In the ox, type specific chrcters or the emroidery ctegory. Author In the ox, type the uthor's nme to e serched for. Keywords In the ox, type the keyword to e serched for. Comment In the ox, type the comment to e serched for. To lso serch through the sufolders (folders within the selected folder), select the [Serch sufolders] n check ox. All chrcters entered in the ox eside [File Nme] will e considered s single set of chrcters. However, you cn serch for files mtching multiple words in the oxes elow [Serch Conditions (only for PES files)] y seprting the words with spce. 4 Click [Serch]. A list of files mtching the specified serch conditions ppers. 251

253 Converting Emroidery Design Files to Different Formts Converting Emroidery Design Files to Different Formts Emroidery design files cn esily e converted to file of one of the other formts (.pes,.dst,.exp,.pcs,.hus,.vip,.shv,.jef,.sew,.csd, or.xxx). 1 In the folder pne, select the folder contining the emroidery design tht you wnt to convert. 2 In the contents pne, select the emroidery desired formt. 3 Click [File], then [Convert Formt]. 4 From the [Formt Type] selector, select the desired formt. 6 Click [Convert]. The file is converted, nd the new file is dded to the specified folder. With [DST Settings] on the [Option] menu, the numer of jumps for thred trimming cn e specified for.dst files. cc "Specifying the numer of jumps in emroidery design of the DST formt" on pge Under [Output To], select whether the new file is dded to the sme folder s the originl file (Sme folder) or to specified folder (Following folder). To chnge the folder where the new file will e dded, click. If multiple files with different formts re selected to e converted while [Sme folder] is selected, ny file with the sme formt s the new one will not e converted. However, if the files re eing dded to different folder thn the originl one, ny file with the sme formt s the new one will e copied to the different folder, insted of eing converted. If the file is converted to.pes file, the thred colors re converted s if the file ws imported into Lyout & Editing. Files cnnot e converted to the.phc formt. Design Dtse 252

254 Checking Emroidery Designs Checking Emroidery Designs Previewing files Toolr utton: 1 Select folder in, select n emroidery file from the contents pne. Checking file informtion Sewing informtion such s the file nme, size, stitch count, sewing time, color count nd modifiction dte cn e checked in the Property dilog ox. With.pes file, dditionl informtion out the emroidery design cn e viewed. The displyed sewing time is n estimte. The ctul sewing time depends on the mchine model used nd the specified settings. Toolr utton: 1 In the contents pne, select the emroidery design corresponding to the informtion tht you wnt to view. 2 Click, or click [Disply] menu, then [Preview]. 2 Click, or click [Disply] menu, then [Property]. PES files (version 4.0 or lter) Select [Color chnges] eside [Color List] to disply the thred color chnge informtion in the color list. Select [Totl colors] to disply the informtion for ll thred colors in the color list. cc "Checking emroidery design informtion" on pge

255 Checking Emroidery Designs Non-PES files nd PES files (version 3.0 or erlier) If the Design Pge size ws set to [Custom Size] or if [Hoop Size] ws set to multiposition hoop ( mm or mm) or jumo frme ( mm), [Property] dilog ox similr to the one shown elow ppers. Design Dtse The red ox in the dilog ox shows the position of the displyed pttern section. To disply informtion for other hoop positions, click or. 254

256 Outputting Ctlog of Emroidery Designs Outputting Ctlog of Emroidery Designs Imges nd sewing informtion for ll emroidery designs cn e outputted in numer of formts. Select mong the following modes ccording to your preferences. Printing Imges of ll emroidery designs in the selected folder cn e printed s ctlog or s n instruction guide. 4 Select [Color List] c. Color chnges The thred color informtion for ech color chnge is displyed. Totl colors The thred color informtion for the necessry threds is displyed. This llows you to check the totl numer of thred colors. cc "Checking emroidery design informtion" on pge 88 5 Select [Print Lyout] d. Ctlog style 1 Ctlog style 4 1 In the folder pne, select the folder contining the emroidery designs. 2 Click [File], then [Print Setup]. 3 Under [Pper] nd [Orienttion], select the pproprite settings. Ctlog style 12 Instruction Guide style c d e 6 Under [Color Description] e, select whether the thred colors pper s the nme of the color or s the rnd nd thred numer. 7 Click [Print]. 255

257 Outputting Ctlog of Emroidery Designs If one or more emroidery designs were selected in the contents pne, only the selected designs re printed. If the rnd nme, thred numer or file properties is too long, some of the text my not e printed. If [File], then [Print] is clicked, the emroidery designs re printed ccording to the settings lredy selected in the [Print Setup] dilog ox. Outputting s n HTML file Outputting s CSV file A.csv file contining the sewing informtion (file nme, dimensions, numer of stitches, numer of colors, file pth, file properties (.pes files only) nd the nmes of thred colors nd thred numers) for selected emroidery designs cn e outputted. 1 In the folder pne, select the folder contining the emroidery designs. 2 Click [File], then [Crete CSV]. 3 Select the drive nd the folder, nd then type in the nme of the.csv file. Insted of eing printed, the ctlog of emroidery designs cn e outputted s n HTML file. 1 In the folder pne, select the folder contining the emroidery designs. 2 Click [File], then [Crete HTML]. 3 Select the drive nd the folder, nd then type in the nme of the HTML file. 4 Click [Sve]. Design Dtse 4 To dd title t the top of the file nd in the title r, type the title in the [Pge Title] ox. 5 Under [Pge Lyout], select how the designs pper on the pge. 6 Click [Sve]. 256

258 Outputting Ctlog of Emroidery Designs 257

259 Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Progrmmle Stitch Cretor llows you to crete nd edit stitch ptterns, which cn then e used s progrmmle fill stitches or motif stitches in oth Lyout & Editing nd Design Center.

260 Bsic Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Opertions Bsic Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Opertions Progrmmle Stitch Cretor is n ppliction for creting, editing nd sving stitch ptterns tht cn e used for progrmmle fill stitch or motif stitch sewing. The following two types of ptterns cn e creted in their corresponding mode. Fill/stmp stitch ptterns These ptterns cn e used s stmp ptterns nd for sewing with the progrmmle fill stitch in Lyout & Editing or Design Center. These ptterns cn e creted with single line or with multiple lines. In ddition, these ptterns cn e used to crete n emossing/engrving effect in sewn regions. These ptterns re creted in Fill/Stmp mode. engrve emoss Motif stitch ptterns These ptterns cn e used for sewing lines with the motif stitch nd for sewing regions with the motif stitch, piping stitch nd stippling stitch in Lyout & Editing or Design Center. These ptterns re creted with single line, which gives the look of single-stroke drwing, nd they re used for decortive mchine sewing. These ptterns re creted in Motif mode. 259

261 Creting Fill/Stmp Stitch Pttern Creting Fill/Stmp Stitch Pttern Existing progrmmle stitch ptterns cn e edited to crete new ptterns. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Opening fill/stmp stitch pttern Drwing lines to edit the fill/stmp stitch pttern Applying emossing/engrving effects to the fill/stmp stitch pttern Sving the edited fill/stmp stitch pttern Using the edited fill/stmp stitch ptterns in Lyout & Editing Step 1 Opening fill/stmp stitch pttern First, we will open fill/stmp stitch pttern to e edited. In this exmple, we will use pttern wve1.ps. 1 Click the down rrow in the ottom-left corner of the [Strt] screen to show the [All Apps] view. 4 Select Fill/Stmp File(*.PAS) in the Files of type selector. Select the pttern file wve1.ps. Progrmmle Stitch Cretor 2 Click [Progrmmle stitch Cretor] under the title [Plette Ver.10] in the screen. 3 Click, nd then select [Open] from the commnd list. The pttern file cn e found t the following loction. For exmple, (Drive where Plette ws instlled)\progrm Files (Progrm Files (x86))\by lock\plette Ver.10\Pttern. To view the dt in the selected folder s thumnils in the [Browse] dilog ox, click [Browse]. 260

262 Creting Fill/Stmp Stitch Pttern Step 2 Drwing lines to edit the fill/stmp stitch pttern 5 Repet the previous opertions. 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Drw Line] in the [Tools] group. 3 Click points (1) through (4) Step 3 Applying emossing/ engrving effects to the fill/stmp stitch pttern 1 Click (1), nd then doule-click (2). Next, click (3), nd then doule-click (4). 1 2 To remove the lst point tht ws entered, rightclick the mouse utton. cc "Reshping fill/stmp stitch ptterns" on pge 264 The grid width cn e chnged. cc "Chnging the grid settings" on pge Doule-click (5) (end point). 4 3 Lines re drwn long the top nd ottom edges of the Design Pge. In order to crete n effect, the lines must form closed region

263 Creting Fill/Stmp Stitch Pttern 2 Click [Region (engrve)] in the [Tools] group, nd then click the first nd fourth wve regions. To remove the emossing/engrving effect, use the [Region (reset)] tool. Click [Region (reset)] in the [Tools] group, nd then click region with n effect pplied. These regions pper in red nd will e sewn with short stitches to give the effect of engrving. 3 Click [Region (emoss)] in the [Tools] group, nd then click the second nd fifth wve regions. Step 4 Sving the edited fill/ stmp stitch pttern Fill/stmp stitch ptterns re sved in the.ps formt. 1 Click, nd then select [Sve As] from the commnd list. Progrmmle Stitch Cretor 2 Select the drive nd the folder, nd then type in the file nme. This region ppers in lue nd will e sewn with no dropped stitches to give the effect of emossing. When sving fill/stmp pttern, specify the size eside [Defult Size]. Click [mm] or [inch] to select the mesurement units. 3 Click [Sve]. 262

264 Creting Fill/Stmp Stitch Pttern Step 5 Using the edited fill/stmp stitch ptterns in Lyout & Editing 1 Strt up Lyout & Editing. 7 Click the edited fill/stmp stitch pttern, nd then click [OK]. The pttern is pplied to the inside regions of the emroidery pttern. 2 Select n emroidery pttern. 3 From the [Region sew type] selector (in the [Shpes] t), select [Prog. Fill Stitch]. 4 Disply the [Sewing Attriutes] pne. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 5 Click elow [Progrmmle fill] in the [Region sew] section. A fill/stmp stitch pttern cn lso e pplied s stmp y using the Stmp Tools. cc "Applying nd editing stmps" on pge 58 For est results, refer to "Notes on progrmmle fill stitches nd stmps" on pge Select the drive nd folder where the pttern ws sved in Step

265 Editing Pttern in Fill/Stmp Mode Editing Pttern in Fill/Stmp Mode Selecting ptterns 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Select] in the [Tools] group to use the [Select] tool. 3 Click the pttern. Scling ptterns Drg hndle of the selected pttern to djust its size. Drg the rottion hndle to rotte the pttern. If the <Shift> key is held down while hndle is drgged, the pttern is enlrged or reduced from the center of the pttern. Click [Flip Verticlly] in the [Flip] group to flip the selected pttern(s) up/down. Click [Flip Horizontlly] in the [Flip] group to flip the selected pttern(s) left/right. 1 Rottion hndle 2 Hndles 4 To select n dditionl pttern, hold down the <Ctrl> key nd click the other pttern. 1 2 You cn lso select ptterns y drgging the pointer cross the pttern. Hold down the <Ctrl> key nd click selected pttern to deselect it. Using commnds other thn those mentioned ove, selected ptterns cn e edited in other wys, for exmple, duplicted or deleted. cc "Menus/Tools" of "Progrmmle Stitch Cretor" on pge 317. Reshping fill/stmp stitch ptterns 1 Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group. Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Moving ptterns Selected ptterns cn e drgged to move them. To move the pttern horizontlly or verticlly, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging it. Pressing the rrow keys moves the selected pttern one grid mrk in the direction of the rrow on the key. 2 Click the roken line. 264

266 Editing Pttern in Fill/Stmp Mode 3 To edit point, click the point to select it. : Selected point : Unselected point To move the point, drg it to the new loction. To insert point, click the line to dd new point. A new point ppers selected. To delete the point, click or press the <Delete> key. If line is composed of two points nd you delete one of them, the entire line is deleted. To select multiple points, hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the points, or drgging the pointer over the points. Hold down the <Ctrl> key while pressing the key or key. The selection direction chnges to the end or strt point. Hold down the <Shift> key while drgging the points. The points re moved horizontlly or verticlly. Press n rrow key. The points move in the direction of the rrow on the key. 265

267 Creting Motif Stitch Pttern Creting Motif Stitch Pttern Now, we will crete new motif stitch pttern. Motif stitch ptterns re creted in Motif mode. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Enter motif mode 1 Strt up Progrmmle Stitch Cretor. 2 Click, nd then select [New Motif Pttern] from the commnd list. Enter motif mode Shping single line to crete motif stitch pttern Sving the creted motif stitch pttern Using the edited motif stitch pttern in Lyout & Editing 2 Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group. Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Step 2 Shping single line to crete motif stitch pttern In Motif mode, you cn crete originl ptterns y chnging the shpe of single line. 1 Click the [Home] t. Blue squre: Strt point Red squre: End point 3 Select (1), then drg the point. The line tht moves turns green when moving point

268 Creting Motif Stitch Pttern 4 Click the line to insert points. Click (3) locted etween (1) nd (2). Click (4) locted etween (3) nd (2). 7 Click (6) locted etween (4) nd (5), then drg the point to (1). Select (3), then drg the point to (2) Select (4), then drg the point. 4 6 Click etween (2) nd (4) to insert point (5), nd then drg point (5) To move the point horizontlly or verticlly, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging it. Pressing the rrow keys moves the selected point one grid mrk in the direction of the rrow on the key. If the grid is not displyed, the pttern moves distnce smller thn the smllest grid intervl in the direction of the rrow on the key. To delete selected point, press the <Delete> key. These ptterns cn e pplied in line sewing nd region sewing in Lyout & Editing, nd region sewing in Design Center. 267

269 Creting Motif Stitch Pttern Step 3 Sving the creted motif stitch pttern 5 Click elow [Motif] in the [Line sew] section. Motif stitch ptterns re sved in the.pmf formt. 1 Click, nd then select [Sve As] from the commnd list. 2 Select the drive nd the folder, nd then type in the file nme. When sving motif pttern, specify the size eside [Defult Size]. Click [mm] or [inch] to select the mesurement units. 6 Select the drive nd folder where the pttern ws sved in Step 3. 7 Click the creted motif stitch pttern, nd then click [OK]. The pttern is pplied to the outlines of the emroidery pttern. Progrmmle Stitch Cretor 3 Click [Sve]. Step 4 Using the edited motif stitch pttern in Lyout & Editing 1 Strt up Lyout & Editing. 2 Select n emroidery pttern. 3 From the [Line sew type] selector (in the [Shpes] t), select [Motif Stitch]. 4 Disply the [Sewing Attriutes] pne. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 A motif stitch pttern cn e used when the motif stitch, piping stitch or stippling stitch hs een selected s the sew type of region. 268

270 Editing Pttern in Motif Mode Editing Pttern in Motif Mode Moving nd deleting severl points t time 1 Click the [Home] t. Scling ptterns 1 Click in the [Tools] group. 2 Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group. 2 Drg the hndle to djust the selected pttern(s) to the desired size. Blue squre: Strt point Red squre: End point 3 To select single point, click n empty squre. To select multiple points, hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the points, or drgging the pointer over the points. If the <Shift> key is held down while hndle is drgged, the pttern is enlrged or reduced from the center of the pttern. To flip the pttern long verticl xis, click [Flip Verticlly] in the [Flip] group. To flip the pttern long horizontl xis, click [Flip Horizontlly] in the [Flip] group. : Selected point : Unselected point Hold down the <Ctrl> key while pressing the key or key. The selection direction chnges to the end or strt point. 4 Edit the points. To move the points, drg them to the desired loction. To delete the point, click or press the <Delete> key. The strt point (lue squre) nd end point (red squre) cn not e deleted. 269

271 Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Window Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Window Progrmmle Stitch Cretor 1 Appliction utton 2 Rion 3 Quick Access Toolr 4 Help utton 5 Preview window (cc p. 272 ) Shows how the pttern will e sewn. 6 Design Pge 7 Work re 8 Sttus Br cc "Understnding Windows" on pge

272 Opening Templte Opening Templte Opening n imge in the ckground 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Click [Open Templte] in the [Templte] group. Chnging the density ckground imge 1 Drg the slider in the [Templte] group, or click or. 3 Select the drive, the folder nd the file, nd then click [Open] or doule-click the file's icon. Only one imge cn e dded to the work re. If you try to disply different imge, it will replce the previous one. There re mny different types of files tht cn e opened. cc "Imge file formts" on pge 150 Hide (off) 50% 25% 75% 100% This function is not ville if no templte imge hs een imported into the work re. Press the shortcut key <F6> to switch etween displying the imge (On (100%)) to displying it fded t ech density (75%, 50% nd 25%) to hiding the imge (Off). 271

273 Preview Window Preview Window 1 Click the [View] t. 2 To switch etween displying nd hiding the [Preview] window, select or unselect the [Preview Window] check ox in the [View] group. Sving Ptterns Overwriting Click, nd then select [Sve] from the commnd list. In Fill/Stmp mode In Motif mode If no file nme hs een specified or if the file cnnot e found, the [Sve As] dilog ox ppers. Sving with new nme The files re sved s.ps files in Fill/Stmp mode, nd s.pmf files in Motif mode. 1 Click, nd then select [Sve As] from the commnd list. Progrmmle Stitch Cretor 2 Select the drive nd the folder, nd then type in the file nme. When sving motif pttern, specify the size eside [Defult Size]. Click [mm] or [inch] to select the mesurement units. 272

274 Chnging the Settings 3 Click [Sve]. Chnging the Settings Sved files cn e used in Lyout & Editing or Design Center. cc "Using the edited fill/stmp stitch ptterns in Lyout & Editing" on pge 263 nd "Using the edited motif stitch pttern in Lyout & Editing" on pge 268 Chnging the grid settings 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Select the desired spcing of the grid lines from [Intervl] in the [Grid] group. None No grid is displyed. Nrrow The spcing of the grid lines is chnged to 1/ 32 of the Design Pge width. Medium The spcing of the grid lines is chnged to 1/ 16 of the Design Pge width. Wide The spcing of the grid lines is chnged to 1/8 of the Design Pge width. 273

275 Font Cretor User-defined fonts cn e creted using Font Cretor. These fonts cn e reclled to e used in Lyout & Editing.

276 Bsic Font Cretor Opertions Bsic Font Cretor Opertions With Font Cretor, user-defined font chrcters tht cn e used in Lyout & Editing cn e creted nd edited. Using these custom chrcters, originl emroidery ptterns cn e creted. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Selecting chrcter to e creted Opening ckground imge Creting font chrcter pttern Creting other font chrcter ptterns Sve the font chrcter pttern Creting n emroidery pttern using the creted font chrcters Step 1 Selecting chrcter to e creted 1 Click the down rrow in the ottom-left corner of the [Strt] screen to show the [All Apps] view. 2 Click [Font Cretor] under the title [Plette Ver.10] in the screen. Step 2 Opening ckground imge 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Click [Open] in the [Templte] group, nd then select [Select Imge File] from the list. 3 Click the [Home] t. 4 Click the [Select Chrcter] ox in the [Chrcter] group, nd then select "T" from the list. 3 Import the Cpitl_T.mp. The imge file cn e found t the following loction. Documents (My documents)\plette Ver.10\Smple\Font Cretor\Font Templte 275

277 Bsic Font Cretor Opertions There re mny different types of files tht cn e opened. cc "Imge file formts" on pge Click in the [Tools] group, nd then drg the red tringle icons to move the set lines so tht they re ligned with the left nd right of the chrcter. 4 Move the chrcter so tht the top ligns with the [Cpitl Line]. To djust the height of the chrcter, drg hndle to djust the height etween the [Cpitl Line] nd the [Bse Line] Set Line 3 7 Click the [View] t. 8 In the [Templte] group, drg the slider (or 4 click or ) to chnge the density of the templte imge to "25%". 1 Cpitl Line 2 Hndles 3 Bse Line 4 Set Line Red lines re dded ove, elow nd to the left nd right of the smple imge. Use these lines s guides for djusting the [Bse Line], [Cpitl Line] nd [Set Lines]. If the hndles hve disppered, right-click the imge, nd then click [Modify Templte] in the menu tht ppered. 5 Click the [Home] t. Hide (off) 50% 25% 75% 100% This function is not ville if no templte imge hs een imported into the work re. Press the shortcut key <F6> to switch etween displying the imge (On (100%)) to displying it fded t ech density (75%, 50% nd 25%) to hiding the imge (Off). Font Cretor Step 3 Creting font chrcter pttern 1 Click the [Home] t. 276

278 Bsic Font Cretor Opertions 2 Click the [Mnul Punch] in the [Tools] group, nd then select the desired tool from [Mnul Punching Tools]. 3 Click, nd then click in the Design Pge to specify points (1) (strt point) through (4) : Stright lock-type punching ptterns (region sewing). (Shortcut key: <Z>) : Curved lock-type punching ptterns (region sewing) (Shortcut key: <X>) : Semi-utomticlly creted stright lock-type punching pttern By semi-utomticlly trcing, points cn e specified long the lines of templte. (Shortcut key: <C>) 4 Click [Mnul Punch], select, nd then click point (5) through (7) : Running-type punching pttern (line sewing) (Shortcut key: <V>) : Feed-type punching pttern (jump stitches) (Shortcut key: <B>) 5 Click [Mnul Punch], select, nd then click points (8) through (10) When entering points, you cn switch etween the vrious tools. This is very esy if the shortcut keys re used. A templte imge is needed in order to use the semi-utomtic lock-type punch tool. If there is no imge, this tool will crete punching pttern like the stright lock-type punch tool. In ddition, this tool cnnot e used if TrueType font is used s the templte. Once the pttern is drwn, you cn still trnsform stright lock-type ptterns into curved lock-type ptterns nd vice vers. cc For detils, refer to "To Stright/To Curve" on pge

279 Bsic Font Cretor Opertions 6 Click [Mnul Punch], select, nd then click point (11). Step 4 Creting other font chrcter ptterns 1 Click the [Home] t Click the [Select Chrcter] ox in the [Chrcter] group, nd then select "g" from the list. 7 Click [Mnul Punch], select, nd then click points (12) through (13). 3 Import file Smll_g.mp in the sme wy tht "T" ws imported Doule-click point (14) (the lst point of the entire pttern), or click point (14) nd press the <Enter> key. 4 In the sme wy tht "T" ws djusted, chnge the chrcter size nd position, nd then drg the red tringle icons to move the set line so tht they re ligned with the left nd right of the chrcter. Font Cretor To remove the lst point tht ws entered, rightclick the mouse utton, or press the <BckSpce> key Set Line If the red lines re not shown, chnge the density of the templte imge. 278

280 Bsic Font Cretor Opertions 5 Click in the [Tools] group, nd then drg the lue tringle icons to move the men line nd descender line so tht they re ligned with the top nd ottom of the chrcter. 7 Click [Mnul Punch], select, nd then click points (8) through (24) Men Line 2 Descender Line 6 Click [Mnul Punch], select, nd then click points (1) through (7) Click [Mnul Punch], select, nd then click points (25) through (26)

281 Bsic Font Cretor Opertions 9 Click [Mnul Punch], select, nd then click points (27) through (33) Step 5 Sve the font chrcter pttern 1 Click, nd then select [Sve] from the commnd list Click [Mnul Punch], select, nd then click points (34) through (38). 2 Select the [MyFont] folder t the following loction Click [Mnul Punch] nd select Next, 34 click points (39) through (46), nd then doule-click point (47) (end point), or click point (47) nd press the <Enter> key For exmple, (Drive where Plette ws instlled)\progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\MyFont. And then type in the file nme. For this exmple, type in the nme "My font 1". Click [Sve]. The creted font is sved in the [MyFont] folder t the following loction. The font will not e usle in the Lyout & Editing if it's stored in different folder. For exmple, (Drive where Plette ws instlled)\progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\MyFont. If ny prt of the chrcter pttern extends off the Design Pge, messge ppers. Edit the chrcter pttern so tht no prt extends off the Design Pge, nd then sve it gin. If the ckground imge is displyed, the informtion for the ckground imge will e sved with the font file. The next time tht the font file is opened, the ckground imge is displyed. Font Cretor 280

282 Bsic Font Cretor Opertions Step 6 Creting n emroidery pttern using the creted font chrcters 5 Click in the Design Pge. Input the text, nd then press <Enter> the key or click the Design Pge. 1 Strt up Lyout & Editing. If Lyout & Editing is lredy strted, exit it, nd then strt it gin. The new font is detected when the ppliction strts up. 2 Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group, nd then select from [Text Tools]. 4 Click in the Font selector, nd then select "My font 1". cc "Creting Emroidery Ptterns Contining Text" on pge 100 Fonts creted in Font Cretor pper with the icon in front of the font nme. Since fonts for only "T" nd "g" were creted in the previous exmples ("A", "B", "C", etc. were not creted), only these chrcters pper in the smple when [Font] selector is clicked. 281

283 Font Cretor Window Font Cretor Window Appliction utton 2 Rion 3 Quick Access Toolr 4 Help utton 5 Preview Window (cc p. 289) Shows how the stitch pttern will e sewn. 6 Design Pge 7 Guidelines (fixed) (cc p. 283) 8 Guidelines (movle) (cc p. 283) 9 Work re 10 Sttus Br cc "Understnding Windows" on pge 11 8 Font Cretor 282

284 Font Cretor Window Aout the Design Pge guidelines The stndrd guidelines for creting fonts re shown in the Design Pges. The contents of ech of the guidelines re s shown elow. e c d f g 1 The heights nd widths specified for the [Bse Line], [Cpitl Line] nd [Set Lines] re the reference msk for creting the font chrcter. When chrcters creted with Font Cretor re imported into Lyout & Editing, the width nd height of the chrcters will e in the following re. Chrcter height: from Bse Line to Cpitl Line Chrcter width: from Set Line (Left) f to Set Line (Right) g In order to lign the height of the chrcters, the [Ascender Line], [Men Line] nd [Descender Line] pper the sme with ll chrcters. Therefore, if the height of ny of these lines is chnged, the setting is mintined, even when different chrcter is selected to e edited. The widths of the [Set Lines] cn e set seprtely for ech chrcter. 1 Tringle icon Bse Line c d e Cpitl Line The font's stndrd height will e from the Bse Line to the Cpitl Line line. These line cnnot e moved. Men Line When in lower cse, the stndrd height of the font will e from the Bse Line to this line. It cn e moved y drgging the tringle icon on the right edge. Descender Line This line is the stndrd for chrcters with prts tht hng down (descenders) such s "g" nd "y". It cn e moved y drgging the tringle icon on the right edge. Ascender Line This line is the stndrd for chrcters with prts tht extended ove (scenders) such s the ccent mrk. It cn e moved y drgging the tringle icon on the right edge. f Set Line (Left) g Set Line (Right) This line will e the font width. The font width cn e djusted y drgging the tringle icon on the ottom edge. 283

285 Opening File Opening File Creting new font Opening font file Click list., nd then select [New] from the commnd 1 Click, nd then select [Open] from the commnd list. 2 The creted font is sved in the [MyFont] folder t the following loction. (Drive where Plette ws instlled)\progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\MyFont 3 To open file, select it, nd then click [Open], or doule-click the file's icon. Font Cretor 284

286 Selecting Chrcter nd Prepring the Templte Selecting Chrcter nd Prepring the Templte Selecting the chrcter to e creted Selecting from the selector 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click the left or right rrow uttons of the [Select Chrcter] ox in the [Chrcter] group to select chrcter efore or fter the one tht is currently displyed. Chrcters where pttern hs lredy een creted pper with lue ckground. The lnk ox in the upper-left corner is spce. Click this ox to select spce. If ny prt of the chrcter pttern extends off the Design Pge when different chrcter is selected, messge ppers. Before selecting different chrcter, edit the chrcter pttern so tht no prt extends off the Design Pge. Selecting from chrcter list 1 Click the [Select Chrcter] ox in the [Chrcter] group. Adding/deleting registered chrcters 1 Click [Add/Remove Chrcters] in the [Chrcter] group. 2 From the keyord, enter the chrcter to e registered. 2 Click the chrcter to e creted. 285

287 Selecting Chrcter nd Prepring the Templte 3 Click [Add]. 3 From the [Font] selector, select the font. From the [Style] selector, select the chrcter style. And then click [OK]. 4 To delete registered chrcter, select the chrcter, nd then click [Remove]. The ox is selected in red. Ech click of the chrcter switches etween selecting nd deselecting it. 5 When the settings cn e pplied, click [OK]. If chrcter is registered even though font hs not een creted, the informtion for the registered chrcter is sved in font file. Opening templte (TrueType font) 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Click [Open] in the [Templte] group, nd then select [Select TrueType Font] from the list. While working on chrcter in font, the sme TrueType font ppers until different templte is selected for the ckground. Ech time different chrcter is selected in the [Select Chrcter] ox, the templte of the chrcter in the sme TrueType font ppers. If the chrcter selected in the [Select Chrcter] ox is not ville in the TrueType font, "?" ppers s the templte. If TrueType font ws selected s the templte, it cnnot e moved or resized. In this cse, it cn utomticlly e converted to font chrcter pttern. cc "Automticlly converting TrueType fonts" on pge 287. Font Cretor In ddition, the chrcter cnnot e drwn with the semi-utomtic lock-type punch tool. 286

288 Creting Font Chrcter Pttern Creting Font Chrcter Pttern Automticlly converting TrueType fonts 1 Open the TrueType font to e used s templte. cc "Opening templte (TrueType font)" on pge To select n dditionl pttern, hold down the <Ctrl> key nd click the other pttern. You cn lso select ptterns y drgging the pointer cross the pttern. Hold down the <Ctrl> key nd click selected pttern to deselect it. 2 Click the [Home] t. 3 Click [Convert from TrueType] in the [Edit/ Arrnge] group. 4 If TrueType font hs not een selected for the templte, the [Select TrueType Font] dilog ox ppers. Editing Font Chrcter Ptterns Selecting ptterns 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click in the [Tools] group to use the [Select] tool. 3 Click the pttern. Moving ptterns Selected ptterns cn e drgged to move them. To move the pttern horizontlly or verticlly, hold down the <Shift> key while drgging it. Pressing the rrow keys moves the selected pttern one grid mrk in the direction of the rrow on the key. If the grid is not displyed, the pttern moves distnce smller thn the smllest grid intervl in the direction of the rrow on the key. Scling ptterns Drg hndle of the selected pttern to djust its size. Drg the rottion hndle to rotte the pttern. If the <Shift> key is held down while hndle is drgged, the pttern is enlrged or reduced from the center of the pttern. Click [Flip] in the [Edit/Arrnge] group, nd then select [Flip Verticlly] to flip the selected pttern(s) up/down. Select [Flip Horizontlly] to flip the selected pttern(s) left/right. 1 2 Using commnds other thn those mentioned ove, selected ptterns cn e edited in other wys, for exmple, duplicted or deleted Rottion hndle 2 Hndles cc "Menus/Tools" of "Font Cretor" on pge 318.

289 Editing the Points of Font Chrcter Pttern Editing the Points of Font Chrcter Pttern Editing points nd reshping ptterns 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group. To Stright/To Curve 1 Select the point(s). 2 Click [Point] in the [Edit/Arrnge] group, nd then select the desired commnd from the list. 3 Click the pttern. 4 To edit point, click the point to select it. 2 cc For detils on the commnds To Stright, To Curve, To Smooth, To Symmetry nd To Cusp, "Trnsforming stright lines into curves or curves into stright lines" on pge 70 nd "Chnging the curve type" on pge Unselected point 2 Selected point 1 To move the point, drg it to the new loction. To insert point, click the line to dd new point. A new point ppers selected (s smll lck squre or circle). These commnds re not ville with ptterns entered using the [Running] or [Feed] tools. Font Cretor To delete the point, click or press the <Delete> key. 288

290 Checking the Creted Font Ptterns Checking the Creted Font Ptterns Checking nd editing the sewing order 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Sewing Order] in the [Edit/Arrnge] group. : To move ck one position in the sewing order. : To move to the end of the sewing order. To chnge the sewing order, click [OK]. Previewing the emroidery pttern 1 Click the [View] t. 2 To switch etween displying nd hiding the [Preview Window], select or unselect the [Preview Window] check ox in the [View] group. : Click to enlrge ech pttern to fill its frme. 3 Select pttern in the [Sewing Order] dilog ox. 4 The sewing order cn e chnged y selecting the frme contining the pttern tht you wnt to move, then drgging the frme to the new loction. A verticl red line ppers, indicting the position where the frme is eing moved. An lterntive method for moving the frmes is y clicking the uttons t the ottom of the dilog ox. : To move to the eginning of the sewing order. : To move hed one position in the sewing order. 289

291 Checking the Creted Font Ptterns Checking nd selecting from the list of creted chrcters A list of chrcters included in the font file currently eing edited cn e viewed. 1 Click the [Home] t. 2 Click [Browse Chrcters] in the [Chrcter] group. To select chrcter, click the chrcter, nd then click [Select]. Font Cretor 290

292 Sving Font Chrcter Ptterns Sving Font Chrcter Ptterns Overwriting 2 Select the [MyFont] folder t the following loction. Click, nd then select [Sve] from the commnd list. If no file nme hs een specified or if the file cnnot e found, the [Sve As] dilog ox ppers. If ny prt of the chrcter pttern extends off the Design Pge, messge ppers. Edit the chrcter pttern so tht no prt extends off the Design Pge, nd then sve it gin. Sving with new nme The font chrcter ptterns re sved s.pef files. 1 Click, nd then select [Sve As] from the commnd list. For exmple, (Drive where Plette ws instlled)\progrm Files (x86)\by lock\plette Ver.10\MyFont And then type in the file nme, then click [Sve]. The font will not e usle in the Lyout & Editing if it's stored in different folder. The creted font is sved in the [MyFont] folder t the following loction. Sved files cn e used in Lyout & Editing. cc "Creting n emroidery pttern using the creted font chrcters" on pge 281 If Lyout & Editing hs lredy strted up when new chrcter is sved in Font Cretor, tht chrcter will not pper in the [Font] selector list in Lyout & Editing. In this cse, exit Lyout & Editing, nd then strt it up gin. 291

293 Chnging the Settings Chnging the Settings Chnging the drwing mode There re two drwing modes in Font Cretor. Scling/Moving the ckground imge Click [Modify Templte] in the [Templte] group. Fill mode Blocks pper filled in. In this mode, the overlpping positions of ptterns cn e viewed etter. The ckground imge is selected. The ckground imge cn e moved or resized in the sme wy tht font chrcter ptterns re edited. cc "Editing Font Chrcter Ptterns" on pge 287. Outline mode (Fill mode Off) Blocks do not pper filled in. In this mode, points cn e edited more esily. The ckground imge cnnot e scled or moved if TrueType font is used s the templte. Font Cretor Perform the opertion descried elow to switch etween these modes. Click the [View] t. Click [Fill Mode] in the [View] group. 292

294 Chnging the Settings Chnging the grid settings 1 Click the [View] t. 2 Specify the grid settings in the [Grid] group. c d c d To disply the grid, select the [Show Grid] check ox. To disply the grid s solid lines, select the [with Axes] check ox. In the [Intervl] ox, select the grid spcing. To input the font in uniform thickness or mtch verticl nd horizontl positions, select the [Snp to Grid] check ox. The pointer will move y the mount set in [Intervl] ox. The snp feture works whether or not the grid is displyed. 293

295 Supplement This section provides hints nd detiled techniques for creting even more ttrctive emroidery.

296 For Bsic Opertions For Bsic Opertions Enlrging/Reducing Stitch Ptterns Imported stitch ptterns cn e enlrged or reduced in Lyout & Editing in the following three wys. 1 Stitch ptterns cn e simply enlrged/reduced. 2 Stitch ptterns cn e enlrged/reduced while the <Ctrl> key is held down. 3 Using the [Convert to Blocks] tools, stitch ptterns cn e enlrged/reduced fter eing converted to group of shpe ptterns with multiple sewing direction lines. With method 1, the stitching will ecome more dense or light without the numer of stitches sewn chnging. In other words, gretly enlrging or reducing the pttern chnges the qulity of the emroidery since the thred density is djusted. Use this method when only slightly enlrging/ reducing the stitch pttern. With method 2, the size of the pttern is chnged while mintining the thred density nd needle drop point pttern. However, if the originl thred density nd needle drop point pttern in the stitch pttern re not uniform, the thred density nd needle drop point pttern my not e mintined, even y using this method. Enlrge/reduce the pttern while checking the preview. Do not use this method when only slightly enlrging/reducing the stitch pttern. With method 3, the thred density is mintined while the pttern is enlrged/reduced. However, the needle drop point pttern is not entirely mintined. Use this method when you wish to chnge the stitching or shpe. Do not use this method when only slightly enlrging/reducing the stitch pttern. Sewing Direction In order to limit pulling or puckering, select stitch direction perpendiculr to the lrger edge of the re. Pulling or puckering more likely to occur Pulling or puckering less likely to occur Sewing Order After creting n emroidery pttern mde of severl different prts (in Lyout & Editing or Design Center), e sure to check the sewing order nd correct it if necessry. With Lyout & Editing, the defult sewing order is the order in which the elements re drwn. With Design Center, the defult sewing order is the order in which the sewing ttriutes re pplied. Be creful when chnging the sewing order since overlpping res my e incorrectly positioned. This softwre llows you to crete wide vriety of emroidery ptterns nd supports wider rnges for the setting of the sewing ttriutes (thred density, sewing pitch, etc.). However, the finl result lso depends on your prticulr emroidery mchine model. We recommend tht you mke tril sewing smple with your sewing dt efore sewing on the finl mteril. Rememer to sew your tril smple on the sme type of fric s your finl mteril nd to use the sme needle nd the sme mchine emroidery thred. 295

297 For Bsic Opertions Sewing Wide Ares For est sewing results, set [Under sewing] to [On] when sewing wide regions. cc For more detils, refer to "Under sewing" on pge 331. Chnging the [Sewing Direction] setting prevents pulling-in or puckering of the stitching. When emroidering, use stilizer mteril specificlly for emroidering. Alwys use stilizer mteril when emroidering lightweight or stretch frics, otherwise the needle my end or rek, the stitching my pull nd pucker, or the pttern my ecome misligned. When stin stitching is sewn in wide re, the stitched re my shrink fter sewing, depending on the mteril nd the type of thred used. If this hppens, switch to this lternte method: Select the fill stitch nd use stilizer mteril on the reverse side of the fric. Pttern Supplement After sewing 296

298 On Settings On Settings Jump Stitch nd Jump Stitch Trimming Mchine thred trimming ccording to settings specified in Lyout & Editing If is selected in the [Design Settings] dilog ox of Lyout & Editing, trimming cn e turned on or off t ech jump stitch loction. These settings re sved in emroidery dt files (.pes). If you re using our multi-needle emroidery mchine with the Jump Stitch Trimming function turned on to emroider this imported.pes file, the mchine will trim the thred ccording to the PES dt settings. For detils on the jump stitch trimming function of the mchine, refer to the Opertion Mnul provided with your emroidery mchine. Specifying trimming settings in Lyout & Editing If necessry, chnge settings for the following. Automticlly turning off trimming when the jump stitch length is less thn tht specified. cc "Jump Stitch Trimming" on pge 87 nd "Aout Minimum jump stitch length for thred trimming" on pge 87 Defult setting for turning on/off jump stitch trimming when new emroidery pttern is creted. cc "Adding jump stitch trimming to new ptterns" on pge 302 Stitching Jump stitch Stitching These settings re pplied only when emroidering with our multi-needle emroidery mchines. These settings re not pplied with ny other emroidery mchine. 1 Select in the [Design Settings] dilog ox. cc "Specifying the Design Pge Settings" on pge 14 2 Disply the trimming loctions in Lyout & Editing. cc Memo of "Chnging the disply of the emroidery design" on pge 78 3 Turn on/off jump stitch trimming for ech emroidery pttern. cc "Jump Stitch Trimming" on pge

299 Chnging Vrious Settings Chnging Vrious Settings Customizing the window Quick Access Toolr commnds Quick Access Toolr/Rion A menu ppers when Toolr] is clicked. in the [Quick Access The first time this ppliction is strted up, the following commnds pper in the Quick Access Toolr (A). : New : Undo Click [More commnds] to dd or remove the commnds ppering in the list of the [Quick Access Toolr]. Click [Show Below the Rion] to move the [Quick Access Toolr] elow the Rion. To return it to its originl position, disply the menu s descried ove, nd then click [Show Aove the Rion]. If check mrk ppers eside [Minimize the Rion], the Rion is minimized. When t is clicked, the Rion ppers. After commnd is selected, the Rion is minimized gin. To restore it to its originl disply, cler the check mrk. Exmple: With [Show Below the Rion] selected nd check mrk eside [Minimize the Rion] : Open : Redo : Sve : Wizrd : Zoom in Click, then select or unselect the check oxes eside the commnds to switch etween displying nd hiding them. When the check mrk is clered, the commnd is hidden. Alterntively, chnges to the commnds listed in the [Quick Access Toolr] cn e specified in the [Options] dilog ox nd ll pplied t the sme time. cc "Customizing Quick Access Toolr" on pge 300 Import/Color/Sewing Attriutes/ Text Attriutes pne, Sewing Order pne nd Stitch Simultor pne Floting Ech t or the entire pne cn e undocked to ecome dilog ox tht cn e moved round the screen. Doule-click the title r of the pne, or t. Right-click the pne or t, nd then click [Floting]. Drg t out of the pne. Supplement 298

300 Chnging Vrious Settings Docking Ech pne cn e docked ck to the window. Doule-click the title r. Right-click the pne, nd then click [Docking]. Drg the title r to the loction where the pne will e docked. Hide When t or pne is no longer needed, it cn e hidden. Click in the upper-right corner of the dilog ox. Right-click the t or dilog ox, nd then click [Hide]. To hide the t, click [View] t in the Rion, nd then click the nme in the [View] t. To disply the t gin, perform the sme opertion. Auto Hide When pne is temporrily not needed, it cn e moved to the side r, then displyed y clicking it or positioning the pointer over it. The pne is utomticlly hidden gin when it is no longer eing used, for exmple, when you click nywhere outside of the pne. Right-click the t or the title r of the pne, nd then click [Auto Hide]. In the upper-right corner of the pne, click. To cncel Auto Hide, right-click the title r, nd Using ccess keys When the <Alt> key is pressed, KeyTip (lel showing the letter of the ccess key) ppers on ech commnd. On the keyord, press the key corresponding to the commnd tht you wish to use. To stop using the ccess keys nd hide the KeyTips, press the <Alt> key. then click [Auto Hide], or simply click r. in the title The Stitch Simultor pne cnnot e temporrily hidden (Auto Hide). These pnes cn e returned to their defult displys. cc "Customizing Shortcut keys" on pge

301 Chnging Vrious Settings Chnging options settings 1 Click [Customize]. From the [Options] dilog ox, the commnds ppering in the [Quick Access Toolr] nd settings for the ppliction's ppernce cn e selected, nd lso the settings on shortcut keys, jump stitches, thred chrts cn e specified or chnged. Follow the procedure descried elow to disply the [Options] dilog ox. c A e Click, nd then click [Options] on the ottom of the window. g f d 2 Repet the following opertions until the desired commnds re displyed. Choose commnds from selector Select commnd ctegory. Commnds list Select the commnd to e dded. c Add utton Selected commnd is dded. The commnd ppers in A. d Remove utton Selected commnd is removed. The commnd is removed from A. e The [Options] dilog ox cn lso e displyed using either of the following methods. Click t the right end of the Quick Access Toolr, nd then click [More Commnds]. Click [Option] in the upper-right corner of the window, nd then click [Options]. Customizing Quick Access Toolr Select n icon in A, nd then click the uttons t to move it to the desired position. f Reset utton Reverting to the defult commnds. Settings for the following cn lso e specified from this dilog ox. g Show Quick Access Toolr Below the Rion Select where the Quick Access Toolr is displyed. Select the check ox to disply the Quick Access Toolr elow the Rion. Supplement 3 After the settings hve een specified, click [OK] to pply them. 1 1 Quick Access Toolr 300

302 Chnging Vrious Settings Customizing Shortcut keys 1 Click [Customize] in the commnd list, then [Customize] eside [Keyord shortcuts]. 2 In the [Ctegories] list, select commnd ctegory. Then, in the [Commnds] list, select the commnd whose shortcut keys re to e specified. 5 Click [OK] in the [Options] dilog ox. Editing user thred chrts For detiled instructions, see "Editing user thred color lists" on pge 192. Specifying the numer of jumps in emroidery design of the DST formt With the DST formt, you cn specify whether or not the jump stitches re trimmed ccording to the numer of jump codes. The numer of codes differs depending on the emroidery mchine eing used. Click [DST Settings] in the commnd list, specify the numer of jumps, nd then click [OK]. To specify setting for importing, enter vlue eside [DST Import Setting]. To specify setting for exporting, enter vlue eside [DST Export Setting]. c d e f The defult shortcut keys pper in the [Current Keys] ox. 3 Use the keyord to record the new shortcut keys in the [Press new shortcut key] ox, nd then click [Assign] d. The new shortcut keys pper in the [Current Keys] ox. Usge informtion out the entered key comintion ppers. If the key comintion hs lredy een ssigned to nother commnd, the nme of tht commnd ppers t c. To remove the defult or specified shortcut keys, select the shortcut keys in, nd then click [Remove] e. To revert to the defult settings, click [Reset All] f. DST Import Setting If the numer of consecutive jumps in the DST file is less thn the numer of jumps specified here, those consecutive jumps will e replced with stitch. If the numer of consecutive jumps in the DST file is greter thn or equl to the numer of jumps specified here, those jumps will e replced with jump stitch where the thred is trimmed. DST Export Setting When.pes files re output, jump stitches with thred trimming re replced with more consecutive jump codes thn the specified numer of jumps. 4 Repet steps 2 nd 3 until the desired shortcut keys hve een specified for the commnds, nd then click [Close]. 301

303 Chnging Vrious Settings Adding jump stitch trimming to new ptterns When creting new emroidery pttern for our multi-needle emroidery mchines, you cn specify whether or not to dd jump stitch trimming to the pttern. These settings re pplied only when emroidering with our multi-needle emroidery mchines. Before these settings cn e specified, select under [Mchine Type] in the [Design Settings] dilog ox. Click [Jump Stitch Trimming] in the commnd list, select the [Add jump stitch trimming to the entered ptterns.] check ox, nd then click [OK]. Chnging the system unit For detiled instructions, see "System unit" on pge 20. Adjusting the screen clirtion For detiled instructions, see "Adjusting on-screen mesurements (Screen Clirtion)" on pge 19 Customizing User Interfce Settings The color scheme of the pplictions cn e selected. Click [User Interfce Settings] in the commnd list, select the desired color scheme from [Appliction Color], nd then click [OK]. When the check ox is selected, scissors icon pper eside the frmes to indicte jump stitch trimmings re pplied. 1 With the [Show Sttus Br] check ox, select whether to disply or hide the sttus r. To disply the sttus r, select the check ox. If the [Reset Pne Position] utton is clicked, the docked pnes ([Import]/[Color]/[Sewing Attriutes]/[Text Attriutes] pnes, [Sewing Order] pne nd [Stitch Simultor] pne) return to their defult displys fter the ppliction is restrted. Supplement 1 Scissors icon 302

304 For Mking n Effective Use of This Appliction For Mking n Effective Use of This Appliction Converting Chrcters (Jpnese, Chinese, Koren, etc) to Emroidery Ptterns 7 Pste the chrcters into the text field in the [Text Attriutes] pne, nd then press the <Enter> key. Emroidery ptterns cn e creted from vrious chrcters, such s Jpnese, Chinese, Koren etc, using TrueType fonts. For this exmple, we will crete n emroidery pttern from Jpnese chrcters. 1 Strt up Lyout & Editing. 2 Select Text tool, nd then select Jpnese TrueType font (for exmple, "MS Gothic"). 3 Disply chrcter code tle different from the one tht ppered in step 2. ([Strt] [All Progrms] [Accessories] [System Tools] [Chrcter Mp]) 4 Select [MS Gothic] from the [Font] list in [Chrcter Mp], nd then select the [Advnced view] check ox. Next, select [Windows]: [Jpnese] from the [Chrcter set] list, select the desired chrcter, nd then click [Select]. (This exmple shows the Jpnese hirgn for the word mening "Good Afternoon".) If Jpnese or Koren cn e entered directly from the computer keyord, those chrcters cn e entered directly into the [Edit Text Letters] dilog ox. Fonts Suitle for Emroidering When converting TrueType fonts to emroidery ptterns For est results when converting TrueType fonts to emroidery ptterns, select font where ll lines re s thick s possile, such s with Block font. 5 After selecting ll of the desired chrcters, click [Copy] to copy the chrcters. 6 Click in the Design Pge where you wnt to enter the text. 303

305 For Mking n Effective Use of This Appliction Displying the emroidery designs in PES formt s thumnils Emroidery files in PES formt cn e viewed s thumnils with Explorer (Windows Explorer in Windows 7 nd File Explorer in Windows 8.1). It helps you to mnge emroidery designs more esily. To disply informtion on emroidery files, click. To disply emroidery files y using thumnils, click. Supplement 304

306 For Mking n Effective Use of This Appliction 305

307 Menus/Tools nd Reference This section lists the vrious Rion commnds nd tools in ech ppliction window. For detils on ech commnd nd tool, refer to the corresponding pge in this mnul. This section lso contins font smples nd informtion on the vrious sewing ttriutes.

308 Lyout & Editing Lyout & Editing Appliction utton menu No. Menu Reference 1 New p Open p Sve p Sve As p Print p Design Property p Design Settings p Fric Selector p Wizrd p Export p Rion menu ts Home t 2 5 0A B G J C D E FH I K L M No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Tools p Pn p Cut 14 Mesure p Copy 15 Import Ptterns p Pste p Arrnge p Duplicte 17 Emoss/Engrve p Arrnge Copy Tools p Modify Overlp p Delete 19 Group p Text Tools p Applique Wizrd p Shpes Tools p Emroidered Ptch Wizrd p Zoom in p Cutwork Wizrd p Zoon out p Sew Emroidery p Other Zoom Tools p

309 Lyout & Editing Imge t A B No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Open Imge p Delete Imge p Sve Imge p Auto Punch Wizrd p Modify Imge p Cross Stitch Wizrd p Bckground Imge Density p Photo Stitch 1 Wizrd p Rotte Right p Photo Stitch 2 Wizrd p Rotte Left p Import to Design Center p. 149 View t 4 8 A D E B C F No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Solid View p Import Pne p Stitch View p Reference Window p Relistic View p Show Grid p View Thred Trimming p Show Grid with Axes p Relistic View Settings p Snp to Grid p Sewing Order p Grid Spcing p Stitch Simultor p Ruler p Attriutes Setting p Guideline p. 19 Menus/Tools nd Reference 308

310 Lyout & Editing Text t (Text) C A B D E No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Tools p Text Outline Sew Type p Text Tools p Region color p Font p Text Body Sew Type p Text Size p Edit Text p Font Filter p Convert to Blocks p Font Filter Settings p Convert to Stitches p TrueType Font Attriute Setting p Convert to Outline p Line color p. 117 Outline t (Shpes (Outline)) A No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Tools p Pencil (Open Curve) p Closed Stright Line p Line color p Closed Curve p Line sew type p Pencil (Closed Curve) p Region color p Open Stright Line p Region sew type p Open Curve p

311 Lyout & Editing Outline t (Shpes (Rectngle)) No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Tools p Line sew type p Edge rdius p Region color p Line color p Region sew type p. 65 Mnul Punch t (Shpes (Mnul Punch)) No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Tools p Feed p Stright Block p Region color p Curved Block p Block sew type p Running p. 197 Menus/Tools nd Reference 310

312 Lyout & Editing Shpes t (Shpes (Shpes/Circle/Arc)) C A B D E No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Tools p Line color p Split Outline p Line sew type p Add Direction Line p Region color p Delete Direction Line p Region sew type p Reverse Direction Line p Convert to Stitches p Edit Point p Crete Offset Lines p Delete Point p Crete Florl Pttern p Split t Point p. 67 Stitches t (Stitches) No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Tools p Split t Point p Split Stitch Dt p Convert to Blocks p Chnge Color p Convert to Outline p Divide y Color p

313 Design Center Design Center Appliction utton menu No. Menu Reference 1 Wizrd p New Line Imge p New Figure Dt p Open p Sve p Sve As p. 237 Rion menu ts Originl Imge t 1 2 No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Open Imge 2 To Line imge p. 224 Line Imge t No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference Menus/Tools nd Reference 1 Pen Tools p Pn Tool p Erser Tools p To Originl imge p Zoom Tools p To Figure hndle p

314 Design Center Figure Hndle t 6 9 B AC D E F G H No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Tools p Delete p Edit Point Tool p Split t Point p Line Tool p Flip verticlly p Zoom Tools 13 Flip horizontlly p Pn Tool 14 Numericl Setting p Cut 15 Import Figure p Copy 16 Design Pge Settings p Pste 17 To Line imge p Duplicte 18 To Sew setting p. 217 View t No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Reference Window p Show Grid p Modify Templte p Show Grid with Axes p Bckground Imge Density p Grid Intervl p

315 Design Center Sew Setting t A B C D No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Region Tool p Sew Type p Line Tools p Sewing Order p Hole Sew Tool p Preview 4 Stmp Tools p Relistic Preview 5 Zoom Tools 12 Stitch Simultor p Pn Tool 13 To Figure hndle p Color p To Lyout & Editing p. 220 View t 1 2 No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Reference Window p Sewing Attriutes p. 233 Menus/Tools nd Reference 314

316 Design Dtse Design Dtse List of menus File menu Edit menu Menu Toolr Reference Menu Toolr Reference Open in Lyout & Editing p. 245 Print Setup p. 255 Import Into Lyout & Editing p. 245 Print Preview Crete New Folder p. 243 Print p. 255 Convert Formt p. 252 Crete HTML p. 256 Delete p. 244 Crete CSV p. 256 Serch p. 251 Exit Menu Toolr Reference Menu Toolr Reference Cut Pste p. 243 p. 243 Copy Select All Disply menu Menu Toolr Reference Menu Toolr Reference Lrge Thumnils Property p. 253 Smll Thumnils p. 244 Refresh Detils Toolr p. 241 Preview p. 253 Sttus Br 315

317 Design Dtse Option menu Menu Toolr Reference Menu Toolr Reference Select mm Blue p. 20 System Unit inch Appliction Blck Link p. 250 Color Silver DST Settings p. 301 Aqu p. 302 Help menu Menu Toolr Reference Menu Toolr Reference Instruction Mnul p. 4 Aout Design Dtse Customer Support p. 5 Menus/Tools nd Reference 316

318 Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Progrmmle Stitch Cretor Appliction utton menu No. Menu Reference 1 New Fill/Stmp Pttern 2 New Motif Pttern p Open p Sve p Sve As p. 272 Rion menu ts Home t 7 0 B A C No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Tool p Copy 2 Edit Point Tool p Pste 3 Drw Line Tool p Duplicte 4 Region (Reset) Tool p Delete p Region (Engrve) Tool p Flip verticlly p Region (Emoss) Tool p Flip horizontlly p Cut View t No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Open Templte p Show/Hide Sttus Br p Bckground Imge Density p Show Grid p Show/Hide Preview window p

319 Font Cretor Font Cretor Appliction utton menu No. Menu Reference New p Open p Sve p Sve As p. 291 Rion menu ts Home t 6 9 A B C H D E F G I J No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Select Oject Tool p Previous Chrcter p Edit Point Tool p Select Chrcter p Mnul Punch Tool p Next Chrcter p Zoom Tool 14 Browse Chrcters p Pn Tool 15 Add/Remove Chrcter p Cut 16 Sewing Order p Copy 17 Convert TrueType Font to Dt p Pste 18 Point Edit p Duplicte 19 Flip p Delete p Align Menus/Tools nd Reference 318

320 Font Cretor View t No. Menu Reference No. Menu Reference 1 Open Templte p Show/Hide Sttus Br p Modify Templte p Show Grid p Bckground Imge Density p Show Grid with Axes p Fill Mode p Snp to Grid p Preview Window p Grid Spcing p

321 Sewing Attriutes Sewing Attriutes The sewing ttriutes for ech sew type re first set to their defult settings; however, y chnging the settings of the sewing ttriutes, you cn crete custom stitching. cc For more detils, refer to "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 325 nd "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge 331. Line sew types Zigzg Stitch (cc p. 325) Running Stitch/Triple Stitch (cc p. 325) Motif Stitch (cc p. 326) Stem Stitch (cc p. 327) Cndlewicking Stitch (cc p. 327) E/V Stitch (cc p. 328) Chin Stitch (cc p. 329) Cutting (cc p. 329) Menus/Tools nd Reference 320

322 Sewing Attriutes Region sew types Stin Stitch (cc p. 331) Fill Stitch (cc p. 333) Progrmmle Fill Stitch (Prog. Fill Stitch) (cc p. 333) Piping Stitch (cc p. 336) Motif Stitch (cc p. 337) Cross Stitch (cc p. 338) Concentric Circle Stitch (cc p. 338) Rdil Stitch (cc p. 338) Spirl Stitch (cc p. 338) Stippling Stitch (cc p. 338) Net Fill Stitch (cc p. 339) Zigzg Net Fill Stitch (cc p. 339) 321

323 322 Menus/Tools nd Reference Sewing Attriutes Motif Stitch Pttern Motif Nme Pttern Motif Nme Pttern motif001 motif020 motif002 motif021 motif003 motif022 motif004 motif023 motif005 motif024 motif006 motif025 motif007 motif026 motif008 motif027 motif009 motif028 motif010 motif029 motif011 motif030 motif012 motif031 motif013 motif032 motif014 motif033 motif015 motif034 motif016 motif035 motif017 motif036 motif018 motif037 motif019 motif038 motif039 motif059 motif040 motif060 motif041 motif061 motif042 motif062 motif043 motif063 motif044 motif064 motif045 motif065 motif046 motif066 motif047 motif067 motif048 motif068 motif049 motif069 motif050 motif070 motif051 motif071 motif052 motif072 motif053 motif073 motif054 motif074 motif055 motif075 motif056 motif076 motif057 motif077 motif058 motif078 Motif Nme Pttern Motif Nme Pttern

324 323 Sewing Attriutes motif079 motif085 motif080 motif086 motif081 motif087 motif082 motif088 motif083 motif089 motif084 Prog. Fill Stitch Pttern Fill Pttern Nme Pttern Fill Pttern Nme Pttern net1 pt9 net2 pt10 net3 pt11 net4 pt12 pt1 pt13 pt2 pt14 pt3 pt15 pt4 pt16 pt5 pt17 pt6 stmp1 pt7 stmp1_ pt8 stmp2 Motif Nme Pttern Motif Nme Pttern stmp2_ stmpj stmp3 stmpk stmp3_ stmpl stmp4 stmpm stmp4_ stmpn stmp5 stmpo stmp5_ stmpp stmp6 stmpq stmp6_ stmpr stmp7 stmps stmp7_ stmpt stmpa stmpu stmpb stmpv stmpc stmpw stmpd stmpx stmpe stmpy stmpf stmpz stmpg ttmi1 stmph ttmi2 stmpi ttmi3 Fill Pttern Nme Pttern Fill Pttern Nme Pttern

325 Sewing Attriutes Fill Pttern Nme Pttern Fill Pttern Nme Pttern ttmi4 wve2 ttmi5 wve3 wve1 wve4 Menus/Tools nd Reference 324

326 Sewing Attriutes Line sewing ttriutes The ville ttriutes differ depending on the selected sew type. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 Zigzg Stitch Under sewing Off On Zigzg width Nrrow Wide Density Corse Fine Off On Hlf Stitch The inside stitching is dense. The stitching is djusted to more even density. Shrp Corners Connection Points This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge 116 Running Stitch Run pitch Specify the length of one stitch. Short Long 1 time 5 times Run time(s) Specify the numer of times the outline is sewn. Connection Points This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge 116 Triple Stitch Run pitch Specify the length of one stitch. Short Long Connection Points This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge

327 Sewing Attriutes Motif Stitch Select pttern for the motif stitch. Click to disply the [Browse] dilog ox. Select folder, nd then select the desired pttern (.pmf file) from the list of ptterns tht ppers. Specify the pttern size. The pttern cn e enlrged or reduced while mintining the width-toheight proportion. Smller Lrger 1 1 Height (verticl length) Specify the pttern height. Short Tll 2 2 Width (horizontl length) Specify the pttern width. Short Long Mintin spect rtio When selected, the height-to-width proportions of the pttern re mintined. H-Arrnge (horizontl rrngement) Specify the rrngement of the ptterns long horizontl xis. All ptterns or ech pttern cn e flipped long the horizontl xis. Norml Mirror Alternte V-Arrnge (verticl rrngement) Specify the rrngement of the ptterns long verticl xis. All ptterns or ech pttern cn e flipped long the verticl xis. Norml Mirror Alternte Offset 0.0 mm Offset: 4.5mm Spcing Nrrow Wide Short Run pitch Specify the length of one stitch. Feed Run Strt/End Type cc "If the entry/exit points of sewing hve een chnged" on pge 330 Long Menus/Tools nd Reference Connection Points This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge

328 Sewing Attriutes Stem Stitch Width Spcing Nrrow Nrrow Wide Wide Angle Stitch Type Triple Feed Single Run Strt/End Type Connection Points cc "If the entry/exit points of sewing hve een chnged" on pge 330 This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge 116 Cndlewicking Stitch Density Dense Medium Light Size Spcing Smller Nrrow Feed Lrger Wide Run Strt/End Type Connection Points cc "If the entry/exit points of sewing hve een chnged" on pge 330 This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge

329 Sewing Attriutes E/V Stitch Select the E Stitch or the V Stitch. E Stitch Intervl Nrrow Wide Short Long 2 Stroke width 3 Nrrow Wide 3 Run pitch Run time(s) Specify the numer of times the line is sewn. 1 time 5 times Stroke time(s) Specify the numer of times ech stroke is sewn. 1 time 3 times Arrnge Connection Points This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge 116 V Stitch Run time(s) 1 Intervl 2 Stroke width 3 Run pitch With the V stitch, the line nd the strokes re sewn the sme numer of times. Nrrow Wide Short Long Nrrow Wide 1 time 5 times Menus/Tools nd Reference Arrnge Connection Points This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge

330 Sewing Attriutes Chin Stitch Stitch Type Size Tringulr Smller Dimond-shped Lrger Time 1 time 6 time Arrnge Feed Run Strt/End Type Connection Points cc "If the entry/exit points of sewing hve een chnged" on pge 330 This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge 116 Cutting Leve uncut sections Specify whether or not sections of the cutting line re to e left uncut. This prevents the fric from moving out of plce during cutting. If it is set to [On], cut them with scissors fter the cutting step is finished. Off On Use For more clenly cut edges, for exmple, on ptches, select [Cutting only]. If the cut edge will e emroidered, for exmple, on ppliqués, select [Cutting for covering edge of fric]. Cutting only Cutting for covering edge of fric 329

331 Sewing Attriutes If the entry/exit points of sewing hve een chnged If the entry/exit points of line sewing with the motif stitch, stem stitch, cndlewicking stitch or chin stitch hve een chnged or optimized, select setting for [Strt/End Type] in the line sewing ttriutes. cc "Strt/End Type" on pge 326 nd "Moving entry/exit points, the center point nd stitch pttern reference point" on pge 50 If [Feed] ws selected under [Strt/End Type], jump stitches re entered t the eginning or end of pttern stitching (with motif stitch, stem stitch, cndlewicking stitch or chin stitch). If [Run] ws selected under [Strt/End Type], running stitches following the pth re entered t the eginning of nd etween pttern stitching. Before the entry/exit points re chnged Pth of ctul stitching Entry point/exit point When the entry point is moved Feed Entry point Jump stitch Run Exit point Exit point Entry point Running stitch Menus/Tools nd Reference After chnging the Strt/End Type, check the stitching with the stitch simultor. cc "Checking the stitching with the Stitch Simultor" on pge 80 Emroidery ptterns where the Strt/End Type of line sewing with the motif stitch, hve een chnged or optimized in n ppliction erlier thn version 8 re opened or imported with this stitching specified s jump stitches. 330

332 Sewing Attriutes Region sewing ttriutes The ville ttriutes differ depending on the selected sew type. cc "Specifying sewing ttriutes" on pge 54 Stin Stitch To specify underly stitching, select the check ox, nd then specify settings for the following ttriutes. Specify the type of underly stitching to e sewn. Under sewing For text ptterns or for shpe ptterns with multiple sewing direction lines Edge only Region only (single lyer of zigzg shped stitches) Region only (single lyer of piping stitches) Edge nd region (single lyer of zigzg shped stitches) Region only (doule lyer of zigzg shped nd piping stitches) For shpe ptterns with single sewing direction line Single Doule For regions in Design Center Single Doule [Density] Select [Dense], [Medium] or [Light] s the density for the underly stitching. Corse Fine Density [Grdtion] This cnnot e specified under the following conditions. The sewing direction is set to [Vrile] Text pttern When fethered edge is specified Click [Pttern] to set the grdtion pttern. cc "Creting grdtion/lending" on pge 47 Off On Direction This cnnot e specified for text pttern. [Mnul]: Sews t fixed ngle. Drg or select vlue to specify the ngle. If there re multiple sewing direction lines, vlue cnnot e specified for the ngle. [Mnul] [Auto] [Auto]: Automticlly vries the sewing direction ccording to the shpe of the region. Off On Hlf Stitch To specify hlf stitching, select the check ox. This cnnot e specified if the sewing direction is set to [Mnul] nd there is only one sewing direction line. The inside stitching is dense. The stitching is djusted to more even density. 331

333 Sewing Attriutes Inside of region Running Stitch Pth The inside of region setting is not ville if the [Grdtion] check ox is selected. This cnnot e specified under the following conditions. The sewing direction is set to [Auto]. Text ptterns When fethered edge is specified Along outline On outline No compenstion Longest compenstion Pull compenstion Lengthen the sewing region in the sewing direction to djust for pttern shrinkge during sewing. Connection Points This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge 116 Specify the edge of the stitching where the fethered edge is to e pplied. Top side of pttern For <pttern11> Top edge only Bottom edge only Fethered edge Click to disply the [Browse] dilog ox. Select the desired pttern from the list of ptterns tht ppers. This sewing ttriute is ville only when shpe pttern is selected. In ddition, this ttriute cnnot e selected under the following conditions. When grdtion is specified When the sewing direction is set to [Auto] When hole sewing is specified Specify the width of the fethered edge Bottom side of pttern For <pttern18> Short Top nd ottom edges Long Menus/Tools nd Reference Fethered edge settings not specified Fethered edge settings specified 332

334 Sewing Attriutes Fill Stitch Under sewing Density Direction cc "Stin Stitch" on pge 331 Stitch Type Specify the shpe of the returning ends of the stitching. This cnnot e specified if the sewing direction is set to [Auto]. Hlf Stitch Running Stitch Pth Step pitch cc "Hlf Stitch" on pge 331 nd "Running Stitch Pth" on pge 332 Specify the length of one stitch. Short Long 0% 50% Frequency Pull compenstion Connection Points Fethered Edge cc "Pull compenstion" on pge 332 This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge 116 cc "Fethered edge" on pge 332 Progrmmle Fill Stitch (Prog. Fill Stitch) Under sewing Density Direction Hlf Stitch Running Stitch Pth Pull compenstion Connection Points Fethered Edge cc "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge 331 nd 332 This sewing ttriute is ville only when text pttern is selected. cc "Selecting connection point positions in text pttern" on pge 116 cc "Fethered edge" on pge 332 cc "Stin Stitch" in the "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge

335 Sewing Attriutes Progrmmle fill Click to disply the [Browse] dilog ox. Select folder, nd then select the desired pttern (.ps file) from the list of ptterns tht ppers. Smller Specify the pttern size. The pttern cn e enlrged or reduced while mintining the width-to-height proportion. Lrger 1 1 Height (verticl length) Specify the pttern height. Short Tll 2 2 Width (horizontl length) Specify the pttern width. Short Long Mintin spect rtio Direction When selected, the height-to-width proportions of the pttern re mintined row 0% Offset column Row 50% Column 50% Bse Sewing To specify se stitching, select the check ox, nd then specify settings for the following ttriutes. Stitch Type Step pitch Frequency Specify the shpe of the returning ends of the stitching. This cnnot e specified if the sewing direction is set to [Auto]. Specify the length of one stitch. Short 0% 50% Long Menus/Tools nd Reference Pttern Are where the emossing or engrving effects re pplied This re is sewn with the stitching settings specified for the se sewing of the progrmmle fill stitch. This re is sewn with the stitching settings specified y the pttern file. 334

336 Sewing Attriutes Notes on progrmmle fill stitches nd stmps In some cse of the sew type nd pttern directions setting of progrmmle fill stitch or stmp, lines will not e sewn. Use the Relistic View to view exctly how the stitch pttern will e sewn. To get n even etter view, mke test smples of different settings. Exmples of progrmmle fill stitching: Exmple 1 Stitch direction: 45 (defult) Exmple 2 Stitch direction: 90 Exmple 3 Stitch direction: 0 cc "Chnging the disply of the emroidery design" on pge 78, nd "Progrmmle Stitch Cretor" on pge

337 Sewing Attriutes Piping Stitch Stitching is creted to run through the length of locks. Direction This cnnot e specified for ptterns with multiple sewing direction lines Specify settings for the following if the motif stitch pttern is not used. Corse Fine Density Short Long Run pitch Specify the length of one stitch. 0% 50% Frequency Specify the shift in the stitches. Use Motif Motif To use motif stitch in the pttern, select the check ox, nd then specify settings for the following ttriutes. cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge 337 Pttern1/Pttern2 Pttern nd size of the motif stitch ptterns H-Arrnge V-Arrnge H-Offset V-Offset H-Spcing V-Spcing Row offset Run pitch cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 326 cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge 337 Menus/Tools nd Reference 336

338 Sewing Attriutes Motif Stitch Motif Select the pttern to e used for the motif stitch. [Pttern1 only] [Pttern2 only] [Pttern1 nd 2] Pttern1/Pttern2 Specify settings for ech pttern. Pttern nd size of the motif stitch ptterns Mintin spect rtio cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 326 H-Arrnge V-Arrnge H-Offset (horizontl spcing) 0.0 mm 2.5 mm V-Offset (verticl spcing) 0.0 mm 2.5 mm H-Spcing (horizontl spcing) Nrrow Wide V-Spcing (verticl spcing) Nrrow Wide Direction Row offset Smller Lrger Run pitch cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge

339 Sewing Attriutes Cross Stitch Smller Lrger Size Single Triple Times Concentric Circle Stitch, Rdil Stitch nd Spirl Stitch For detils on moving the center point of the concentric circle stitch nd the rdil stitch, refer to "Moving the center point nd stitch pttern reference point" on pge 51. Concentric Circle Stitch Corse Concentric Circle Stitch Fine Rdil Stitch Corse Rdil Stitch Fine Density Spirl Stitch Corse Spirl Stitch Fine Run pitch Specify the length of one stitch. Short Long Stippling Stitch Run pitch Spcing Use Motif Pttern nd size of the motif stitch ptterns H-Arrnge V-Arrnge Offset Spcing Run pitch Specify the length of one stitch. This cnnot e specified if the motif stitch is used. Nrrow The pttern is finer. Short The turns re smoother. Wide The pttern is corser. Long The turns re more ngled. To use motif stitch in the pttern, select the check ox, nd then specify settings for the following ttriutes. cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 326 Menus/Tools nd Reference 338

340 Sewing Attriutes Net Fill Stitch Pttern Specify the pttern to e used for the net fill stitch. Fine Corse Spcing Direction The pttern is finer. The pttern is corser. cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge 337 Zigzg Net Fill Stitch Pttern Specify the pttern to e used for the zigzg net fill stitch. Under sewing To specify underly stitching, select the check ox. Off On Zigzg width Density cc "Zigzg Stitch" in the "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 325 cc "Zigzg Stitch" in the "Line sewing ttriutes" on pge 325 Fine Corse Spcing H-Offset V-Offset Direction The pttern is finer. The pttern is corser. cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge 337 cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge 337 cc "Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing ttriutes" on pge

341 Font List Font List Text No. Font Nme Text Outlines Min. size No. Font Nme Text Outlines 001 Serif Script Gothic Serif Script Serif Block Block Gothic Block Decortive Block Block Script Decortive Decortive Script Gothic Script Block 06 Min. size 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 8 mm (0.31") 9 mm (0.35") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 9 mm (0.35") 10 mm (0.39") 20 mm (0.79") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 9 mm (0.35") 021 Gothic Decortive Decortive Gothic Decortive Gothic Block Gothic Brussels Demi Outline Clgry MediumItlic 031 Istnul 032 Los Angeles 033 Sipn 034 Sn Diego 035 Sicili Light Itlic 036 Alsk 037 Byern Book 038 Belgium 039 Bengl 040 Bergen 041 Berlin Regulr 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 8 mm (0.31") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") Menus/Tools nd Reference 340

342 Font List No. Font Nme Text Outlines Min. size No. Font Nme Text Outlines Min. size 042 Bermud Script 10 mm (0.39") 065 Hiti 9 mm (0.35") 043 Blckstone 10 mm (0.39") 066 Helsinki Nrrow Bold 10 mm (0.39") 044 BR-OCRA 10 mm (0.39") 067 Hungry 10 mm (0.39") Broughm Bold Broughm Condensed ExtrBold 047 Brunei 048 Brussels Light 9 mm (0.35") 9 mm (0.35") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 068 Jkrt 069 Jw 070 Kentucky 071 Kingston Regulr 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 049 Ciro 10 mm (0.39") 072 Letter Gothic Bold 10 mm (0.39") 050 Clgry BoldItlic 10 mm (0.39") 073 Lillehmmer 10 mm (0.39") 051 Clgry BoldItlic LS 10 mm (0.39") 074 Liverpool Itlic 10 mm (0.39") 052 Cnerr 10 mm (0.39") 075 Mrylnd 10 mm (0.39") 053 Connecticut 10 mm (0.39") 076 Mimi Romn 9 mm (0.35") 054 Cordo 10 mm (0.39") 077 Montrel 10 mm (0.39") 055 Cyprus 10 mm (0.39") 078 Pnm Bold 8 mm (0.31") 056 Equdor 9 mm (0.35") 079 Princeton Itlic 10 mm (0.39") 057 Epsom Expnded 9 mm (0.35") 080 Ries 10 mm (0.39") 058 Epsom Firenze Bold Expnded Florid Medium 061 Frnkfurt Bold 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 8 mm (0.31") 9 mm (0.35") 081 Slmnc 082 Settle BoldItlic 083 Sofi Bold 084 Helsinki 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 9 mm (0.35") 10 mm (0.39") 062 Frnkfurt Medium 10 mm (0.39") 085 Tennessee ExtrBold 10 mm (0.39") 063 Germny 10 mm (0.39") 086 Themes 10 mm (0.39") 064 BR Symol 10 mm (0.39") 087 Tinjin 10 mm (0.39") 341

343 Font List No. Font Nme Text Outlines Min. size No. Font Nme Text Outlines Min. size 088 Tirol 10 mm (0.39") 110 Modul Outlined 19 mm (0.75") 089 US Romn 10 mm (0.39") 111 Modul Round Serif Ultr 17 mm (0.67") 090 Venezi 10 mm (0.39") 112 Modul Sns Bold 10 mm (0.39") 091 Vermont 10 mm (0.39") 113 Not Cslon Two 30 mm (1.18") 092 Wellington 10 mm (0.39") 114 Remedy Doule 25 mm (0.98") 093 Künstlerschreischrift 10 mm (0.39") 115 Sth Blck Regulr 13 mm (0.51") 094 Toms Hndwritten 10 mm (0.39") 116 Sentor Ultr 13 mm (0.51") 095 Luedickitl 10 mm (0.39") 117 Sod Script Bold 10 mm (0.39") 096 Atrnt Book 10 mm (0.39") 118 Suurn Light 10 mm (0.39") 097 Atrnt Demi 10 mm (0.39") 119 Totlly Gothic 10 mm (0.39") 098 Montn 10 mm (0.39") 120 Vist Sns Alt Regulr 10 mm (0.39") Bse 900 Sns Hevy Itlic Bse Monospce Wide Bold Blockhed Alphet Drkside Dllince Romn Dllince Script Dogm Script Bold Elliotts Apollo Venus Dioxide Exocet Medium Los Feliz Bold Itlic Mson Serif Bold Mtrix Inline Extr Bold 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 15 mm (0.59") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 10 mm (0.39") 13 mm (0.51") 9 mm (0.35") 12 mm (0.47") 17 mm (0.67") Smll Text No. Font Nme Text Outlines Size 01 Uth Bold S 02 Belgium S 03 Clgry MediumItlic S 04 Uth SR 05 Clgry MediumItlic SR 06 Script 01 SR 07 Block 03 S 5-6 mm ( ") 5-6 mm ( ") 5-6 mm ( ") 3-4 mm ( ") 3-4 mm ( ") 4-6 mm ( ") 5-6 mm ( ") Menus/Tools nd Reference 342

344 Font List No. Font Nme Text Outlines Size 08 Block 07 SR 09 Germny S 10 Ries S 4-6 mm ( ") 5-6 mm ( ") 5-6 mm ( ") Monogrm Symol Font Nme Text Outlines Dimond Script 343

Operation Manual. Addendum. Embroidery Machine. Product Code: 884-T13

Operation Manual. Addendum. Embroidery Machine. Product Code: 884-T13 Emroidery Mchine Opertion Mnul Addendum Product Code: 884-T13 Be sure to red this document efore using the mchine. We recommend tht you keep this document nery for future reference. ABOUT THIS MANUAL ABOUT

More information

ABOUT THIS MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL

ABOUT THIS MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL This mnul provides detils on IQ Designer, which is ville with the upgrde. Mke sure tht the mchine hs een upgrded to the most recent version. When you find this icon

More information

Basic Embroidery. Chapter 5 COMBINING PATTERNS BEFORE EMBROIDERING PREPARING THE FABRIC SELECTING PATTERNS...

Basic Embroidery. Chapter 5 COMBINING PATTERNS BEFORE EMBROIDERING PREPARING THE FABRIC SELECTING PATTERNS... Chpter 5 Bsic Emroidery BEFORE EMBROIDERING... 196 Emroidery Step y Step...196 Attching Emroidery Foot W+ with LED pointer...197 Attching the Emroidery Unit...197 Aout the Emroidery Unit... 197 Removing

More information

mac profile Configuration Guide Adobe Photoshop CS/CC Sawgrass Virtuoso SG400/SG800 Macintosh v

mac profile Configuration Guide Adobe Photoshop CS/CC Sawgrass Virtuoso SG400/SG800 Macintosh v mc profile Mcintosh 10.5-10.10 Configurtion Guide Adoe Photoshop CS/CC Swgrss Virtuoso SG400/SG800 v20150427 Configurtion Guide - Photoshop CS/CC Swgrss SG400/800 Before proceeding, ensure the correct

More information

Operation Manual Embroidery

Operation Manual Embroidery Opertion Mnul Emroidery Emroidery nd Sewing Mchine Product Code: 882-W30 Be sure to red this mnul efore using the mchine. We recommend tht you keep this document nery for future reference. HOW TO USE

More information

FOMA M702iG Manual for Data Communication

FOMA M702iG Manual for Data Communication FOMA M702iG Mnul for Dt Communiction Dt Communictions... 1 Before Using... 2 Prepring for Dt Communiction... 3 Instlling the Communiction Configurtion Files (Drivers)... 4 Connecting the FOMA Hndset nd

More information

510 Series Color Jetprinter

510 Series Color Jetprinter 510 Series Color Jetprinter User s Guide for Windows Setup trouleshooting A checklist to find solutions to common setup prolems. Printer overview Lern out the printer prts nd the printer softwre. Printing

More information

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Thnk you for purchsing this mchine. Before using this mchine, crefully red the IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS, nd then study this mnul for the correct opertion of the vrious functions.

More information

All information provided related to future Intel products and plans is preliminary and subject to change at any time, without notice.

All information provided related to future Intel products and plans is preliminary and subject to change at any time, without notice. TRADEMARKS IMPORTANT: READ BEFORE DOWNLOADING, COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING. By downloding, copying, instlling or using the softwre you gree to this license. If you do not gree to this license, do not

More information

Operation Manual. Product Code 885-V55. Computerized Embroidery Machine GETTING READY EMBROIDERY APPENDIX

Operation Manual. Product Code 885-V55. Computerized Embroidery Machine GETTING READY EMBROIDERY APPENDIX Computerized Emroidery Mchine Opertion Mnul Product Code 885-V55 GETTING READY EMBROIDERY APPENDIX Be sure to red this document efore using the mchine. We recommend tht you keep this document nery for

More information

Geometric quantities for polar curves

Geometric quantities for polar curves Roerto s Notes on Integrl Clculus Chpter 5: Bsic pplictions of integrtion Section 10 Geometric quntities for polr curves Wht you need to know lredy: How to use integrls to compute res nd lengths of regions

More information

ISM-PRO SOFTWARE DIGITAL MICROSCOPE OPERATION MANUAL

ISM-PRO SOFTWARE DIGITAL MICROSCOPE OPERATION MANUAL MN-ISM-PRO-E www.insize.om ISM-PRO SOFTWARE DIGITAL MICROSCOPE OPERATION MANUAL Desription Clik Next. As the following piture: ISM-PRO softwre is for ISM-PM00SA, ISM-PM600SA, ISM- PM60L digitl mirosopes.

More information

Math Circles Finite Automata Question Sheet 3 (Solutions)

Math Circles Finite Automata Question Sheet 3 (Solutions) Mth Circles Finite Automt Question Sheet 3 (Solutions) Nickols Rollick nrollick@uwterloo.c Novemer 2, 28 Note: These solutions my give you the nswers to ll the prolems, ut they usully won t tell you how

More information

Student Book SERIES. Patterns and Algebra. Name

Student Book SERIES. Patterns and Algebra. Name E Student Book 3 + 7 5 + 5 Nme Contents Series E Topic Ptterns nd functions (pp. ) identifying nd creting ptterns skip counting completing nd descriing ptterns predicting repeting ptterns predicting growing

More information

Operation Manual. Embroidery Machine. Product Code: 882-D80/D82

Operation Manual. Embroidery Machine. Product Code: 882-D80/D82 Opertion Mnul Emroidery Mchine Product Code: 882-D80/D82 Be sure to red this document efore using the mchine. We recommend tht you keep this document nery for future reference. TRADEMARKS IMPORTANT: READ

More information

Seven Sisters. Visit for video tutorials

Seven Sisters. Visit   for video tutorials Seven Sisters This imge is from www.quiltstudy.org. Plese visit this website for more informtion on Seven Sisters quilt ptterns. Visit www.blocloc.com for video tutorils 1 The Seven Sisters design cn be

More information

Aquauno Select MINUTES. (duration) FREQUENCY LED. OFF 8h AQUAUNO SELECT 5 MIN FREQUENCY. the timer is being programmed;

Aquauno Select MINUTES. (duration) FREQUENCY LED. OFF 8h AQUAUNO SELECT 5 MIN FREQUENCY. the timer is being programmed; Aquuno Select Pg. INSTALLATION. Attch the timer to cold wter tp, following these simple instructions. Do not instll the timer in pit or vlve ox, elow ground level or indoors. Do not use the timer with

More information

Operation Manual. Embroidery and Sewing Machine. Product Code: 882-C50

Operation Manual. Embroidery and Sewing Machine. Product Code: 882-C50 Opertion Mnul Emroidery nd Sewing Mchine Product Code: 882-C50 Be sure to red this document efore using the mchine. We recommend tht you keep this document nery for future reference. TRADEMARKS IMPORTANT:

More information

Exercise 1-1. The Sine Wave EXERCISE OBJECTIVE DISCUSSION OUTLINE. Relationship between a rotating phasor and a sine wave DISCUSSION

Exercise 1-1. The Sine Wave EXERCISE OBJECTIVE DISCUSSION OUTLINE. Relationship between a rotating phasor and a sine wave DISCUSSION Exercise 1-1 The Sine Wve EXERCISE OBJECTIVE When you hve completed this exercise, you will be fmilir with the notion of sine wve nd how it cn be expressed s phsor rotting round the center of circle. You

More information

* * 33/3549A CS 33/3549A. 2-Point Latch includes these additional parts. 1-Point Latch (LBL) Customer Service. Installation Instructions

* * 33/3549A CS 33/3549A. 2-Point Latch includes these additional parts. 1-Point Latch (LBL) Customer Service. Installation Instructions *23970726* 23970726 33/3549A CS 33/3549A Instlltion Instructions This instruction covers new instlltion of the 33/3549A conceled verticl device for luminum nd hollow metl doors. RF Also covered is the

More information

Operation Manual Sewing Machine

Operation Manual Sewing Machine Opertion Mnul Sewing Mchine Product Code: 888-V64/V65/V66/V67 KNOWING YOUR SEWING MACHINE SEWING BASICS UTILITY STITCHES APPENDIX Be sure to red this document efore using the mchine. We recommend tht you

More information

Operation Manual. Embroidery and Sewing Machine. Product Code: 882-C40/C42

Operation Manual. Embroidery and Sewing Machine. Product Code: 882-C40/C42 Opertion Mnul Emroidery nd Sewing Mchine Product Code: 882-C40/C42 Be sure to red this document efore using the mchine. We recommend tht you keep this document nery for future reference. TRADEMARKS IMPORTANT:

More information

FOR DEVICES SOLD PRIOR TO

FOR DEVICES SOLD PRIOR TO 23970734 98/9949 CS 98/9949 FOR DEVICES SOLD PRIOR TO 8-10-16 This instruction covers new instlltion of the 98/9949 conceled verticl device for hollow metl nd luminum doors. RF Instlltion Instructions

More information

PROGRAMMING MANUAL MTMA/01 MTMV/01 FB00329-EN

PROGRAMMING MANUAL MTMA/01 MTMV/01 FB00329-EN RMMING MNUL MTM/01 MTMV/01 FB00329-EN Generl precutions Red the instructions crefully efore eginning the instlltion nd crry out the ctions s specified y the mnufcturer. The instlltion, progrmming, commissioning

More information

The Math Learning Center PO Box 12929, Salem, Oregon Math Learning Center

The Math Learning Center PO Box 12929, Salem, Oregon Math Learning Center Resource Overview Quntile Mesure: Skill or Concept: 300Q Model the concept of ddition for sums to 10. (QT N 36) Model the concept of sutrction using numers less thn or equl to 10. (QT N 37) Write ddition

More information

CS2204 DIGITAL LOGIC & STATE MACHINE DESIGN SPRING 2005

CS2204 DIGITAL LOGIC & STATE MACHINE DESIGN SPRING 2005 CS2204 DIGITAL LOGIC & STATE MACHINE DESIGN SPRING 2005 EXPERIMENT 1 FUNDAMENTALS 1. GOALS : Lern how to develop cr lrm digitl circuit during which the following re introduced : CS2204 l fundmentls, nd

More information

CHAPTER 2 LITERATURE STUDY

CHAPTER 2 LITERATURE STUDY CHAPTER LITERATURE STUDY. Introduction Multipliction involves two bsic opertions: the genertion of the prtil products nd their ccumultion. Therefore, there re two possible wys to speed up the multipliction:

More information

Fitting & User Instructions

Fitting & User Instructions Issue 03 Alexnder Universl Furniture Risers Note: These frmes require the ddition of n ttchment. (See pges 4 - ) Bse Frme Mrk Bse Frme Mrk Fitting & User Instructions These instructions pply to the rising

More information

Student Book SERIES. Fractions. Name

Student Book SERIES. Fractions. Name D Student Book Nme Series D Contents Topic Introducing frctions (pp. ) modelling frctions frctions of collection compring nd ordering frctions frction ingo pply Dte completed / / / / / / / / Topic Types

More information

MFAH. Minimizes Burrs for High Quality Machining Results. Low Cutting Force Design

MFAH. Minimizes Burrs for High Quality Machining Results. Low Cutting Force Design igh fficiency Milling Cutter for Finishing Aluminum MFA igh fficiency Milling Cutter for Finishing Aluminum MFA NW CG Imge Low Cutting Force Minimizes Burrs nd Chipping for igh Qulity Mchining Results

More information

ABB STOTZ-KONTAKT. ABB i-bus EIB Current Module SM/S Intelligent Installation Systems. User Manual SM/S In = 16 A AC Un = 230 V AC

ABB STOTZ-KONTAKT. ABB i-bus EIB Current Module SM/S Intelligent Installation Systems. User Manual SM/S In = 16 A AC Un = 230 V AC User Mnul ntelligent nstlltion Systems A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 30 ma 30 ma n = AC Un = 230 V AC 30 ma 9 10 11 12 C ABB STOTZ-KONTAKT Appliction Softwre Current Vlue Threshold/1 Contents Pge 1 Device Chrcteristics...

More information

Kirchhoff s Rules. Kirchhoff s Laws. Kirchhoff s Rules. Kirchhoff s Laws. Practice. Understanding SPH4UW. Kirchhoff s Voltage Rule (KVR):

Kirchhoff s Rules. Kirchhoff s Laws. Kirchhoff s Rules. Kirchhoff s Laws. Practice. Understanding SPH4UW. Kirchhoff s Voltage Rule (KVR): SPH4UW Kirchhoff s ules Kirchhoff s oltge ule (K): Sum of voltge drops round loop is zero. Kirchhoff s Lws Kirchhoff s Current ule (KC): Current going in equls current coming out. Kirchhoff s ules etween

More information

Electrical data Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V Nominal voltage frequency

Electrical data Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V Nominal voltage frequency echnicl dt sheet SR24A-MF Prmeterisle rotry ctutor for ll vlves Nominl torque 20 Nm Nominl voltge AC/DC 24 V Control Modulting DC (0)2...10 V Vrile Position feedck DC 2...10 V Vrile echnicl dt Electricl

More information

& Y Connected resistors, Light emitting diode.

& Y Connected resistors, Light emitting diode. & Y Connected resistors, Light emitting diode. Experiment # 02 Ojectives: To get some hndson experience with the physicl instruments. To investigte the equivlent resistors, nd Y connected resistors, nd

More information

Digital Design. Sequential Logic Design -- Controllers. Copyright 2007 Frank Vahid

Digital Design. Sequential Logic Design -- Controllers. Copyright 2007 Frank Vahid Digitl Design Sequentil Logic Design -- Controllers Slides to ccompny the tetook Digitl Design, First Edition, y, John Wiley nd Sons Pulishers, 27. http://www.ddvhid.com Copyright 27 Instructors of courses

More information

Operation Manual. Sewing Machine KNOWING YOUR SEWING MACHINE SEWING BASICS UTILITY STITCHES APPENDIX

Operation Manual. Sewing Machine KNOWING YOUR SEWING MACHINE SEWING BASICS UTILITY STITCHES APPENDIX Opertion Mnul Sewing Mchine Product Code: 885-V58/V59/V68/V69 KNOWING YOUR SEWING MACHINE SEWING BASICS UTILITY STITCHES APPENDIX Be sure to red this document before using the mchine. We recommend tht

More information

TUR DOORS SHOWER DOORS

TUR DOORS SHOWER DOORS TUR DOORS SHOWER DOORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS TUB DOORS: LBTDB6062 SHOWER DOORS: LBSDB4876 LBSDB6076 VERSION: 3.2 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION TUB DOORS SHOWER DOORS PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION READ

More information

Discontinued AN6262N, AN6263N. (planed maintenance type, maintenance type, planed discontinued typed, discontinued type)

Discontinued AN6262N, AN6263N. (planed maintenance type, maintenance type, planed discontinued typed, discontinued type) ICs for Cssette, Cssette Deck ANN, ANN Puse Detection s of Rdio Cssette, Cssette Deck Overview The ANN nd the ANN re the puse detection integrted circuits which select the progrm on the cssette tpe. In

More information

Electrical data Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V Nominal voltage frequency

Electrical data Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V Nominal voltage frequency echnicl dt sheet SF24A-MF Prmeterisle spring-return ctutor with emergency control function for djusting dmpers in technicl uilding instlltions Air dmper size up to pprox. 4 m² Nominl torque 20 Nm Nominl

More information

Operation Manual. Embroidery and Sewing Machine. Product Code: 882-W20/W22

Operation Manual. Embroidery and Sewing Machine. Product Code: 882-W20/W22 Opertion Mnul Emroidery nd Sewing Mchine Product Code: 882-W20/W22 Be sure to red this document efore using the mchine. We recommend tht you keep this document nery for future reference. INTRODUCTION

More information

CAL. NX15 DUO-DISPLAY QUARTZ

CAL. NX15 DUO-DISPLAY QUARTZ L. NX15 UO-ISPLY QURTZ l nlogue time disply l igitl time nd clendr l hronogrph l Tchymeter l t recll function l lrm l Illuminting light (Electroluminescent pnel) ENGLISH Illuminting light (TIME/LENR mode

More information

G9SA. Safety Relay Unit. The G9SA Series Offers a Complete Line-up of Compact Units. Model Number Structure

G9SA. Safety Relay Unit. The G9SA Series Offers a Complete Line-up of Compact Units. Model Number Structure Sfety Rely Unit G9 CSM_G9_DS_E The G9 Series Offers Complete Line-up of Compct Units. Four kinds of -mm wide Units re ville: A -pole model, -pole model, nd models with poles nd OFF-dely poles, s well s

More information

* * 98/9949 CS 98/ Point Latch includes these additional parts. 1-Point Latch (LBL) Customer Service. Installation Instructions

* * 98/9949 CS 98/ Point Latch includes these additional parts. 1-Point Latch (LBL) Customer Service. Installation Instructions *23970734* 23970734 98/9949 CS 98/9949 Instlltion Instructions This instruction covers new instlltion of the 98/9949 conceled verticl device for hollow metl nd luminum doors. RF Also covered is the CS

More information

001CK CK0012 FR-001CK0013 FR EN English

001CK CK0012 FR-001CK0013 FR EN English AUDIO ENTRY KIT FA00959EN 001DC00AC 001DC0EARY 7 10 001CS1PLCO INSTALLATION MANUAL 001CK0009 001CK001 FR001CK0013 FR EN English Generl Notes A Red the instructions crefully before beginning the instlltion

More information

PB-735 HD DP. Industrial Line. Automatic punch and bind machine for books and calendars

PB-735 HD DP. Industrial Line. Automatic punch and bind machine for books and calendars PB-735 HD DP Automtic punch nd bind mchine for books nd clendrs A further step for the utomtion of double loop binding. A clever nd flexible mchine ble to punch nd bind in line up to 9/16. Using the best

More information

How to remove BRNS/BRFS series from a PWB

How to remove BRNS/BRFS series from a PWB Applictions mnul for BRNS/BRFS series How to remove BRNS/BRFS series from PWB VER1.0 Applictions Mnul BRNS/BRFS series Pge 1. Overview 1-1 1.1 Overview 1-1 2. Preprtion 2-1 2.1 2.2 2.3 Removl tool Adhesive

More information

ARK CHEVRON INSTALLATION GUIDE

ARK CHEVRON INSTALLATION GUIDE ARK CHEVRON INSTALLATION GUIDE THANK YOU FOR YOUR PURCHASE OF DUCHÂTEAU WALL COVERINGS. We recommend you hire n experienced finish crpenter or wood flooring instller to chieve qulity results with ll DuChâteu

More information

Sequential Logic (2) Synchronous vs Asynchronous Sequential Circuit. Clock Signal. Synchronous Sequential Circuits. FSM Overview 9/10/12

Sequential Logic (2) Synchronous vs Asynchronous Sequential Circuit. Clock Signal. Synchronous Sequential Circuits. FSM Overview 9/10/12 9//2 Sequentil (2) ENGG5 st Semester, 22 Dr. Hden So Deprtment of Electricl nd Electronic Engineering http://www.eee.hku.hk/~engg5 Snchronous vs Asnchronous Sequentil Circuit This Course snchronous Sequentil

More information

Ultra Low Cost ACCELEROMETER

Ultra Low Cost ACCELEROMETER Chip Scle Pckged Fully Integrted Therml Accelerometer MXC622xXC Rev,A 8/19/2011 Pge 1 of 13 Fetures Generl Description Fully Integrted Therml Accelerometer X/Y Axis, 8 bit, Accelertion A/D Output (± 2g)

More information

Mini Mario & Friends: amiibo Challenge

Mini Mario & Friends: amiibo Challenge Mrio & Friends: Chllenge 1 Importnt Informtion Bsic Informtion 2 Introduct ion 3 About Gme 4 Gettin g Strted 5 Sving nd Deleting Dt How to Ply 6 Level Mp 7 Plying Levels 8 Mi ni Toy Abilities 9 Objects/

More information

Using Compass 3 to Program the Senso Diva Page 1

Using Compass 3 to Program the Senso Diva Page 1 Pge 1 Selection of Senso Div Instrument Style SD-CIC Custom CIC Up to 50-60dB HL Hering Loss SD-XM Custom ITE or ITC with Loctor Up to 60-70dB HL Hering Loss SD-9M BTE with Loctor Up to 70-80dB HL Hering

More information

9.4. ; 65. A family of curves has polar equations. ; 66. The astronomer Giovanni Cassini ( ) studied the family of curves with polar equations

9.4. ; 65. A family of curves has polar equations. ; 66. The astronomer Giovanni Cassini ( ) studied the family of curves with polar equations 54 CHAPTER 9 PARAMETRIC EQUATINS AND PLAR CRDINATES 49. r, 5. r sin 3, 5 54 Find the points on the given curve where the tngent line is horizontl or verticl. 5. r 3 cos 5. r e 53. r cos 54. r sin 55. Show

More information

Patterns and Algebra

Patterns and Algebra Student Book Series D Mthletis Instnt Workooks Copyright Series D Contents Topi Ptterns nd funtions identifying nd reting ptterns skip ounting ompleting nd desriing ptterns numer ptterns in tles growing

More information

Tubing Spacers. Backing Plate. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a a. a a. a a

Tubing Spacers. Backing Plate. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a. a a a. a a. a a Grnd Slm Instlltion Instructions TACO Metls Inc., 98 NE 179th Street Mimi, Florid 33162 hndyhnk@tcomrine.com tcomrine.com This Box Contins: 1- Port side Grnd Slm 1- Strbord side Grnd Slm 4-5/16 x 1 stinless

More information

Three-Phase Synchronous Machines The synchronous machine can be used to operate as: 1. Synchronous motors 2. Synchronous generators (Alternator)

Three-Phase Synchronous Machines The synchronous machine can be used to operate as: 1. Synchronous motors 2. Synchronous generators (Alternator) Three-Phse Synchronous Mchines The synchronous mchine cn be used to operte s: 1. Synchronous motors 2. Synchronous genertors (Alterntor) Synchronous genertor is lso referred to s lterntor since it genertes

More information

LEXUS IS250/IS350 FRONT SPOILER Section I - Installation Preparation. Part Number: Section I - Installation Preparation.

LEXUS IS250/IS350 FRONT SPOILER Section I - Installation Preparation. Part Number: Section I - Installation Preparation. Section I - Instlltion Preprtion Prt Numer: 0854-53830 Section I - Instlltion Preprtion Kit Contents 3 Description Front spoiler Hrdwre g Instruction mnul Additionl Items Required For Instlltion Conflicts

More information

The Discussion of this exercise covers the following points:

The Discussion of this exercise covers the following points: Exercise 4 Bttery Chrging Methods EXERCISE OBJECTIVE When you hve completed this exercise, you will be fmilir with the different chrging methods nd chrge-control techniques commonly used when chrging Ni-MI

More information

Spiral Tilings with C-curves

Spiral Tilings with C-curves Spirl Tilings with -curves Using ombintorics to Augment Trdition hris K. Plmer 19 North Albny Avenue hicgo, Illinois, 0 chris@shdowfolds.com www.shdowfolds.com Abstrct Spirl tilings used by rtisns through

More information

Electrical data Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V Nominal voltage frequency

Electrical data Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V Nominal voltage frequency echnicl dt sheet EVC24A-MF Prmeterisle gloe vlve ctutor for 2-wy nd 3-wy gloe vlves Actuting force 2500 N Nominl voltge AC/DC 24 V Control modulting DC (0)2...10 V Vrile Nominl stroke 40 mm Actuting time

More information

Job Sheet 2. Variable Speed Drive Operation OBJECTIVE PROCEDURE. To install and operate a Variable Speed Drive.

Job Sheet 2. Variable Speed Drive Operation OBJECTIVE PROCEDURE. To install and operate a Variable Speed Drive. Job Sheet 2 Vrible Speed Drive Opertion OBJECTIVE To instll nd operte Vrible Speed Drive. PROCEDURE Before proceeding with this job, complete the sfety check list in Appendix B. 1. On the Vrible Speed

More information

Ultra Low Cost ACCELEROMETER

Ultra Low Cost ACCELEROMETER Chip Scle Pckged Digitl Therml Orienttion Sensing Accelerometer MXC6226XC Document Version D Pge 1 of 13 Fetures Generl Description Fully Integrted Therml Accelerometer X/Y Axis, 8 bit, Accelertion A/D

More information

Video Tutorials Included on DVD

Video Tutorials Included on DVD Instruction Manual Video Tutorials Included on DVD With Instruction Manual, view the instructional movies providing supplementary information about cutwork creation. Please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com

More information

Synchronous Generator Line Synchronization

Synchronous Generator Line Synchronization Synchronous Genertor Line Synchroniztion 1 Synchronous Genertor Line Synchroniztion Introduction One issue in power genertion is synchronous genertor strting. Typiclly, synchronous genertor is connected

More information

Multi-Point Astragal Prehanger Installation Instructions

Multi-Point Astragal Prehanger Installation Instructions Multi-Point Astrgl Prehnger Instlltion Instructions 8817 West Mrket Street Colfx, NC 27235 800.334.2006 www.endurproducts.com Tools Required: Endur Router Templte (or equivlent) Router with 5/8" dimeter

More information

CS2204 DIGITAL LOGIC & STATE MACHINE DESIGN fall 2008

CS2204 DIGITAL LOGIC & STATE MACHINE DESIGN fall 2008 CS224 DIGITAL LOGIC & STATE MACHINE DESIGN fll 28 STAND ALONE XILINX PROJECT 2-TO- MULTIPLEXER. Gols : Lern how to develop stnd lone 2-to- multiplexer () Xilinx project during which the following re introduced

More information

Arduino for Model Railroaders

Arduino for Model Railroaders Steve Mssikker Arduino for Model Rilroders Ornge Book Protocol 2 Full Description November 28 Tble of contents Dontors Documenttion Kit V.4-8 Pge 2 I wnt to tke the time to sincerely thnk you for your

More information

ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS Multi Line 6 x8 255x193x203cm / 100 1 /2 x76 x80 Poly-Tex, Inc. PO Box 458 27725 Dnville Avenue Cstle Rock, MN 55010 We Site: www.poly-tex.com English - 69717 Hoy Greenhouse Service

More information

From Off-The-Shelf to Market-Ready New Age Enclosures is your Single Source Solution. Let us quote modifiying our Stock Enclosures to meet your

From Off-The-Shelf to Market-Ready New Age Enclosures is your Single Source Solution. Let us quote modifiying our Stock Enclosures to meet your From Off-The-Shelf to Market-Ready New ge Enclosures is your Single Source Solution. Let us quote modifiying our Stock Enclosures to meet your end-use. visit newageenclosures.com/services or call 855-4N-ENCL

More information

Translate and Classify Conic Sections

Translate and Classify Conic Sections TEKS 9.6 A.5.A, A.5.B, A.5.D, A.5.E Trnslte nd Clssif Conic Sections Before You grphed nd wrote equtions of conic sections. Now You will trnslte conic sections. Wh? So ou cn model motion, s in E. 49. Ke

More information

Safety Relay Unit. Main contacts Auxiliary contact Number of input channels Rated voltage Model Category. possible 24 VAC/VDC G9SA-501.

Safety Relay Unit. Main contacts Auxiliary contact Number of input channels Rated voltage Model Category. possible 24 VAC/VDC G9SA-501. Sfety Rely Unit The Series Offers Complete Line-up of Compct Units. Four kinds of -mm wide Units re ville: A -pole model, -pole model, nd models with poles nd OFF-dely poles, s well s Two-hnd ler. Simple

More information

1 tray of toffee 1 bar of toffee. 10 In the decimal number, 0 7, the 7 refers to 7 tenths or

1 tray of toffee 1 bar of toffee. 10 In the decimal number, 0 7, the 7 refers to 7 tenths or Chpter 3 Deciml Numers Do you know wht DECIMAL is? In chpter, we delt with units, s, 0 s nd 00 s. When you tke single unit nd divide it into (or 0 or 00) its, wht we then hve re deciml frctions of whole

More information

GEI E INSTRUCTIONS M ULTI-CONTACT AUXILIARY RELAYS TYPE HFA53. GE Protection and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern, PA

GEI E INSTRUCTIONS M ULTI-CONTACT AUXILIARY RELAYS TYPE HFA53. GE Protection and Control 205 Great Valley Parkway Malvern, PA GEI-6871 9E INSTRUCTIONS M ULTI-CONTACT AUXILIARY RELAYS TYPE HFA53 GE Protection nd Control 205 Gret Vlley Prkwy Mlvern, PA 19355-1337 2 for Semi-flush Mounting (Front View) Connected Rely with Flnge

More information

Application Note. Differential Amplifier

Application Note. Differential Amplifier Appliction Note AN367 Differentil Amplifier Author: Dve n Ess Associted Project: Yes Associted Prt Fmily: CY8C9x66, CY8C7x43, CY8C4x3A PSoC Designer ersion: 4. SP3 Abstrct For mny sensing pplictions, desirble

More information

Pilot Operated Proportional DC Valve Series D*1FB. Pilot Operated Proportional DC Valve Series D*1FB. D*1FBR and D*1FBZ

Pilot Operated Proportional DC Valve Series D*1FB. Pilot Operated Proportional DC Valve Series D*1FB. D*1FBR and D*1FBZ Ctlogue HY11-35/UK Chrcteristics Series D*1F Ctlogue HY11-35/UK Regenertive nd Hyrid Function Series D*1F he pilot operted proportionl directionl vlves D*1F re ville in 4 sizes: D31F - NG1 (CEO 5) D41F

More information

E-PLEX 1 MORTISE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

E-PLEX 1 MORTISE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS E-PLEX 1 MORTISE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Tools Required.................................................................3 Exploded Instll Prts...........................................................4

More information

NORTH STAR 4-PANEL PATIO DOOR ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

NORTH STAR 4-PANEL PATIO DOOR ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 40684 Talbot Line, St. Thomas, Ont., N5P 3T Phone: (519) 637-7899 Toll Free: (800) 65-5701 Fax: (519) 637-3403 Web Site: www.northstarwindows.com NORTH STR 4-PNEL PTIO DOOR SSEMLY INSTRUCTIONS (JN/P-Dr04/4Panssy

More information

Series. Teacher. Numbers

Series. Teacher. Numbers Series B Techer Copyright 2009 3P Lerning. All rights reserved. First edition printed 2009 in Austrli. A ctlogue record for this book is vilble from 3P Lerning Ltd. ISBN 978-1-921860-17-1 Ownership of

More information

ET 51 EXTERIOR ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING INSTALLATION

ET 51 EXTERIOR ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING INSTALLATION EXTERIOR ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH MOULDING 51 INSTALLATION The procedure descried elow is for the LH side. Use the sme procedure for oth the RH nd LH sides, unless otherwise specified. 1. INSTALL ROOF SIDE

More information

Notice for TAIYO YUDEN Products

Notice for TAIYO YUDEN Products Notice for AIYO YUDEN Products [ For Generl Electronic Equipment (Generl Environment) ] Plese red this notice efore using the AIYO YUDEN products. REMINDERS Product informtion in this ctlog is s of Octoer

More information

670 Freestyle/Style Door with In-Line Panel

670 Freestyle/Style Door with In-Line Panel M 670 Freestyle/Style oor with In-Line Pnel Style Series Option Metl HK87 Slide MGNETIC PULL HNLE KIT with Mgnet Vinyl 083 JM E 989 MGNETIC OOR STOP N H900 PN HE SCREW C (CUH or MG) 781 HEER 716 HEER /

More information

First Round Solutions Grades 4, 5, and 6

First Round Solutions Grades 4, 5, and 6 First Round Solutions Grdes 4, 5, nd 1) There re four bsic rectngles not mde up of smller ones There re three more rectngles mde up of two smller ones ech, two rectngles mde up of three smller ones ech,

More information

Electrical data Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V Nominal voltage frequency

Electrical data Nominal voltage AC/DC 24 V Nominal voltage frequency echnicl dt sheet RF24-MF-O Communictive rotry ctutor with emergency control function for ll vlves Nominl torque 2.5 Nm Nominl voltge AC/DC 24 V Control Modulting DC ()2...1 V Position feedck DC 2...1 V

More information

Radiant systems 0801EN March 2016 Radiant plasterboard ceiling and/or floor system ISO /7

Radiant systems 0801EN March 2016 Radiant plasterboard ceiling and/or floor system ISO /7 RADIANT CEILING SYSTEM Description is rdint ceiling/wll system relized with 600x1200 mm EPS200 preformed pnels coted with 0,3 mm luminium thermo-conductor sheets, where the plstic pipe with n externl Ø

More information

Canopy Bed Frame. Date: 8 Jun 15 www. potterybarn.com Page 1 of 12 Rev:

Canopy Bed Frame. Date: 8 Jun 15 www. potterybarn.com Page 1 of 12 Rev: Cnopy Bed Frme Dte: 8 un 15 www. potterybrn.com Pge 1 of 12 Importnt Sfety Instructions: WARNIN: Do not llow children to climb on, pull on, or hng from cnopy. Filure to follow these instructions cn result

More information

JUMO Wtrans B Programmable Head Transmitter with Radio Transmission

JUMO Wtrans B Programmable Head Transmitter with Radio Transmission Dt Sheet 707060 Seite 1/10 JUMO Wtrns B Progrmmble Hed Trnsmitter with Rdio Trnsmission Brief description The Wtrns B hed trnsmitter with wireless dt trnsmission is used in connection with Wtrns receiver

More information

Pilot Operated Servo Proportional DC Valve Series D*1FP

Pilot Operated Servo Proportional DC Valve Series D*1FP Ctlogue HY11-5/UK Chrcteristics he series of pilot operted servo proportionl vlves D*1F trnsfers the dvntges of the rker ptented Voice Coil Drive (VCD ) to lrger frme sizes nd thus high flow rtes. he high

More information

From Off-The-Shelf to Market-Ready New Age Enclosures is your Single Source Solution. Let us quote modifiying our Stock Enclosures to meet your

From Off-The-Shelf to Market-Ready New Age Enclosures is your Single Source Solution. Let us quote modifiying our Stock Enclosures to meet your From Off-The-Shelf to Market-Ready New ge Enclosures is your Single Source Solution. Let us quote modifiying our Stock Enclosures to meet your end-use. visit newageenclosures.com/services or call 855-4N-ENCL

More information

Device installation. AFR 1xx - Feature Description of the Smart Load. AFR1xx 145 % 200 %

Device installation. AFR 1xx - Feature Description of the Smart Load. AFR1xx 145 % 200 % KM systems, s.r.o. Dr. M. Horákové 559, 460 06 Lierec 7, Czech Repulic tel. +420 485 130 314, fx +420 482 736 896 emil : km@km.cz, url : www.km.cz sturtion of the mgnetic circuit of the VT. This often

More information

Series Door with In-Line Panel (GIH / AHD)

Series Door with In-Line Panel (GIH / AHD) 600 7000 Series oor with In-Line Pnel (GIH / H) H900 P H 083 JM C 781 HR 716 HR / SILL ISRT H900 P H F H170 MGTIC STRIP H900 P H 083 JM H5195 STTIG LOCK VRTICL VIYL GLZIG X Y Z HORIZOTL VIYL GLZIG FRM

More information

Pilot Operated Servo Proportional DC Valve Series D*1FP

Pilot Operated Servo Proportional DC Valve Series D*1FP Ctlogue HY11-5/UK Chrcteristics he series of pilot operted servo proportionl vlves D*1F trnsfers the dvntges of the rker ptented Voice Coil Drive (VCD ) to lrger frme sizes nd thus high flow rtes. he high

More information

A Development of Earthing-Resistance-Estimation Instrument

A Development of Earthing-Resistance-Estimation Instrument A Development of Erthing-Resistnce-Estimtion Instrument HITOSHI KIJIMA Abstrct: - Whenever erth construction work is done, the implnted number nd depth of electrodes hve to be estimted in order to obtin

More information

On the Description of Communications Between Software Components with UML

On the Description of Communications Between Software Components with UML On the Description of Communictions Between Softwre Components with UML Zhiwei An Dennis Peters Fculty of Engineering nd Applied Science Memoril University of Newfoundlnd St. John s NL A1B 3X5 zhiwei@engr.mun.c

More information

Regular languages can be expressed as regular expressions.

Regular languages can be expressed as regular expressions. Regulr lnguges cn e expressed s regulr expressions. A generl nondeterministic finite utomton (GNFA) is kind of NFA such tht: There is unique strt stte nd is unique ccept stte. Every pir of nodes re connected

More information

MAXIMUM FLOWS IN FUZZY NETWORKS WITH FUNNEL-SHAPED NODES

MAXIMUM FLOWS IN FUZZY NETWORKS WITH FUNNEL-SHAPED NODES MAXIMUM FLOWS IN FUZZY NETWORKS WITH FUNNEL-SHAPED NODES Romn V. Tyshchuk Informtion Systems Deprtment, AMI corportion, Donetsk, Ukrine E-mil: rt_science@hotmil.com 1 INTRODUCTION During the considertion

More information

Products no longer available

Products no longer available echnicl dt sheet otry ctutor F2-P(-O) ultifunctionl rotry ctutor with emergency control for 2 nd 3 wy control bll vlve orque Nm Nominl voltge C/DC 2 V Control: odulting DC... V or vrible Position feedbck

More information

Patterns and Relationships

Patterns and Relationships Series Techer Ptterns nd Reltionships opyright 009 3P Lerning. All rights reserved. First edition printed 009 in Austrli. A ctlogue record for this ook is ville from 3P Lerning Ltd. ISBN 978-1-91860-3-4

More information

GEH-2024E Supersedes GEH INSTRUCTIONS MULTICONTACT AUXILARY RELAY. TYPE HFASl. www. ElectricalPartManuals. com. GENERAL fl ELECTRIC

GEH-2024E Supersedes GEH INSTRUCTIONS MULTICONTACT AUXILARY RELAY. TYPE HFASl. www. ElectricalPartManuals. com. GENERAL fl ELECTRIC INSTRUCTIONS MULTICONTACT AUXILARY RELAY TYPE HFASl GENERAL fl ELECTRIC E Supersedes 0 MULTICONTACT AUXILIARY RELAY TYPE HFASl DESCRIPTION The HFASl relys re instntneous, hinged-rmture, multi-contct, uxiliry

More information

Misty. Sudnow Dot Songs

Misty. Sudnow Dot Songs Sudnow Dot Songs isty T The Dot Song is nottionl system tht depicts voiced chords in wy where the non-music reder cn find these firly redily. But the Dot Song is not intended be red, not s sight reder

More information

Understanding Basic Analog Ideal Op Amps

Understanding Basic Analog Ideal Op Amps Appliction Report SLAA068A - April 2000 Understnding Bsic Anlog Idel Op Amps Ron Mncini Mixed Signl Products ABSTRACT This ppliction report develops the equtions for the idel opertionl mplifier (op mp).

More information

Extremely small "footprint" and the highest circuit density available AK550. Front Wire Entry

Extremely small footprint and the highest circuit density available AK550. Front Wire Entry FIXED PRINTED CIRCUIT Tubulr Screw Clmp For use when stndrd size printed circuit terminl blocks re too lrge for vilble spce or where very smll circuit bord is utilized. Our new subminiture design offers

More information